1. travel
2. tourist destinations
3. united kingdom

How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Control Panel
Accessing the Control Panel
Available Commands
Using the Help System
The User Interface Ex pand…
Ansoft Information
Projects Ex pand…
Translators Ex pand…
Print Manager Ex pand…
Process Manager Ex pand…
The Utilities Panel
The Color Manager
2D Modeler Ex pand…
File Menu Ex pand…
Edit Menu Ex pand…
Reshape Menu
Boolean Menu
Arrange Menu
Object Menu Ex pand…
Constraint Menu Ex pand…
Model Menu Ex pand…
Window Menu Ex pand…
Help Menu Ex pand…
Go Back
Top
About Help
PlotData Ex pand…
Evaluator Ex pand…
Datasets Ex pand…
Material Manager Ex pand…
Exiting the Control Panel
Index
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
More
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX Workstations
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Clicking and Dragging with the Mouse
Mouse Help Messages
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving and Resizing Windows
Moving Windows
Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Cascading Menus
Pop-up Windows
Accessing Menu Commands
Executing Commands with the Mouse
Executing Commands with the Tool Bar
Executing Commands with the Keyboard
Keyboard Shortcuts
Hotkeys
Using the Arrow Keys
Buttons
Buttons with Menus
Default Buttons
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
The User Interface (continued)
On/Off Buttons
Selecting Buttons with the Keyboard
Text and Numbers
Default Text and Numbers
Fields Highlighted by Default
User Messages
Error Messages
Information Messages
Query/Warning Messages
Things to Consider
Mouse Settings
Changing Mouse Settings on the Workstation
Changing Mouse Settings on the PC
Commands that Operate on the Active Window
Commands that Operate on a Selected Item
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Project Commands and Fields
Notes
Model
Open
Schedule
Size
Save Notes
Recover
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Delete
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
Go Back
Top
Project Directories
Directory Structures for Maxwell Software Packages
Single Layer Directory Structures
Multi-Layer Directory Structures
Reclassifying Projects
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
Translators for Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Software
Translators for Berkeley SPICE
Translators for Maxwell Ensemble
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translating PC AutoCAD Files on Sun Workstations
Translation Manager Fields
Source and Destination
Source File(s)
Destination Directory or File
File Folder Icon
Help
Options
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
More
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Translating AutoCAD .dxf Files to Maxwell 2D Software
Geometric Objects
Hints for Translating .dxf to .sm2 Files
Curved Objects
Open Lines and Self-Intersecting Objects
Crossed Lines and Open Vertices
Layers
Hidden Objects and Construction Lines
Cross-Hatching and Frames
Point Objects
Printing and Paper Space
Units of Measurement
Translating Maxwell 2D Field Simulator v. 4.x Files to 2D Modeler Files
Inverted Geometric Model
Object Colors
Translating 2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D Field Simulator v. 4 Files
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Translators (continued)
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
Inverted Geometric Model
Curved Geometric Objects
Background Object
Object Colors
Translating Maxwell 2D Files to Solid Modeler Files
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
Curved Edges
Translating Maxwell .sm2 Files to .dxf Files
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
Curved Edges
Translating Sonnet .geo Files to Maxwell Strata .sm2 Files
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
Ports in Translation
Translation Failure
Translating Berkeley SPICE 3E2 Files to ContecSPICE, HSPICE, or PSpice
Translating Previous Versions of Ensemble to Ensemble 6.0
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
More
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Print Manager
Screen Colors and Screen Captures
Black and White Printers
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for Printing a Screen Capture
Saving a Screen Capture to a File
Cancel Printing
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and More Options
Destination(s)
File
Printer
Print Command
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Invert Black/White
Transparent Background
Transparency Mode
Draw Image Border
Color Mapping
Use Color
Shade Text
Shade Colors
Halftone
Dither
Threshold
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Print Manager (continued)
Exit
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File (Print Manager)
File/Open (Print Manager)
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print (Print Manager)
Cancelling a Print Job
File/Exit
Edit (Print Manager)
Grab screen
Printing from the Control Menu
Canceling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
Entire Window
Subwindow
Rectangle
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
Jobs Commands
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Configure Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
The Utilities Panel
Utilities Panel Commands
Maxwell Administrator
Licenses
License Administrators
Checking in Your License
Checking in a License Non-Graphically
Maxwell Administrator Commands
File Commands (Maxwell Administrator)
File/Import (Maxwell Administrator)
File/Save (Maxwell Administrator)
File/Save As (Maxwell Administrator)
File/Exit
Daemon Commands
Daemon/Kill Daemon
Daemon/Restart Daemon
View Commands (Maxwell Administrator)
View/Users
View/Licenses
Adding Features
View/Error Log
Updating the Error Log
Clearing the Error Log
Configure Commands
Configure/Daemons
Configure/Administrators
Hazards
If You Lose or Cannot Get a License
Error Messages
Unable to get a license (No licenses left)
Licenses have not been installed
Unable to get a license (No license for this product)
Unable to get a license (Excluded user/host)
The Non-Graphical Interface
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
The 2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Menu Bar
Drawing Region
Project Windows
Subwindows
Subwindow Coordinate Systems
Subwindows Versus Project Windows
Active Windows
Status Bar
Message Bar
Differences Between 2D Modelers
Drawing Plane
Constraints
General Procedure
Selecting Points With the Keyboard
Object Names and Colors
Viewing a Model
Zooming and Panning in Subwindows
Displaying Objects as Wire Frames or Shaded Solids
Reading, Writing, and Saving Objects
Things to Consider
Go Back
Top
About Help
Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models
Keep it Simple
Level of Detail
Background Object
Sizing the Drawing Region
Objects within Objects
Consider Boundaries
Partial Overlapping Not Allowed
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print/Entire Window
File/Print/Subwindow
File/Print/Rectangle
Print Setup Within the Windows
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Duplicate/Along Line
Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc
Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Select/By Area
Edit/Select/By Name
Edit/Select/All Items
Edit/Select/Open Objects
Edit/Select/Closed Objects
Edit/Select/Model Objects
Edit/Select/NonModel Objects
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Deselect All/Current Project
Edit/Deselect All/All Projects
More
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Color
Name
Show Hatches
Model Object
Show Orientation
Text Attributes
Text
Color
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Edit Menu (continued)
Alignment
Slant
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection
Edit/Visibility/By Item
Edit/Show All
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Open Objects
Closed Objects
Simple Closed Objects
Complex Closed Objects
Entering Points from the Keyboard
Selecting Points in Several Subwindows
Overlapping Objects
Self-Intersecting Objects
Modeling Thin Objects
Importing Complex Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Scaling Text
Generating Screen Captures
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Circle/2 Point
Object/Circle/3 Point
Object/Spiral
Go Back
Top
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Object/Spiral/Circular
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraints and Parametric Sweeps
Direction of Constraints
Over-Constraining a Model
Deleting Objects and Edges
Moving Objects and Edges
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance
Effect of Point-to-Point Constraints on Object Dimensions
Constraints Between Arbitrary Object Points
Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Modify/By Clicking
Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables
Defining Functional Constraints
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Delete/By Clicking
Constraint/Delete/By Name
Constraint/Delete/All
Go Back
Constraint/Enforce
Errors in Enforcing Constraints
Exiting With Unenforced Constraints
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window Settings
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Selecting the Active Project Window
Moving and Resizing Windows Using the Mouse
Entering Points With the Keyboard
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Tile/Subwindows
Window/Tile/Projects
Window/Tile/All
Window/Cascade
Window/Cascade/Subwindows
Window/Cascade/Projects
Window/Cascade/All
Window/Change View
Window/Change View/Zoom In
Window/Change View/Zoom Out
Window/Change View/Fit All
Window/Change View/Fit Selection
Window/Change View/Fit Drawing
More
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Coordinate System/Shift
Window/Coordinate System/Rotate
Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge
Window/Coordinate System/Reset
Things to Consider
Window/Grid
Default Grid Settings
Inappropriate Grid Spacing
Invisible Grid Points
Window/Fill Solids
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Window Menu (continued)
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Help Menu
Help Commands
Help/About Help
Help/On Context
Help/On Module
Help/On Control Panel
Help/Contents
Help/Index
Help/Shortcuts
Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys
Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
PlotData
PlotData Commands
PlotData Tool Bar
PlotData Overview
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
PlotData and the 2D Modeler
Creating a Plot Using a Parametric Equation
Opening a Plot From a Data File
Opening a Plot Created in Maxwell Software
PlotData File Menu
File/Import Signals
File/Print
File/Printer Setup
File/Exit
PlotData View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Make Square
View/Tool Bar
View/Command Prompt
View/Status Bar
More
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Entering a Parametric Equation
Example of a Plotted Equation
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
PlotData (continued)
Plot/Format Axes
Plot Axis Settings
Heading
X Label and Y Label
Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax
Rmin and Rmax
Major Ticks and Major Grids
Minor Ticks and Minor Grids
Show Legends
Show Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
Line Formats
Color
Show Markers
Marker
Width
Style
Show Line
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
More
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Stack commands
Push
Pop
RlDn
RlUp
Exch
Clear
Name/Constant
Degrees
Radians
Arc
Calculator Buttons
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
PlotData (continued)
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData Window Menu
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Close
PlotData Help
Using Data Files
Accessing PlotData Outside of the Utilities Panel
Accessing PlotData from the UNIX Prompt on the Workstation
Accessing PlotData from the Command Line on the PC
Options
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Commands
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
More
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Creating Datasets
Dataset File Menu
File/New
File/Open
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Import Text File
File/Exit
Dataset Edit Menu
Edit/Insert Coords/Before
Edit/Insert Coords/After
Edit/Delete Coords
Dataset View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Show Coordinates
View/Plot Settings
View/Graph Settings
Dataset Arrange Menu
Arrange/Move
Arrange/Scale
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material Properties
Magnetostatic Properties
Electrostatic Properties
Functions
Modifying a Function
Deleting a Function
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic Material
Defining a Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Fit All
Fit Drawing
Window
Window/Measure
Window/Grid
Window/SnapTo Mode
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
How to use the
table of contents:
To see the documentation
for a topic, select it from
the list.
Maxwell Control Panel — Table of Contents
Material Manager (continued)
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
To see a more detailed
listing of a topic, select the
Expand button beside it.
To learn more about the
online help system,
select About Help.
Go Back
Top
About Help
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Control Panel
Accessing the Control Panel
Available Commands
Exiting the Control Panel
The Maxwell Control Panel
Control Panel
This is the Maxwell Control Panel:
Use the Maxwell Control Panel to do the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
View information on how to contact Ansoft.
Create a new project for a Maxwell software package.
Select an existing project and run a Maxwell software package.
Rename, copy, recover, compress, and delete projects.
Translate files in various formats into the file formats used by the Maxwell software
package you purchased.
Schedule a time to solve a project.
Print hard copies of screens and specify how they are printed.
Access the Utilities panel, which enables you to do the following:
• Adjust the colors in which Maxwell products display.
• Open and create 2D geometric models.
• Derive or create new materials.
• Display plots of equations, print and save plots, and load plots created in Maxwell
Spicelink.
Evaluate mathematical expressions.
For instructions on installing the Maxwell Control Panel and other Maxwell software, see
the Maxwell Installation Guide.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
1
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Control Panel
Accessing the Control
Panel
Available Commands
Exiting the Control Panel
The Maxwell Control Panel
Accessing the Control Panel
Before you run the software, you need to make sure you are using a windowing system
that is compatible with the Maxwell software and access the Maxwell Control Panel.
> Do one of the following to access the Maxwell Control Panel:
• If you are running the Maxwell software from a workstation:
1. Use a windowing system (X Windows, AIXwindows, DECwindows, etc.) to run
the software.
2. Enter the following at the UNIX prompt:
maxwell &
• If you are running the Maxwell software from a PC:
1. Use Microsoft Windows NT to run the software.
2. Double-click the mouse on the Maxwell Control Panel icon.
The Control Panel appears.
Warning:
In general, running any software when you are logged in as root can be dangerous. As Evi Nemeth, Garth Snyder, and Scott Seebass put in their book
UNIX® System Administration Handbook:
“Using the root login is like driving an expensive sports car; it gets
you where you need to go quickly, but an accident will result in a
big repair bill. You should use the root login with great reverence
and caution, and never take it out for a spin at a time when you
wouldn’t trust yourself to operate an automobile or other heavy
machinery.”
Unless you have a specific reason to do so, avoid running Maxwell software
if you are logged in as root.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
2
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Control Panel
Accessing the Control Panel
Available Commands
Exiting the Control Panel
Go Back
The Maxwell Control Panel
Available Commands
Ansoft
Displays information about how to contact Ansoft Corporation. It also provides a listing of Maxwell software products and software distributors, and
displays credits for software development.
Projects
Opens the Maxwell Project Manager, which allows you to:
• Create new projects.
• Open projects and run Maxwell software.
• Move, copy, delete, compress, rename, and recover projects.
• Create, delete, and change project directories.
Translators Opens the Maxwell Translation Manager, which allows you to do the following:
• Translate models created in packages like AutoCAD and SDRC IDEAS into the Maxwell software file formats.
• Translate models between different Maxwell software packages.
• Translate Berkeley SPICE files created in Maxwell software
packages into PSpice, HSPICE, and ContecSPICE files.
Print
Opens the Maxwell Print Manager, which allows you to do the following:
• Print hard copies of screens in the Maxwell software packages.
• Set options for printing screen captures that control the type of
printer, whether the screen capture is printed or saved to a file,
and the appearance of the image on the page.
Schedule
UNIX only. Specifies a time and machine on which to solve your project.
Utilities
Allows access to the following:
• Color Manager
• 2D Modeler
• PlotData
• Material Manager
• Expression Evaluator
Exit
Exits the Control Panel.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
3
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Control Panel
Accessing the Control Panel
Available Commands
Exiting the Control Panel
The Maxwell Control Panel
Exiting the Control Panel
Choose Exit to exit the Maxwell Control Panel. One of the following things happens:
•
•
If only the Projects, Translators, Print, Colors, or Evaluator commands (or no
Maxwell Control Panel or Utilities panel commands) are accessed, the following
prompt appears:
Exit Maxwell?
Do one of the following:
• Choose Yes to exit.
• Choose No to continue using the Maxwell Control Panel or the Utilities panel.
If a Maxwell software product or the Licenses, 2D Modeler, or PlotData commands is
being accessed, the following message appears:
Terminate all running applications before exiting?
Do one of the following:
• Choose Yes to exit all Maxwell software products, including the Maxwell Control
Panel and the Utilities panel.
• Choose No to continue running the software. This command only exits the Maxwell
Control Panel and the Utilities panel.
• Choose Cancel to cancel the command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
4
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Using the Help System
The Topics List
The Button Commands
Links in the Text
Document Title
Active Regions on Graphics
Selecting Text and Graphics
The Menu Bar
Help Window Functions
Page Number
Screen Size (Percentage)
Screen Size (Step)
Page Scroll
Scroll Bar
Maxwell Control Panel — Online Help System
Using the Help System
The following sections discuss the interface of the online help system, and give helpful
advice on using each feature of the system.
The Topics List
The topics list shows topics that are available from the current document. It also highlights
which topics are currently being viewed. As you move through the help system, the list will
change to display the most detailed list of topics possible.
> To go to the section describing a topic in the list:
• Click on the topic in the list.
The Button Commands
The following commands are used to control your location in the online documentation:
Forward &
Backward
Go Back
Contents
Index
These buttons move you forward and backward by one page in the current document.
Every time you click on a hypertext command to jump to a new location,
the history of where you’ve been is updated. This takes you back one
hypertext jump.
Takes you to the table of contents for the current document.
Takes you to the Index of topics.
Links in the Text
Links in the text are always blue. You can follow a hypertext link in the text by clicking on it
with the mouse button. The link highlight sas you click on it, and the command is executed
when you release the mouse button. If you move the mouse pointer off of the link before
you release the button, the command is not executed.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
5
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Using the Help System
The Topics List
The Button Commands
Links in the Text
Document Title
Active Regions on
Graphics
Selecting Text and
Graphics
The Menu Bar
Help Window Functions
Page Number
Screen Size (Percentage)
Screen Size (Step)
Page Scroll
Scroll Bar
Maxwell Control Panel — Online Help System
Document Title
The document title helps you to keep track of where you are in the help system.
Active Regions on Graphics
Often, a screen capture or other diagram will have active regions. These active regions
execute hypertext commands when you click on them. The region highlights when you
click on it, and as you release the button, the command is executed. If you move the
mouse pointer off of the link before you release the button, the command is not executed.
By holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse around, you can see where the
active regions of a graphic are.
Selecting Text and Graphics
If you hold down the Control key on your keyboard, the cursor changes to allow you to
select text and graphics.
> To select document text:
1. Hold down the Control key and click the left mouse button where you wish to begin
selecting text.
2. Drag the mouse to the end of the text you wish to select.
If you select any text that contains anchored graphics frames, the graphics become
selected as well.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
6
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Using the Help System
The Topics List
The Button Commands
Links in the Text
Document Title
Active Regions on Graphics
Selecting Text and Graphics
The Menu Bar
Help Window Functions
Page Number
Screen Size (Percentage)
Screen Size (Step)
Page Scroll
Scroll Bar
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Maxwell Control Panel — Online Help System
The Menu Bar
The following commands appear in the menu bar:
File
These commands perform various file operations.
Open
Open another document for viewing.
Print
Print the current document.
Close
Close the current document window.
Edit
These commands are used on the document text and graphics.
Copy
Copy the selection to the paste buffer.
Copy Special Copy various formats from the selection to the paste
buffer, without copying the selection itself.
Select All
Select every object on the page, or all of the text in the
document, depending on what is selected.
Find
Search the current document for a specific string, or
other document feature.
Navigation These commands affect which page of the document is displayed in the
help window. None of the commands affect the hypertext history except
for the Go Back command.
Go To Page
Go to a specific page in the current document.
Next Page
Go to the next page in the current document.
Previous Page Go to the previous page in the current document.
First Page
Go to the first page in the current document.
Last Page
Go to the last page in the current document.
Go Back
Undo the last hypertext jump in the history.
Document
This cascading menu lists all of the documents that
Windows
are currently open in the viewer.
Zoom
These commands affect the view of the document and its window.
Zoom In
Make the view of the current document more detailed.
Zoom Out
Make the view of the current document less detailed.
Fit Page
Fit the page size to the current size of the window.
Fit Window
Fit the size of the window to the current page size.
Zoom to 100 Set the magnification to 100%, the default.
7
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Using the Help System
The Topics List
The Button Commands
Links in the Text
Document Title
Active Regions on Graphics
Selecting Text and Graphics
The Menu Bar
Help Window Functions
Page Number
Screen Size (Percentage)
Screen Size (Step)
Page Scroll
Scroll Bar
Maxwell Control Panel — Online Help System
Help Window Functions
Once you have accessed the online documentation, you can change the display of the
documentation window in the following ways:
Page Number
Screen Size
(Percentage)
Screen Size
(Step)
Page Scroll
Scroll Bar
This button allows you to choose the page you wish to be on.
Choose this button to change the size of the documentation window by
selecting a percentage size.
Choose one of the Z buttons to shrink or expand the documentation
window by one step.
Choose these arrow page buttons to scroll the documentation up or
down by one page.
Use the scroll bar allows to scroll through the documentation faster
than using the page scroll buttons.
Page Number
Use this button to choose the page you wish to be on:
> To choose a page:
1. Click on the Page Number button.
2. Enter the page you wish to go to.
3. Choose Go.
You are taken to the page you specified.
Screen Size (Percentage)
Use this button to specify the size of the documentation window.
Go Back
Contents
> To specify the size of the documentation window:
1. Click on and hold the Percentage button. A list of percentage sizes appears.
2. Choose the percentage size you prefer for the documentation window.
3. Choose Fit Window to Page to fit a border to the documentation window.
You can set the steps of the percentage by choosing Set at the bottom of the percentage
list.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
8
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Using the Help System
The Topics List
The Button Commands
Links in the Text
Document Title
Active Regions on Graphics
Selecting Text and Graphics
The Menu Bar
Help Window Functions
Page Number
Screen Size (Percentage)
Screen Size (Step)
Page Scroll
Scroll Bar
Maxwell Control Panel — Online Help System
Screen Size (Step)
These buttons specify the size of the documentation window by steps. These steps are
specified in the percentage button menu.
> To increase the size of the documentation window:
1. Click on the large Z button.
2. Click on and hold the percentage button.
3. Choose Fit Window to Page.
The documentation window is now fitted with an appropriate border.
> To decrease the size of the documentation window:
1. Click on the small z button.
2. Click on and hold the percentage button.
3. Choose Fit Window to Page.
The documentation window is now fitted with an appropriate border.
Page Scroll
Use these buttons to scroll through the online documentation one page at a time.
> To page through the online documentation:
• Click on the page arrow buttons.
You are taken one page forward or backward in the documentation.
Scroll Bar
Use this to scroll through the online documentation quickly.
> To scroll through the current document:
1. Click and hold the scroll bar.
2. Move the scroll bar to the section you wish to view in the document.
Go Back
The online documentation displays the text you wish to see.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
9
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Displaying the Maxwell
Control Panel
Displaying the Control
and Utilities Panels on a
Workstation
Displaying the Control
and Utilities Panels on a
PC
Options
Displaying the Maxwell Control Panel
Displaying the Maxwell Control Panel
By default, the Control Panel is displayed horizontally, with icons showing the function of
each command. The Utilities commands are accessed from the Utilities button. However, you can display these commands in a number of different ways.
Displaying the Control and Utilities Panels on a Workstation
For the workstation version of the software, specify how the panels are displayed by
entering a command at the UNIX prompt.
> Enter the following command at the UNIX prompt to access different views of these
panels:
maxwell option &
You can enter several options at once by including a space between each option.
Displaying the Control and Utilities Panels on a PC
For the PC version of the software, specify the way the panels are displayed by entering a
command in the command line.
> To access different views of the panels:
1. Select the Maxwell icon.
2. Choose File/Properties from the Windows Program Manager.
3. Enter one of the options at the end of the directory path in the Command Line field
as follows:
a. Click the left mouse button in the Command Line field and move to the end of
the directory path.
b. Enter one space and type in any of the options listed in the previous table. You
can also enter more than one option by including a space between each one.
4. Choose OK.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
10
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Displaying the Maxwell
Control Panel
Displaying the Control and
Utilities Panels on a
Workstation
Displaying the Control and
Utilities Panels on a PC
Options
Displaying the Maxwell Control Panel
Options
Use the following options to display the Control Panel and the Utilities panel in different
ways:
-no_pictures
-all_buttons
-less_buttons
-horizontal
-vertical
-help
Note:
Displays the Control Panel and Utilities panel without pictures.
Displays all of the Maxwell commands in both the Control Panel
and the Utilities panel in one panel.
Displays only the Control Panel. The commands in the Utilities
panel are not displayed, but may be accessed via the Utilities
command. By default, the software displays the Control Panel this
way.
Displays the Control Panel horizontally.
Displays the Control Panel vertically.
Lists all display options for the Control Panel.
Because UNIX is case-sensitive, enter the options listed in the table exactly
as they appear on the workstation version of the software. Also, the -help
option is not available on the PC version.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
11
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Things to Consider
The User Interface
The User Interface
This document describes the user interface for Maxwell software products running on
UNIX workstations and PCs. It covers the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Window managers and operating systems compatible with Maxwell software.
A brief introduction to the OSF/Motif™ user environment and how it is used in
Maxwell software products.
A brief introduction to Microsoft Windows and how it interacts with the Maxwell
software.
Using the mouse.
Manipulating windows.
Menus and buttons.
Using the keyboard and arrow keys to execute commands.
Entering text.
User messages.
It is important for you to become familiar with the user interface used in Maxwell software
products and the terminology used to describe the interface in this manual. If you have not
used Motif applications or window managers, or Microsoft Windows, read the sections
describing how to move and resize windows and enter commands.
Motif and Maxwell Software
For the UNIX version, the Maxwell software uses the OSF/MotifTM user environment in its
user interface. This user environment was developed by the Open Software Foundation.
Motif gives a uniform “look and feel” to Maxwell software displays that is similar to the look
and feel of window managers like mwm and vuewm. Motif does the following:
Go Back
•
•
•
Contents
Specifies the behavior of all buttons, commands and data fields.
Provides functions for opening, closing, moving, and resizing windows, and drawing
window borders throughout the various parts of the Maxwell software programs.
Gives a characteristic 3D effect to buttons, menus, and window frames.
All Maxwell software packages for UNIX use the Motif user environment.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
12
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on
UNIX Workstations
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Window Managers on UNIX Workstations
On UNIX workstations, Maxwell software works best under Motif-based window managers such as mwm or vuewm. However, you do not have to run one of these window managers to use Maxwell software. Because it implements the Motif environment internally,
the software looks and acts the same no matter what window manager you are using.
However, the following things may occur if you are running the software under a window
manager that does not use Motif:
•
•
•
The window frames on the primary (or outermost) software’s windows may not match
the window frames on the software’s internal windows.
The software may not be able to use the window frame colors specified for the window
manager.
Under non-ICCM compliant window managers (such as older versions of the Tab
Window manager (twm), some parts of the software may not be able to iconify
themselves when not in use.
Note:
Maxwell software products do not run under the OpenLook window manager
(olwm).
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
13
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and
Windows NT
Microsoft Windows and
Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
On personal computers, the Maxwell software takes advantage of the windowing environment offered in Microsoft Windows. Microsoft Windows packages, such as Windows NT
are supported by Maxwell software.
These environments share many common features with UNIX window managers. Their
similarities and differences are noted throughout the rest of this chapter.
Note:
In this document, all Microsoft Windows products will be referred to as
“Microsoft Windows.” Specific differences among the packages will be
described where they apply.
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Microsoft Windows performs the same functions for the Maxwell software that Motif does
on the workstation, as listed in the previous section, Motif and Maxwell Software.
Some parts of the Maxwell software use the Microsoft Windows functions and windows.
For example, when you print a screen capture, you access pop-up windows that are very
similar to the ones used in other parts of the Microsoft Windows operating system. The
documentation for the Maxwell software explains how the windows and functions in
Microsoft Windows are used specifically in the Maxwell software. For more information on
how the features and windows that are generally used for all Windows applications, refer
to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
14
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Clicking and Dragging
with the Mouse
Mouse Help Messages
Windows
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Using the Mouse
Most Maxwell software operations such as entering commands, resizing windows, and
selecting items are performed with the mouse. Either a two-button or three-button mouse
may be used. Each button on the mouse functions as follows:
•
•
•
The leftmost mouse button (referred to as the left mouse button) is used to enter
commands and select objects.
The rightmost mouse button (referred to as the right mouse button) is used to abort
commands.
The center mouse button on a three-button mouse is also used to abort commands.
Note:
When relating procedures, this guide assumes that you are using the mouse
buttons function as stated above. However, you can switch the functions of
the left and right mouse buttons.
Clicking and Dragging with the Mouse
> Use the mouse as follows:
• To click the mouse, quickly press and release a mouse button.
• To double-click the mouse, quickly press and release a mouse button twice.
• To drag items such as windows or scroll bars with the mouse, do the following:
1. Move the mouse pointer on top of the item.
2. Press and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Move the mouse. The item is dragged along with it (usually displaying as an
outline only).
4. When the outline is in the desired location, release the mouse button. The item
is then redisplayed in the new location.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
15
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Clicking and Dragging with
the Mouse
Mouse Help Messages
Windows
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Mouse Help Messages
When you choose a command from the tool bar or the command menu that requires you
to use specific mouse buttons, a help message such as the following appears in the message bar at the bottom of the screen:
MOUSE LEFT: Select first corner point of rectangle.
MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command.
It gives you the function of each mouse button in the command. If you have switched the
mouse buttons, the help message takes this into account. For example, the previous message would be given as follows:
MOUSE LEFT: Abort command.
MOUSE RIGHT: Select first corner point of rectangle.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
16
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Windows
Because Maxwell software products were developed as Motif applications, their windows
generally look and behave like other Motif windows. The components of Motif window
frames, that display information and allow you to resize and reposition windows within the
software, are very similar to the components of the windows on the PCs.
In both the PC and workstation versions of the software, the application window contains
either a software module window or a project window. An example of a software module
window as it appears in the PC version of the software is shown below. This figure shows
the window components that are available on all Maxwell windows on the PC.
Control menu
minimize button
maximize button
title bar
Project windows, which are used in the 2D Modeler, 3D Modeler, and the Post Processor,
contain data for a specific project. You can also display subwindows within a project window as shown below. This figure also shows the window components that are available on
all Maxwell windows on the workstation:
minimize button
title bar
window menu
maximize button
project window
subwindows
Go Back
Contents
These components are explained in the following sections.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
17
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Title Bar
The title bar displays the title of the window. The title bar can also be used to move the
window.
Maximize Button
The maximize button allows you to expand a window, or return it to its original size.
> To expand the window:
• Click the left mouse button on the maximize button.
This increases the window’s size to fill the available space within the software window in
which it is contained, or fill the entire screen (if it is the application window). The maximize
button also changes to the restore button. Successive mouse clicks on the maximize button have a toggle effect — that is, the first click maximizes the window, the second
restores it to its original size, the third maximizes it, and so forth.
Minimize Button
The minimize button allows you to shrink the window into an icon.
> To iconify the window:
• Click the left mouse button on the minimize button.
> To restore (or de-iconify) the window after it is iconified:
• Double-click on the icon.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
18
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Window Menu
The window menu on the workstation and the control menu on the PC contain functions
for manipulating the windows in which they are located. They are both accessible from the
bar-shaped button in the upper left corner of the window frame.
> To access a window menu function:
1. Click the left mouse button on the window menu button.
2. Choose the desired command from the menu.
Most of the commands that are available on these menus are identical:
Restore
Move
Size
Minimize
Maximize
Lower
Occupy
Workspace
Occupy All
Workspace
Unoccupy
Workspace
Print
Go Back
Contents
Switch To
Close
Restores the window to its original size after it has been expanded or
iconified via window button or menu command.
Moves the window to a new location.
Resizes the window.
Iconifies the window.
Expands the window to fill the available space within its software window, or fill the entire screen if it is the application window.
(Workstation) Lowers the active window beneath any other project windows that appear on the screen.
(Workstation) Occupies any or all of the workspace screens on your
workstation.
(Workstation) Occupies all workspace screens on your workstation.
(Workstation) Unoccupies any workspace screens on your workstation.
(PC) Prints the window. (Only available on the control menu of the application window.) You may print the:
Entire Window Prints the entire window.
Subwindow
Prints the selected subwindow.
Rectangle
Prints the selected area of the window.
(PC) Allows you to switch to another application.
Closes the window.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
19
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Borders
Borders appear around all Maxwell software windows. Two types of window borders are
used in the software:
•
•
Resizable borders. “Handles” at the corners of the window and along each edge allow
you to resize the window.
Non-resizable borders. Because this type of border has no corner or edge handles, its
window cannot be resized. The window can, however, be moved. Non-resizable
borders generally occur in pop-up windows associated with commands.
Moving and Resizing Windows
In addition to the window functions described previously, Motif and Microsoft Windows
provide Maxwell software with a mechanism for moving and resizing windows using the
mouse and the window borders.
Moving Windows
> Move a window around on the screen as follows:
1. Move the mouse to the title bar. If the window has non-resizable borders, simply
move the mouse onto the window border.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag the window to the desired location.
3. Release the mouse button.
Resizing Windows
> Resize a window as follows:
1. Move the cursor to the border of the window.
The cursor changes into an arrow pointing towards the window frame or corner.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag the window border until the window is the
desired size.
3. Release the mouse button.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
20
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Message Bar
A message bar is displayed at the bottom of most Maxwell software module windows. It
displays the following:
•
•
When a window or menu first appears, the name of that part of the software program
and its version number.
Help messages for commands chosen from menus or tool bars. For instance, if you
move the cursor to Edit/Paste in the 2D Modeler and hold down the mouse button, the
following help message is displayed:
Paste items stored in buffer.
Note:
•
If you display a help message for a command and decide not to access it,
move the cursor to another part of the window and release the mouse button.
When you are executing commands and mouse button functions, instructions. For
instance, after you choose the Object/Rectangle command, the following message
appears:
MOUSE LEFT: Select first corner point of rectangle
MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command
To redisplay the program name and version number between commands, click the left
mouse button on the message bar.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
21
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
List Boxes
List boxes are used to display lists of files, geometric objects, or other items. For instance,
this list box from the Material Manager window display a list of the objects in a 2D geometric model and their materials from the material database.
Prior to executing some commands, you must select, or “highlight,” the item in the list
upon which the command acts.
> To select an item in a list box:
• Click the left mouse button on the object name in the list box.
A black bar appears around the item, and its name is displayed in light-colored letters.
If the list box is next to a geometric model (such as the one shown above), you can also
click on the object in the model window to select its name in the list box.
> To deselect an item in a list box:
• Click the left mouse button on the selected item.
Go Back
The black box surrounding the item is removed.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
22
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Scroll Bars
If a model or a list is too large to be displayed on the screen, scroll bars automatically
appear in the window or list box. The scroll bars are used to pan through the model or list,
enabling you to view the part of the model or list that does not fit on the screen.
To pan through a model or list using scroll bars, do one of the following:
•
Go Back
•
Contents
To move the display area incrementally, click the left mouse button on one of the
arrows at the ends of the scroll bars.
• If the scroll bar is in a window that displays a model, the viewing area is moved a
short distance and the screen is redrawn to show any new items that are
displayed.
• If the scroll bar is in a list box, the next entry in the list is displayed at the bottom of
the list box, and the top entry disappears.
For instance, to move the display area a short distance upward, click the left
mouse button on the upward-pointing arrow on the vertical scroll bar.
To move the display area a larger distance, hold down the left mouse button and drag
the scroll bar in the desired direction. The display area is moved proportionally.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
23
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Menu Bar
The menu bar appears under the title bar of most of the application windows containing
Maxwell software windows. Each item in the menu bar has a pull-down list of commands
associated with it.
Menus
Most Maxwell software commands are accessed through pull-down menus such as the
following one.
All available commands in a particular Maxwell software module are listed in the menu
bar displayed in that window.
Cascading Menus
Some command names on a menu are followed by an arrow. When you select these commands, a cascading menu (or “submenu”) appears. Submenus are used to group related
commands that would take up too much room on the main menu.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
24
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Pop-up Windows
Some menu or button commands are followed by an ellipsis (…). When you execute one
of these commands, a pop-up window (sometimes called a dialog box) appears, as illustrated below. You must enter information in the pop-up window to complete the command.
Many of the pop-up windows either have instructions for how to complete the command or
the command name in the title bar. If the box for the window menu appears in the upper
left corner of the pop-up window, the window is also movable and resizable.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
25
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Accessing Menu Commands
All commands on menus or submenus can be entered using the mouse or the keyboard.
Use the following procedures to execute these commands.
Note:
Throughout this online manual, the term “choose” means to execute a command. For instance,
“Choose File/Save to save the currently selected project”
means to enter the command using the procedure that’s most appropriate for
the situation.You can use either the keyboard or the mouse to select the File/
Save command.
Executing Commands with the Mouse
> To enter a menu command using the mouse:
1. Click the left mouse button on the desired menu item in the menu bar. A menu of
commands appears. A raised bar is displayed around the first command in the
menu, highlighting it.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click the left mouse button on the desired command.
• Drag the mouse down until the desired command is highlighted, then release the
mouse button.
3. If a cascading menu of commands appears, move the mouse onto the submenu
and repeat step 2 to select the desired command.
The command is then executed.
Note:
To exit from a menu without selecting a menu item, click the left mouse button somewhere else in the window. The menu disappears.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
26
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Executing Commands with the Tool Bar
The tool bar is the vertical stack of icons that appears on the left side of some Maxwell
software windows. For example, part of the tool bar from the 2D Modeler is shown here.
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc/Clockwise
Object/Arc/Counter-Clockwise
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle/2 Point
Arrange/Move (Disabled)
Icons give you easy access to the most frequently used commands in the software.
> To execute a command from the tool bar:
• Click the left mouse button on the icon representing the command.
> To display a brief description of a tool bar command in the message bar:
1. Hold the left mouse button down on the desired icon.
2. Move the cursor away before releasing the mouse button.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
27
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Executing Commands with the Keyboard
The keyboard can be used to enter shortcuts and hotkeys to execute commands.
Keyboard Shortcuts
In general, the keyboard commands are used as a shortcut for the mouse commands.
One letter in all menus and menu-accessed commands is underlined. For example, the
letter F in the File menu name is underlined. Use that letter to access the menu or command with the keyboard.
> To enter a menu command using the keyboard:
1. Hold down the Alt key and type the letter that is underlined in the desired menu. A
list of commands appears. A raised bar is displayed around the first command in
the menu.
Note:
The Alt key can be one of the following on your keyboard:
• The Alt key.
• The Meta key.
• The Extend char key.
• The Compose key.
• The key.
In this manual, it will be referred to as the Alt key.
The underlined letter must be typed in lower case, regardless of whether it
was capitalized in the command name. For instance, to access the File
menu, hold down Alt and type f (not F).
2. Release the Alt key and type the letter that’s underlined in the desired command.
3. If a submenu of commands appears, type the letter that’s underlined in the
command on the submenu.
The command is then executed.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
28
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Hotkeys
Some commands in Maxwell software packages may be accessed through “hotkeys” —
keystrokes that allow you to bypass the menu system and directly execute commands.
Each Maxwell product comes with its own list of hotkeys that are generally designated
and chosen as follows:
Modifier + key
BS
Key
Note:
Hold down the modifier(s) — such as Shift or Ctrl — and press the
key(s).
Press the Back Space key.
Press the key. All hotkeys should be entered in lower case.
Hotkeys are not accessible if any of the command menus are displayed.
Hotkeys are listed on menus after the commands which they execute. For example, the
Window menu in PlotData displays the following hotkeys:
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Fit All
Make Square
=
F
Ctrl-R
> To use the hotkey to make the plot square:
1. Make sure all command menus are closed. If one of the command menus is open,
click the right mouse button outside of the menu to close it.
2. Press the Control and R keys at the same time.
The plot reappears as a perfect square.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
29
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Using the Arrow Keys
Arrow keys may be used in conjunction with the mouse or keyboard to execute commands on Maxwell software menus.
> To use the arrow keys to execute commands:
1. Display the desired menu using the mouse or keyboard procedures already
described.
2. Use the arrow keys to move around in the menu as follows:
• Press the up arrow (↑) or down arrow (↓) keys to move up or down through the
commands in a menu or submenu, highlighting each command.
• Press the right arrow (→) key to move to the next menu to the right on the menu
bar, or access a cascading submenu.
• Press the left arrow (←) key to access the next menu to the left on the menu bar.
3. When the desired command is highlighted, press Return.
The command is executed.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
30
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Buttons
Some commands — such as those on the Maxwell Control Panel — may be accessed
through command buttons. To execute (or “choose”) one of these commands, simply click
the left mouse button on it.
Buttons with Menus
A few buttons have menus of associated commands, which appear when you click on the
button. This type of menu is indicated by a downward-pointing arrow head on the button.
For instance, this button from the Print Manager:
> To choose an item from a button menu:
1. Click the left mouse button on the button. A menu of commands appears.
2. Do one of the following to select a command from this menu:
• Click the left mouse button on the desired command.
• Drag the mouse down to the desired command, then release the mouse button.
The command then executes.
Default Buttons
In pop-up windows, one button (typically the OK button) is usually highlighted. This button
is the default button. It is executed when you press Return.
On/Off Buttons
Maxwell software uses on/off buttons (also known as “checkboxes) to represent “yes/no”
or “true/false” options in commands.
•
Go Back
Contents
•
If the button is recessed (on the workstation version) or marked with an “X” (the PC
version), the option is turned on (that is, the button is in the “yes” position).
If the button is not recessed or not marked with an “X,” the option is turned off (that is,
the button is in the “no” position).
To toggle between the “yes” and “no” positions, click the left mouse button on the on/off
button.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
31
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Selecting Buttons with the Keyboard
When you access some software functions, a thin, rectangular outline appears around the
first button in the window. This outline indicates that the button is selected when you press
Return on the keyboard.
> To select buttons in the window:
1. To move the outline to the next button in the window, press the Tab key.
2. When the desired button is outlined, press Return.
Repeat these steps until the desired buttons are selected.
Note:
If you press Return when Exit is highlighted, you exit the command. Do not
press Return if there are other options you need to set before exiting.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
32
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Text and Numbers
Text fields and numeric fields display as recessed boxes on the screen.
> To enter text or numbers in these fields:
1. Click the left mouse button on the first field. A text pointer shaped like a vertical line
appears.
2. Type the required text or numbers.
• To move between characters, press the left arrow (←) or right arrow (→) keys.
• To delete a character, press the Delete or Backspace key.
• To highlight the entire field, double-click the left mouse button. Anything you type
after this replaces the existing characters.
3. To move to the next field, do one of the following:
• Press the Tab key. The next field in the window is highlighted.
• Click the left mouse button on the field.
Default Text and Numbers
Some commands already have text or numbers entered by default. For example, the
Model/Drawing Size command in the 2D Modeler displays default drawing dimensions
such as the following:
X minima
Y minima
X maxima
Y maxima
-50
-35
50
35
The default settings show the recommended set up for these commands. However, you
can change these fields if you want.
Fields Highlighted by Default
Go Back
Contents
Sometimes a field in a pop-up window is highlighted (selected) by default. For instance,
the Name field in the window that appears when you draw an object in the 2D Modeler is
selected by default. When this occurs, directly enter the new value for the field. The field’s
current value is replaced.
If no fields are highlighted, select one by double-clicking on it before entering data.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
33
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
User Messages
Maxwell software displays three types of user messages:
•
•
•
Error messages.
Information messages.
Query/warning messages.
These messages appear in pop-up windows that are displayed on top of all the other windows you may have open on the screen. Each type of message is explained in more
detail below.
Error Messages
Error messages appear whenever error conditions occur that prevent the software from
functioning normally. For example, the error message shown below appears if you make
the grid spacing in the 2D Modeler so small that the current settings can’t be displayed.
Choose OK or press Return to acknowledge the error message. It then disappears.
Information Messages
Information messages display information about a command that is currently performing a
function. For example, the message below tells you that the system is copying relay.pjt to
foo.pjt.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Choose OK or press Return to acknowledge the information message. It then disappears.
34
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Title Bar
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Window Menu
Borders
Moving/Resizing Windows
Message Bar
List Boxes
Scroll Bars
Menu Bar
Menus
Accessing Menu Cmnds
Buttons
Text and Numbers
User Messages
Things to Consider
The User Interface
Query/Warning Messages
Query messages or warning messages appear whenever you perform actions that could
cause you to lose data or exit part of the Maxwell software program. They give you a
chance to reconsider your command before it’s executed. For example, the message
below appears when you attempt to leave PlotData without saving the active file.
> For most query messages, do one of the following:
• Choose Yes or press Return to acknowledge the message and continue with the
operation.
• Choose No to cancel the operation.
Some query and warning messages have other options, which are explained in the documentation for the part of the program where the message occurs.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
35
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The User Interface
Motif and Maxwell Software
Window Managers on UNIX
Workstations
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
Microsoft Windows and Maxwell Software
Using the Mouse
Windows
Things to Consider
Mouse Settings
Changing Mouse Settings on the Workstation
Changing Mouse Settings on the PC
Commands that Operate on the Active Window
Commands that Operate on a Selected Item
The User Interface
Things to Consider
Mouse Settings
In general, the left mouse button is used to enter commands and select objects, while the
right mouse button is used to abort commands. However, if you prefer, you can switch the
functions of the left and right mouse buttons.
Changing Mouse Settings on the Workstation
> To exchange the functions of the left and right mouse buttons:
1. Place the following line in your .Xdefaults file:
Maxwell*swapButtons: On
2. Once you have made the changes, do one of the following to have the changes
take affect:
• Enter the following command at the UNIX prompt:
xrdb -merge .Xdefaults
• Restart the X server by logging out and logging back in again.
Changing Mouse Settings on the PC
> To exchange the functions of the left and right mouse buttons on the PC:
1. In the Main Window, access the Microsoft Windows Control Panel by choosing the
Control Panel icon.
2. Choose the Mouse icon.
3. Choose Swap Left/Right Buttons. While you are in the Mouse Setup window,
you can select other options as well. Refer to your Microsoft Windows User’s
Guide for more details.
Commands that Operate on the Active Window
If a command operates on what is described as the “active” window, you must first move
the cursor onto the desired window and click the left mouse button.
Go Back
Contents
Commands that Operate on a Selected Item
If a command operates on what is described as the “selected” item (object, text block,
cable, and so on), first move the cursor onto the desired item and click the left mouse button.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
36
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Ansoft Information
Configure Software
Maxwell Resource File
Editor
The Maxwell Control Panel
Ansoft Information
Choose Ansoft from the Maxwell Control Panel to view Maxwell software product information, credits, how to contact Ansoft Corporation, and how to set the software preferences.
> To view information about Ansoft:
1. Select Ansoft. The following window appears:
2. Select the type of information to view:
Products
Sales Offices
Configure
Software
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Displays the available Maxwell software packages.
Displays the Ansoft software distributors.
Defines variables in the Maxwell resource file. This editor is executed automatically the first time you access the Maxwell Control
Panel.
3. Use the scroll bars to pan through the displayed information if necessary. The
software credits list scrolls by itself.
4. When you finish viewing the desired information and want to view other
information, do the following:
a. Click the left mouse button anywhere outside of the Products, Distributors, or
Credits list. The Ansoft logo then reappears.
b. Select the type of information you wish to view.
5. Choose OK to return to the Maxwell Control Panel.
37
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Maxwell Control Panel
Topics:
Ansoft Information
Configure Software
Maxwell Resource File
Editor
Configure Software
Choose this command to edit a resource file. When you choose this command, the following window appears:
Maxwell Resource File Editor
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Use this window to modify the resource files used with the Maxwell software.
> To edit a resource file:
1. Choose Configure Software. The Update Maxwell Resource File window
appears, listing the current variable in the Variable field. Information about the
variable appears in the Description field.
2. Optionally, select Also apply changes to old resource file to apply the
modifications to the existing resource file used by older versions of the software.
3. Optionally, select Use default value to use the software’s default settings for the
variable file. This is the default setting. For some variables, the editor will
38
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Ansoft Information
Configure Software
Maxwell Resource
File Editor
The Maxwell Control Panel
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
recommend that you use the default value.
Optionally, select Override default with and use the resource value stored in the
listed directory.
Optionally, select Override default with old resource file value to revert to the
original resource file setting.
Optionally, choose Reset to reset the values to match the currently saved default
settings.
Choose Next or Previous to locate the valriable to edit. Each variable appears on
a seperate, scrolling page.
Choose OK to accept the settings, or Cancel to cancel the action.
You return to the About Maxwell window.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
39
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Project Manager
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
Projects
When you choose Projects, the Project Manager appears:
You can use the commands on the Project Manager to perform the following tasks:
•
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create new projects or open existing ones. Projects are models that can be created
through Maxwell software products.
(UNIX only.) Schedule a time to solve your project, if it is not to be solved immediately.
Perform project-related functions like crash recovery and project management.
Create directories in which to store projects, and set up aliases allowing you to easily
access these project directories.
Move through your directory structure to locate projects.
Reclassify your project as a new project type.
Perform a search to locate a specific project.
You can access any Maxwell software product by selecting and opening an existing
project, or by creating and opening a new project. After you open a project, the main commands menu appears for the selected software product. Use the commands on this menu
40
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
to create, set up, and generate a solution for your project.
The current directory path and project directory (the alias of a directory where projects
are stored) are listed at the top of the screen. Below this listing, the Project Manager window is broken into three parts — each of which has its own set of commands and fields.
Projects
Allows you to select projects, create new projects, and perform other project functions. This includes renaming, compressing, deleting, copying, and moving projects. These
commands are described in Projects Commands.
Displays information about selected projects. Also lets you
open a project and run a Maxwell software package, record
project notes, recover projects, and display a project’s geometric model (if available). These commands and fields are
described in Project Commands and Fields.
Allows you to create or delete directories in which to store
projects, and move through your directory structure. These
commands are described in Project Directories Commands.
Project
Project Directories
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
41
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for
Running Maxwell Software Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software Packages
> To create or open a project and run a Maxwell software product:
1. Move to the desired project directory. Do one of the following:
• Highlight the desired project directory under Project Directories.
• Use the Change Dir command under Project Directories to access the directory
that contains your project. When you use this command, the names of all of the
projects in the selected directory appear in the Projects list box.
2. Select the desired project. Do one of the following:
• To select an existing project, click on the desired project name under Projects.
• To create a new project, use the New command under Projects. Once created,
the new project is automatically selected.
In either case, information about the project automatically appears in the Project
window.
3. If desired, enter comments about the project in the box under the Notes field.
4. Choose Open in the Project window to open the project and run a Maxwell
software product.
The Executive Commands window for the Maxwell software product you selected
appears on the screen. All data is saved under the project name that you have specified.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
42
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
All projects in the current project directory appear in the list box in the Projects area.
Before you can open a project and run a Maxwell software package, you must first select
the project.
> To select a project:
• Click the left mouse button on the desired project.
Information about the selected project appears in the fields under Project, on the right of
the Project Manager window. You may now open the project using the Open command
under Project.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
43
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Project Manager
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
New
Choose New to create a new Maxwell software project. The new project will be located in
the current project directory.
> To create a new project:
1. Select the project directory in which you want to create the new project. If you are
not in the directory in which you want to create the new project, do one of the
following:
• Change project directories by clicking the left mouse button on the alias for the
directory that you want. Aliases appear in the Project Directories list box. (Aliases
are created with the Add button under Project Directories.) The names of
projects that exist in the project directory you select appear in the Projects list box.
• Create a new project directory for the new project, using the Add command under
Project Directories.
2. Choose New. The following window appears:
3. Enter the name of the project in the Name field. Project names can be up to 32
characters long.
Note:
Because the following words are reserved by the software for storing backup
files, you cannot use them as project names: current, initial, empty, last, mesh,
fileset1, fileset2, previous, seeded, and port. You also cannot use port in the
beginning of the project name (for example, port1).
Valid name characters include a to z, A to Z, and 0-9. You cannot use shell
symbols (such as hyphens, exclamation points, ellipses, or asterisks) in the
project name.
44
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
4. Select the type of project. To do this:
a. Click the left mouse button on the field next to Type. A menu of project types
appears.
b. Select the project type.
5. Enter the name of the project’s creator in the Created By field. By default the
software displays the name of the person who logged in to the system.
6. Optionally, deselect Open project upon creation to leave the new project closed
upon its creation. By default, the Project Manager opens the new project once it
has been created.
7. Choose OK or press Return.
Note:
For instructions on moving between project directories and setting up project
directories, see Project Directories Commands.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
45
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
Rename
Choose Rename to change the name of a project. Projects are actually subdirectories
with a .pjt extension where all files related to an Ansoft model are stored. The Rename
command changes the name of this subdirectory.
> To rename a project:
1. Select a project name.
2. Choose Rename. A window similar to the following one appears.
3. Enter the new name for the project. Project names can be up to 32 characters
long.
Note:
You cannot rename projects that are currently locked.
Reserved words and characters that cannot be used in project names are listed in
the note under the New command.
4. Choose OK or press Return.
The project now appears on the project list under the new name.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
46
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
Compress
Choose Compress to compress or archive project files so that the data takes up less disk
space. Note that archiving a project will delete any associated solution files. If you archive
a project, you will have to regenerate any solutions for that project.
> To compress one or more projects:
1. Access the project directory in which the project you want to compress exists.
2. Choose Compress. A window appears, listing all available projects for
compression.
3. Select the projects you wish to compress or archive from the list.
4. Do one of the following:
a. To compress the selected project files, choose Compress Projects.
b. To archive the projects, choose Archive Projects and select one of the
following options:
• Select Field Solutions Only to delete only the field solutions associated
with the project.
• Select Field Solutions and Meshes to delete both the field solutions to the
project and any finite element meshes associated with the model.
• Select All Solution Files to delete all solution files. This options functions
identically to copying the model only when you use the Copy command.
Warning:
Archiving is a task completed by the Maxwell Control Panel, not the executables of the project. Because of this, if you open an archived project, you may
receive an incorrect status message. For example, if you archive a project
(whose solution files and mesh have been deleted), when you return to that
project’s Executive Commands window, checkmarks may appear next to the
Solve and Post Process buttons, even though no solutions currenly exist.
5. When you have finished selecting the options, choose OK.
Go Back
Contents
All data files associated with a compressed project are then compressed.There is no
need to explicitly uncompress project data. Project files are automatically uncompressed
as they are needed when you select and open the project.
Archived projects remain uncompressed but without the selected solution files.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
47
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
Delete
Choose Delete to delete one or more projects from the current project directory. All data
associated with the deleted projects are erased.
Delete Project
> To delete a project:
1. Select the project directory where the desired project is located.
2. Choose Delete. All projects in the current project directory are listed under
Projects. The currently selected project is automatically listed under Selected for
Deletion.
3. Select the projects you wish to delete. To select a project:
a. Select the name of the desired project in the project list.
b. Choose Add. The project name appears in the list under Selected for
Deletion.
4. To deselect a previously selected project, follow these steps:
a. Select the desired project under Selected for Deletion.
b. Choose Remove.
5. When you have finished selecting projects, choose OK. The following message
appears:
Delete selected projects?
6. Do one of the following:
• Choose Yes or press Return to delete the selected projects. A message appears,
displaying the project that is being deleted. When the system is finished deleting
the project, you immediately return to the Project Manager.
• Choose Cancel to exit the command without deleting any projects.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
48
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Project Manager
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copy
Choose Copy to copy a project into the current project directory. The Copy command
actually copies the subdirectory in which the project files are kept. All files associated with
the project (including solution files) are copied to the new project. Optionally, you can copy
only the files that contain the model without the solution files.
> To copy a project:
1. Under Project Directories, select the project directory to copy the project from.
2. Choose Copy. The following window appears:
By default, all projects in the current project directory appear in the list box under
Projects. The path name of the project directory appears in the Current
Directory field.
3. Select the directory to copy the project into from the Project Directories list.
• To change project directories, follow the steps under Project Directories
Commands.
• To move up or down in your directory tree structure, follow the steps under
Changing Subdirectories.
The projects in each directory are displayed as you move through the directory
structure.
4. When you have located the desired project directory, select the project you want
49
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
to copy from the Projects list. Its name automatically appears beside From at the
bottom of the pop-up window.
5. Select Model Only if you do not want to copy solution files.
6. Enter the new name for the project in the To field. Reserved words and characters
that cannot be used in project names are listed in the note under the New
command.
7. Choose OK to copy the desired project. One of the following occurs:
• If you selected Model Only you return to the Project Manager after the model is
copied.
• If you copied an entire project, the system then displays a message. This message
shows the directory from which you are copying the project, and the directory to
which the new project is being copied. Choose OK or press Return to continue.
The new project is listed in the Projects listing.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
50
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
Move
Choose Move to move a project from another directory into the current project directory.
Similar to the Copy command, the Move command moves the subdirectory in which the
project files are kept into the current project directory. All files associated with the project
(including solution files) are moved.
> To move a project:
1. Choose Move. A pop-up window similar to the one shown for Copy appears.
2. By default, all projects in the current project directory appear in the list box under
Projects. The full path name of the project directory appears in the Current
Directory field.
3. Select the directory containing the project you wish to copy.
• To change project directories, follow the steps under Project Directories
Commands.
• To move up or down in your directory tree structure, follow the steps under
Changing Subdirectories.
The projects in each directory appear as you move through the directory structure.
4. When you have located the desired project directory, select the project to be
moved. Its name automatically appears beside Move project at the bottom of the
window.
5. Choose OK.
The project is then moved from its original location into the current project directory.
Reclassify
Choose Reclassify to reclassify an existing project as a new project type of a similar type.
For example, you can reclassify an Ansoft HFSS v.5 file as Ansoft HFSS v.6.
Go Back
Contents
> To reclassify an existing project:
1. Select the project in the Projects list you wish to reclassify.
2. Choose Reclassify. If you are reclassifying a solved project, a message appears,
warning you to copy the project before reclassifying it. The Reclassify Projects
window appears.
3. Select the new project type from the pull-down menu.
4. Choose OK. The project is reclassified to the specified type.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
51
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Project Manager
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Search
Choose Search to locate a specific project based on entered details.
> To locate a project:
1. Choose Search. The Search for Projects window appears:
2. If you know the name of the project, enter it in the Named field. This is the fastest
method of locating the project.
3. Enter the name of the project’s creator in the Created By field. This field narrows
the search to projects created by this specified user.
4. Enter any text that is relevant to the project in the Notes Text field. This text will be
compared to the project note text for the target project.
5. Select the Product type from which the project was created. Once selected, you
can deselect Ignore version if you wish to target a specific version of the product.
6. Once you have selected the product type, choose Type to select the type of solver
used in the project.
7. Enter the name of directory in which to search in the Search in field, or choose the
52
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Selecting a Project
New
Rename
Compress
Delete
Delete Project
Copy
Move
Reclassify
Search
The Project Manager
ellipsis button to the right of it and use the file browser to specify the directory. By
default, the existing project directories appear in the Project Directories list.
8. Once you have specified the directory, select Search subfolders to include any
subdirectories associated with the specified directory in the search.
9. Choose Search. All relevant matches appear in the Project list, showing both the
project name and location. Once located, you can select the project from the list
and choose Open Project to access the project directly from the search window.
10. Optionally, choose New Search to clear all data and begin a new search.
11. Choose Done to close the window and return to the Maxwell Project Manager.
Note:
Searches are not case-sensitive.
The following regular expressions are supported in the edit fields:
*
?
[SET]
[^SET]
Matches any sequence of characters.
Matches any character.
Matches any character in the specified set.
Matches any character not in the specified set.
A set is composed of characters or ranges. An example of a range would be 0-9 or A-Z.
To match any of the following exactly, precede it with a backslash (\):
•
•
•
•
•
•
Square Brackets (no other forms of brackets require backslashes)
Asterisks
Question Marks
Carats
Hyphens
Backslashes
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
53
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Notes
Model
Open
Schedule
Size
Save Notes
Recover
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
The Project Manager
Project Commands and Fields
In addition to the basic project commands, the Project area of the Project Manager window displays the following information about the currently selected project:
Name
Created By
Type
Status
The name of the project.
The user name of the person who first created the project.
The type of project.
These fields display information on the project’s status. If the button
next to a field is selected, the field’s status is true; if not, the field’s status is false.
Writable
Indicates whether you have permission to write to or
delete the selected project’s files.
Locked
Indicates whether the project is locked — that is, if the
project is currently being accessed.
Note that a project may remain locked if there is a power
loss, a system crash, or some other disruptive event that
causes the software to crash while you are working on a
project. If this happens, use the Recover command
(described later in this section) to access the project
again.
Solution
Indicates whether a solution has been generated for the
project.
Note that these fields are “grayed out” if no projects are selected. You cannot make
changes to these fields.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
54
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Notes
Model
Open
Schedule
Size
Save Notes
Recover
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
The Project Manager
Notes
Choose Notes to enter or display notes and comments about the currently selected
project (such as its creation date, a description of the device that’s being modeled in the
project, and so forth). This is useful for keeping a running log on the project.
> To enter notes for a project:
1. Choose Notes.
2. Click the left mouse button in the window under Notes.
3. Type in your notes. Unlike other Project Manager fields, pressing the Tab key
does not move the cursor to the next field or button in the window. Instead, it
inserts a tab character in the Notes field.
Save your project notes with the Save Notes command. If you select another project
before saving changes to your notes, the Project Manager prompts you about saving
your changes.
Model
Choose Model to display the geometric model for the selected project. When you select a
project with a geometric model, this option is chosen by default. It is disabled if a geometry has not been drawn for a project.
Note:
Models created in Maxwell Spicelink and the Maxwell Multi-Layer Interconnect
Modeler cannot be displayed in the Project Manager.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
55
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Notes
Model
Open
Schedule
Size
Save Notes
Recover
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
The Project Manager
Open
Use the Open command in the Project window to open the currently selected project and
run the Maxwell software product for which the project was created.
> To open a project:
1. Select the desired project. Information about the project automatically appears in
the fields under Project.
2. Choose Open or double-click on the project name to open the project and run the
corresponding Maxwell software package.
Note:
If you receive an error message concerning the codewords for a Maxwell
software product when you choose Open, see the Maxwell Software Installation and Administration Guide for more information.
Schedule
UNIX only. If you do not wish to solve the problem immediately, use the Schedule command to specify which machine and time you plan to solve the problem.
> To schedule a time and a machine to solve the project:
1. Choose Schedule. The Schedule window appears.
2. Under Hosts, select a machine on which to solve the project.
3. Choose Select Project. The Select Project window appears.
4. Select the project you wish to solve.
5. Choose OK.
6. Toggle Display to add display to the command line.
7. Toggle No Graphics to add nographics to the command line. This allows you to
solve the problem non-grpahically.
8. Toggle Batch to add batch to the command line. This solves the project in batch
mode.
9. Toggle Submit now (the default) to submit the project immediately. Toggle
Submit after to enter a job number after which to submit the project. Toggle
Submit at to specify the date and time of the submission.
10. Toggle Logging to specify the logfile for the project. The logfile lists the solution
notes and errors during the solution process.
11. Choose Submit to submit the project or choose Done to save the settings but not
submit the project.
56
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Notes
Model
Open
Schedule
Size
Save Notes
Recover
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
The Project Manager
Size
Use the Size command under Project to view the size of the currently selected project.
> Do the following to see how large a project is:
1. Select the desired project.
2. Choose Size. A pop-up window appears, showing the total size (in bytes) of the
files associated with the project.
3. Choose OK or press Return to return to the Project Manager window.
Save Notes
Use the Save Notes command under Project to save the project notes that were entered
in the Notes field. Note that you cannot access this command until you have actually
entered notes for the project.
> To save project notes to a disk file:
• Choose Save Notes.
The notes for a project are saved in the directory that contains the rest of the project files.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
57
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Notes
Model
Open
Schedule
Size
Save Notes
Recover
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
The Project Manager
Recover
Use the Recover command under Project to recover a “locked” project after a system
crash or other disruptive event causes you to unexpectedly exit the software.
When a project is opened, the Lock option in the Status bar on the Project Manager
window is selected. This indicates that the project is currently being accessed and cannot
be opened again. The Project Manager locks the project by placing a lock file in the
directory containing the project files. (On the workstation, this file is .lock; on the PC, this
file is lock.inf.) Locking the project prevents another user from opening and possibly overwriting it while you are working on it; it also prevents you from opening the project twice
and accidentally overwriting your own files.
The system normally unlocks the project and deletes the “lock” file when you return to the
Project Manager when you exit the project. However, if a power failure or some other disruptive event occurs, the system will be unable to unlock the project before exiting. The
project remains locked — and thus cannot be accessed — until you recover it.
> To recover a project:
1. Select the desired project.
2. Choose Recover. The Project Manager displays a message warning you that
unlocking a project while it is currently opened may cause your files to be
corrupted or the software to fail.
3. Do one of the following:
• To continue opening the project, choose Yes. The Project Manager unlocks the
project and opens it. The Executive Commands window of the software package
appears.
• To cancel the Recover command, choose No or press Return. The project
remains locked.
If you attempt to recover an “unlocked” project, the system simply opens the project.
Go Back
Contents
Note:
The Recover command is only intended to be used for recovering locked
projects that are not currently being accessed. Do not attempt to recover a
locked project that you (or another user) have open.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
58
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project
Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
The Project Manager
Project Directories Commands
Project directories are directories in which Maxwell software projects are stored. The
name of a project directory (which appears in the list box and inside the Project Directory field at the top of the Project Manager window) is actually an alias for the path to a
directory where projects are located. In effect, it acts as a shortcut for moving through
your directories, enabling you to quickly and easily locate your Maxwell software projects.
For more information on project directories and the directory structure for Maxwell models, see Things To Consider.
Selecting a Project Directory
All project directories appear in the list box in the Project Directories area.
> To select a project directory:
• Click on the desired directory.
You immediately move to the selected project directory. All projects in that directory
appear in the list box under the Projects heading.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
59
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Project Manager
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
Add
Use the Add command under Project Directories to create a new project directory. This
command does two things:
•
•
It creates an alias for the project directory that enables you to quickly access it by
selecting the alias from the directory list.
It makes a new subdirectory that is linked to the alias, if this subdirectory does not
already exist.
A project directory can be created in any part of your directory structure except in the subdirectories which already contain project files (.pjt extension).
> To add a new project directory:
1. Select Add under Project Directories. The following window appears:
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
2. By default, all existing project directories appear in the list box under Project
Directories. The path name of the current project directory appears in the Current
Directory field.
3. Move to the subdirectory where the new project directory is to be located.
• To change project directories, follow the steps under Project Directories
Commands.
60
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
The Project Manager
•
To move up or down in your directory tree structure, follow the steps under
Changing Subdirectories.
4. Enter the name of the project directory in the Alias field. This alias acts as a
“handle” for quickly accessing the project directory.
5. Select the subdirectory to be accessed using the project directory alias.
• To use the current subdirectory as the project directory, choose the option Use
Current Directory next to Path. This assigns the alias to the subdirectory that’s
listed in the Current Directory field.
• To make a new project directory beneath the current subdirectory, do the following:
a. Choose the option Make New Directory next to Path.
b. Enter a name for the new subdirectory in the field to the right of Make New
Directory. By default, the project directory alias entered in the Alias field is
used as the subdirectory name.
6. Choose OK or press Return.
The system then adds the project directory alias to the list under Project Directories.
•
•
If you choose Use Current Directory, it assigns the alias to the desired subdirectory.
If you choose Make New Directory, it creates a new subdirectory and assigns the
alias to that directory.
It then returns to the Project Manager. You may now use the new project directory alias
to access the directory.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
61
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
Go Back
Contents
The Project Manager
Edit
Use the Edit command under Project Directories to change an alias that has already
been defined.
Edit Project Directory
Use this window to modify the alias and path of a project directory, allowing symbolic links
to be created using the valid entered path.
> To modify the project directory:
1. Choose Edit from the Project Directories commands to access the Edit Project
Directory window.
2. Select the directory to modify from the Project Directories list. The directory alias
appears in the Alias field, while the directory path appears in the Path field.
3. Enter a new alias or a new path in its respective field. If the directory for the new
path does not exist, a dialog appears, asking whether or not to create it. Optionally,
choose the browser button (marked as an ellipsis to the right of the Path field) to
select the path using a file browser.
4. Choose Apply to assign the Path to the Alias.
5. Choose Done.
The modified alias and path are now redefined.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
62
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Project Manager
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Delete
Use the Delete command under Project Directories to delete the alias for a project
directory from the Project Directories list. In addition, you have the option to remove the
directory and its contents.
Delete Directory
> To delete a project directory:
1. Choose Delete. The following window appears. All project directories are listed
under Project Directories.
2. Highlight the name of the project directory that you wish to delete. The projects
within this directory appear under Projects, allowing you to see which projects are
in the project directory before you delete it. In addition, the project directory alias
appears in the Alias field and its path name appears in the Path field.
3. In the Delete field, select one of the following:
• Select Only Alias to remove the alias from the Project Manager. Deleting the
alias prevents you from accessing this directory by clicking on its name. However,
you can still access the directory via the Change Dir command.
• Select Alias and Remove Directories to remove the alias from the Project
Manager and delete the directory from your directory structure.
4. Choose OK to delete the project directory or choose Cancel to cancel the
63
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
The Project Manager
command.
5. If you selected Alias and Remove Directories and there are projects in the
selected directory, a message similar the following displays:
Do you really want to delete all the projects
in the project directory “temp”?
6. Do one of the following:
• Choose Yes to delete all of the projects in the selected project directory and
remove the directory and its alias.
• Choose No to keep the projects in the selected project directory. However, the
project directory alias is still deleted.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
64
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project Directories
Changing Subdirectories
Go Back
Contents
The Project Manager
Change Dir
Use the Change Dir command to move through your directory structure one subdirectory
at a time. This enables you to access problems in subdirectories that are not currently
defined as project directories.
> To change subdirectories:
1. Choose Change Dir. A window similar to the following one appears.
The path name of the project directory appears in the Current Directory field. By
default, all subdirectories beneath the current directory appear in the list box under
Sub Directories.
2. Select the directory you wish to move into.
• To change project directories, follow the steps under Project Directories
Commands.
• To move up or down in your directory tree structure, follow the steps under
Changing Subdirectories.
The projects in each directory are displayed as you move through the directory
structure.
3. When you have located the desired directory, choose OK.
You move to the selected directory. All projects in this directory appear under Projects at
the top of the Project Manager window.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
65
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Project Directories Commands
Selecting a Project Directory
Add
Edit
Edit Project Directory
Delete
Delete Directory
Change Dir
Changing Project
Directories
Changing Subdirectories
The Project Manager
Changing Project Directories
All project directories are listed under the Project Directories field.
> To change project directories, do one of the following:
• Use the Change Project Dir button as follows:
1. Select the desired project directory.
2. Choose Change Project Dir or press Return.
• Alternatively, double-click the left mouse button on the desired project directory.
The full path name of the desired project directory appears in the Current Directory field.
All directories beneath it are listed under Sub Directories; all projects in it are listed
under Projects.
Changing Subdirectories
As you move through the project directory structure, the subdirectories beneath the currently selected directory are listed under Sub Directories. When changing directories,
you may move into any of these directories.
In addition, the symbol ../ appears under Sub Directories. It stands for the directory
immediately above the current directory, enabling you to move upward in the directory
tree.
> To change subdirectories, do one of the following:
• Use the Change Dir button. To do this:
1. Select the desired subdirectory.
2. Choose Change Dir or press Return.
• Alternatively, double-click the left mouse button on the desired subdirectory.
The full path name of the desired subdirectory appears in the Current Directory field. All
directories beneath the subdirectory are listed under Sub Directories; all projects in it are
listed under Projects.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
66
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Project Manager
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
Directory Structures for
Maxwell Software Packages
Single Layer Directory
Structures
Multi-Layer Directory
Structures
Reclassifying Projects
Project Directories
A project directory is a subdirectory where you can store related projects. The name
inside the Project Directory field on the Project Manager window is actually an alias for
the path to a directory where you have projects stored. You can store projects anywhere,
even in another user’s directory, and get to them quickly via the project directory alias. You
could store all 3D projects in one directory and access them with the project directory
alias 3dprojs.
For example, suppose you have a contract with the Acme company that involves creating
several kinds of circuits. You may use the Maxwell 2D and 3D Parametric capabilities to
create several different types of models. They can then be stored in one directory named
acme that you could alias using the project directory name acmeproj. This directory
might also contain other directories associated with the contract, such as documentation
files. The structure might appear as shown here:
$HOME
acme (acmeproj)
Files
Line1.pjt
Circuit1.pjt
es.pjt ms.pjt ed.pjt ac.pjt Files source.pjt
More
es.pjt ms.pjt ed.pjt ac.pjt Files
Files Files Files Files
Contents
Maxwell Online Help System
Files
Files Files Files Files
Go Back
Index
tline.pjt
Project directory aliases and default project directory information are stored in one of the
67
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
Directory Structures for
Maxwell Software Packages
Single Layer Directory
Structures
Multi-Layer Directory
Structures
Reclassifying Projects
The Project Manager
following:
•
•
For the workstation version, project directories are stored as symbolic links.
For the PC version, project directories are stored as Windows shortcuts.
The actual links (or shortcuts) are stored in the Maxwell/project_dirs folder.
For more on this file, see the Maxwell Installation Guide.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
68
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
Directory Structures for
Maxwell Software Packages
Single Layer Directory Structures
Multi-Layer Directory
Structures
Reclassifying Projects
Go Back
Contents
The Project Manager
Directory Structures for Maxwell Software Packages
Each time you create a new project, the system creates a subdirectory with the extension
.pjt and places it under the current working directory. For example, suppose the current
directory is /usr/paolo/mslpjt. If you create a project named striplin, the simulator creates the subdirectory /usr/paolo/mslpjt/striplin.pjt.
Within that subdirectory, a set of subdirectories and files necessary for running that type
of project is created. Maxwell software products have two types of directory structures:
single layer and multi-layer.
Single Layer Directory Structures
In a single layer directory structure, all of the files created for the geometry, material properties, conductor properties, solutions, and so forth are contained in the same directory.
Only the Maxwell Multi-Layer Interconnect Modeler has a single layer directory structure.
Multi-Layer Directory Structures
In a multi-layer directory structure, several subdirectories are created under the project
directory to store different parts of a model (such as different circuit parameter setups).
The following Maxwell software products have multi-layer directory structures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maxwell Spicelink
Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 3D
Maxwell 3D Parameter Extractor
Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor
Maxwell Ensemble
Maxwell Q3D Extractor
Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
Ansoft HFSS
PEmag
RMxprt
EMpulse
Maxwell EMSS
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
69
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Projects
General Procedure for Running Maxwell Software
Packages
Projects Commands
Project Commands and
Fields
Project Directories Commands
Project Directories
Directory Structures for
Maxwell Software Packages
Single Layer Directory
Structures
Multi-Layer Directory
Structures
Reclassifying Projects
The Project Manager
Reclassifying Projects
There are times when the Project Manager needs to reclassify projects. This is necessary when:
•
•
•
You create a project without using the Project Manager in the Maxwell Control Panel.
The created project does not contain enough information in its project directory to
differentiate which Maxwell software package was used to create it.
You created the current project using a previous version of a Maxwell software
package.
If you do not reclassify a project, you cannot access it. Projects created using an older
version of a Maxwell software product need to be reclassified before they can be opened
using the latest version of the product. However, some project information may be lost,
like solution setups and solution data.
When you choose a project that needs to be reclassified, the following screen appears:
> To reclassify the project:
1. Click the left mouse button in the Type field. A menu appears.
2. Select the project type you want to assign to the current project.
3. Choose OK.
In the Project window, the new project type is listed. You are now able to open the project.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
70
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
Translators
Choose Translators to translate various types of files to file formats that are compatible
with Maxwell software packages. The following window appears when this command is
selected:
Translators Commands
The commands in the Translation Manager are:
Start
Go Back
Contents
Exit
Help
Starts the translation process. As the selected file is being translated, messages appear on the screen under Translator output. When the file is successfully translated, the message Success appears.
Exits the Translation Manager.
Displays the available options for a particular source and destination selection. After you have selected a Source file, choose Help to display a short
help message describing the translator that will be used and its options.
Information appears on the screen under Translator output.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
71
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
Translation Manager
You can do the following in the Translation Manager:
•
•
•
•
•
Translate 2D and 3D geometric models created in CAD packages (such as AutoCAD
or SDRC I-DEAS) to the geometry file formats used in the following Maxwell software:
• Maxwell 2D version 4.33 (or earlier).
• Maxwell 2D Modeler.
• Maxwell Solid (3D) Modeler (.sld).
Translate 2D geometric models created using version 4.33 or earlier (.obs) of Maxwell
2D into the file format used in the 2D Modeler v.6 (.sm2).
Translate 2D geometric models created using Maxwell 2D version 4.33 (or earlier) and
the Maxwell 2D Modeler into the file format used in the Solid Modeler (.sld). Note that
the only part of a 2D or 3D model that can be translated is its geometry. Other
information associated with the model, such as material and conductor assignments,
boundary conditions, or finite element meshes, cannot be translated from one file
format to another.
Translate older versions of Maxwell Ensemble to version 6.0 (.bgf) files.
Translate Berkeley SPICE files created in one of the following packages to HSPICE,
PSpice, or ContecSPICE format:
• Maxwell Spicelink
• Maxwell 2D Extractor
• Maxwell 3D Parameter Extractor
• Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
• Maxwell Q3D Extractor
When a file is translated, a copy of it is read into the Translation Manager, translated into
the desired format, then written to a destination file. Original files are not deleted..
Go Back
Note:
Only the translators that apply to the software you purchased are available.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
72
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
Translators for Maxwell
2D and Maxwell 3D Software
Translators for Berkeley
SPICE
Translators for Maxwell
Ensemble
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
Go Back
The Translation Manager
Available Translators
Translators for Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Software
Available translators for Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D geometry files are listed below:
Source
Destination
Translator
Translates...
AutoCAD
DXF (.dxf)
Maxwell 2D
Ver 4 (.obs)
dxf2mxwl
AutoCAD ASCII Data Exchange
files to M2DFS v. 4.33 (or earlier)
Meshmaker files.
AutoCAD DXF
Maxwell 2D
Ver 6 (.sm2)
dxf2mxwl
AutoCAD ASCII Data Exchange
files to Maxwell 2D Modeler files.
Maxwell 2D
Ver 6
AutoCAD DXF
dxf2mxwl
Maxwell 2D Modeler files to
AutoCAD ASCII Data Exchange
files.
Maxwell 2D
Ver 4
Maxwell 2D
Ver 6
obs2sm2
M2DFS v. 4.33 (or earlier) Meshmaker files to 2D Modeler files.
Maxwell 2D
Ver 6
Maxwell 2D
Ver 4
obs2sm2
2D Modeler files to M2DFS v. 4.33
(or earlier) Meshmaker files.
Maxwell 2D
Ver 4
Maxwell 3D (.sld
extension)
obs2sld
M2DFS v. 4.33 (or earlier) Meshmaker files to Solid Modeler files.
Maxwell 2D
Ver 6
Maxwell 3D
sm22sld
2D Modeler files to Solid Modeler
files.
Sonnet (.geo)
Maxwell Strata
geo2sm2
Sonnet .geo to Strata .sm2 files.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
73
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
Translators for Maxwell 2D
and Maxwell 3D Software
Translators for Berkeley
SPICE
Translators for Maxwell
Ensemble
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
Translators for Berkeley SPICE
The translators for Berkeley SPICE 3E2 equivalent circuit files are listed below. You
should only translate SPICE files created in Maxwell software packages with these translators. These translators are only available for the workstation version of the software.
Source
Destination
Translator
Translates...
Berkeley SPICE 3E2
(.spc extension)
ContecSPICE
(.csp extension)
spc2exp
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 file
to a ContecSPICE file.
Berkeley SPICE 3E2
HSPICE
(.hsp extension)
spc2exp
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 file
to an HSPICE file.
Berkeley SPICE 3E2
PSpice
(.psp extension)
spc2exp
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 file
to a PSpice file.
In addition, the following packages can generate Berkeley SPICE 3E2, HSPICE, ContecSPICE, and PSpice equivalent circuits:
•
•
•
•
Maxwell 2D Extractor
Maxwell 3D Parameter Extractor
Maxwell Q3D Extractor
Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
Spicelink can only generate Berkeley SPICE 3E2 equivalent circuits.
Translators for Maxwell Ensemble
The translator for Maxwell Ensemble files is listed below:
Go Back
Source
Ensemble 4 or 5
Destination
Ensemble 6.0
Contents
Translator
Translates...
bgf2pjt
Translates model files
from previous versions of
Ensemble to version 6.0.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
74
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for
Translating a File
Translating PC AutoCAD
Files on Sun Workstations
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
General Procedure for Translating a File
> To translate files from one format to another:
1. Under Source, select the format of the file that is to be translated.
Note:
2. Under Destination, select the format into which the file will be translated into.
3. Enter the name of the file that you wish to translate in the Source file(s) field. If
you need to search through your directories to find the file, click the left mouse
button on the file folder icon to use a file browser to find the file.
4. In the Destination directory field, enter the name of the file where the translated
model will be saved.
Note:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
To display a short help message on the selected file format, choose Help.
Information about the translator and its options (if available) appears under
Translator output.
The dxf2mxwl translator accepts multiple source files, and can create multiple destination files. When you select this translator’s options under Source
and Destination, the following fields appear in the Translation Manager
window:
Source File(s):
Destination Directory:
> To select the files to be translated:
1. Enter the directory path and extension of the AutoCAD .dxf files in
the Source file(s) field, using wild cards where appropriate.
2. In the Destination directory field, enter the path name of the
directory where the translated files will be stored. (You cannot
specify an individual destination file name.)
The name of each translated file is the same as that of the source
file, with the appropriate extension for the new file format.
5. If applicable, enter new values for the translator options in the Option field.
Choose Help to display all of the available options.
6. Choose Start to begin translating the files.
As the selected file is being translated, messages from the translator appear under
Translator Output. When the file is translated, the message Success appears.
75
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for
Translating a File
Translating PC
AutoCAD Files on Sun
Workstations
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
Translating PC AutoCAD Files on Sun Workstations
If you are translating .dxf files created using the PC version of AutoCAD, be aware that the
SUN version of the dxf2mxwl translator does not translate carriage returns as blank
spaces. To translate these files, use the UNIX utility dos2unix to strip out the MS-DOS
carriage returns in the .dxf file before running the translator. At the UNIX prompt, type the
following:
dos2unix filename.dxf
where filename is the name of the DXF file. Afterwards, run the dxf2mxwl translator on
the file as you would normally.
For more information on translating .dxf files to Maxwell software file formats, see Translating AutoCAD .dxf Files to Maxwell 2D Software.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
76
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Source and Destination
Source File(s)
Destination Directory
or File
File Folder Icon
Help
Options
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
Translation Manager Fields
The following fields are available in the Translation Manager.
Source and Destination
Do one of the following when defining the source and destination:
•
Select a file format from the ones listed under Source to indicate the file format from
which you are translating.
• Select a file format from the ones listed under Destination to indicate the file format to
which you are translating.
Source File(s)
In this field, specify the file or set of files to be translated.
•
For AutoCAD .dxf files, enter the path name plus the extension of the files, using wild
cards where appropriate.
• For other source files, enter the path name of the file.
Destination Directory or File
In this field, specify either the directory or the file in which the translated source file will be
saved.
•
•
For AutoCAD .dxf files, enter the path name of the directory where the translated files
are to be stored. The translated files have the same file name as the source files, with
the extension associated with the new file format.
For other source files, enter the path name of the file.
This step is optional. If you do not specify a destination file, the name of the source file is
automatically used as the destination file name, and the extension associated with the
new file format is given to the file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
77
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Source and Destination
Source File(s)
Destination Directory or
File
File Folder Icon
Help
Options
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
File Folder Icon
Use the file folder icon to search other directories in order to locate a file or set of files.
Click on it to bring up a file browser that allows you to find the correct file or directory for
your purposes.
Note:
The Translation Manager allows you to use wildcards and translate several
AutoCAD .dxf files at once. For this reason, you can only specify the directory in the Destination Directory field when you choose to translate
AutoCAD files. The file folder icon does not appear for the Destination
directory field when you translate AutoCAD files.
Help
Choose Help if you need to view help on:
•
•
The format for using a translator.
The switches that can be entered in the Options field.
Depending on the source and destination formats chosen, the usage format and a series
of options are listed in the Translator output window.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
78
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Translation Manager
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Source and Destination
Source File(s)
Destination Directory or
File
File Folder Icon
Help
Options
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
Options
The translator options listed below determine how certain geometric features in a model
— such as units of measurement, object points, and coplanar surfaces — are translated
into a Maxwell product’s file format.
-a unit
(AutoCAD .dxf files.) Specifies the unit of measurement for angles.
Available options are:
d - Degrees.
r - Radians (the default).
g - Gradients.
-d destination (AutoCAD .dxf files.) Specifies the directory where translator output
files are written.
-n vertices
-s
Note:
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
(AutoCAD .dxf files.) Identifies the number of vertices used to approximate circles as polygons and arcs as segmented lines. The values
entered in the vertices field must be greater than eight to approximate circles as polygons. The default is 24 vertices.
(AutoCAD .dxf files.) Forces the translator to write the drawing layers
containing objects to separate files in a directory. The directory is
automatically assigned the .dir extension, where each file in the directory contains one layer from the original .dxf file. The file name for
each layer begins with an L, followed by the layer name as it appears
in the .dxf file.
All hidden layers are made visible when they are translated and are saved
either in the one-layer format or the multi-layer format. To avoid this, do not
save the hidden layers in your AutoCAD drawing in the .dxf file that is to be
translated.
-u unit
(AutoCAD .dxf files.) Specifies the linear units of measurement. Available options are:
f - feet.
n - centimeters.
i - inches.
o - millimeters (the default).
j - mils.
p - microns.
m - meters
79
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Source and Destination
Source File(s)
Destination Directory or
File
File Folder Icon
Help
Options
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
Note:
On the PC version of the software, the options for centimeters and millimeters are cms and mms, respectively.
By default, the dxf2mxwl translator uses meters as the linear unit of measurement and radians as the unit of measurement when translating the
AUTOCAD geometry. Use the -a or -u options to specify other types of measurement.
Other translator options that appear in the Options field do not affect how individual
points or surfaces are translated, and thus cannot be modified.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
80
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation
Manager
Translator Properties
The Translation Manager
Exiting the Translation Manager
> To quit after you are finished translating files:
• Choose Exit.
You return to the Maxwell Control Panel.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
81
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Translator Properties
The following sections describe each of the translators and their properties. The terms
described below are used in the next sections to represent the different software packages:
Maxwell 2D version 4.x
Maxwell 2D Modeler
Maxwell 2D software
Maxwell 3D Modeler
Maxwell 2D version 4.33 or earlier (.obs and .att
geometry file formats).
The Maxwell 2D Modeler (.sm2 geometry file format),
which can be accessed from the following software
packages:
• Maxwell 2D version 6.x
• Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor
• Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
• Utilities panel
Refers to all Maxwell 2D software, including:
• Versions 4.x and 6.x of the Maxwell 2D Field
Simulator
• Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
• Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor
The Maxwell 3D Modeler (.sld and .sm3 geometry file
format), which can be accessed from the following
software packages:
• Maxwell 3D Parameter Extractor
• Maxwell Q3D Extractor
• Maxwell 3D
• Maxwell Eminence
• Ansoft HFSS version 6.x
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
82
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Translation Manager
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Translating AutoCAD .dxf Files to Maxwell 2D Software
Most translation problems with AutoCAD .dxf files occur because AutoCAD does not view
geometric models in the same way as the Maxwell 2D software. Some changes to the
AutoCAD model may be necessary before attempting to compute the device’s circuit
parameters or simulate its electromagnetic fields.
Use the guidelines in this section to create or modify AutoCAD geometries for easy translation to Maxwell 2D file formats. Be aware that these guidelines do not include all geometries that can cause trouble in Maxwell 2D software packages. To find and correct
problem geometries, you should always examine translated files prior to assigning material properties, setting boundary conditions, and so forth. In addition, generating a test
mesh for the model will help you to find problem areas in the geometry that are too small
to be spotted with the naked eye. These problems can then be corrected before making
the final mesh.
Geometric Objects
The Maxwell 2D software packages do not treat a model’s geometry in the same way as
AutoCAD or other drafting packages.
•
•
All of the Maxwell 2D software packages view the geometry as a set of objects —
closed shapes that represent parts of the cross-section of a physical structure.
Conductor types, material properties, and boundary conditions are later assigned to
all objects. Open lines and curves can also be included in a model, and are used to
represent sources, boundaries, and so forth.
AutoCAD and other drafting packages view the geometry as a sketch — a collection of
lines, curves, and shapes that serves as a diagram or illustration of a structure.
Shapes that appear closed may not actually be closed. Each contour or shape that
makes up the sketch does not necessarily represent a distinct physical object or
source. Instead, it is just part of the overall drawing.
To be translated into objects that can be recognized by the Maxwell 2D software packages, a geometric model created in AutoCAD should be made up of discrete, closed
shapes — such as circles, polygons, and so forth.
To draw regular closed shapes, use AutoCAD commands like Circle, Trace, Solid,
Ellipse, and Polygon. To draw irregular closed shapes, use the Polyline or Trace commands. These commands force the adjacent edges of a shape to meet at a single vertex
83
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
point, creating a closed shape that can be readily translated into a Maxwell-style object.
Because AutoCAD handles geometries in a fundamentally different way than the Maxwell
2D software, the file translator may not always be able to understand shapes that are
drawn as a group of lines, not as a closed object. Sometimes, it may translate these
shapes as collections of open lines, not as closed objects. Other times, it may join lines to
form objects that you did not intend to create. In any case, the translator cannot reliably
form objects out of a random array of intersecting lines.
Note that two objects cannot share a single line. The translator arbitrarily assigns the
shared edge to one of the objects, leaving the other as a collection of open lines.
Hints for Translating .dxf to .sm2 Files
Use the following general steps to ensure a smooth transition from the .dxf file to Maxwell
.sm2 format.
> To allow for a smoother transition between formats:
1. Using the exporting options in your CAD package, set the accuracy to roughly16
decimal places.
2. Close all open polygons to make them closed objects with a set of completely
defined vertices and edges.
3. Export the file to AutoCad version12 or13 .dxf. Ansoft does support AutoCad
version 14.
4. Remove all groupings from the model.
5. Place all objects in the model on the same layer.
6. Remove any excessive details on arcs, curves, or complex polylines.
7. Locate the center of drawing at (0,0).
8. If units are not set to millimeters, use the -u flag on the translator.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
84
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Curved Objects
Depending on whether they are translated into the file format used by the Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator version 4.x (.obs) or the Maxwell 2D modeler (.sm2), open curves and
closed curved objects in the AutoCAD .dxf file are handled differently.
•
If the .dxf model is translated into .sm2 format, curved objects retain their original
shapes.
• If the .dxf model is translated into .obs format, closed curved objects are
approximated as polygons. (The -n vertices option specifies the number of segments
used to approximate the curve.) Open curved objects are not translated.
Open Lines and Self-Intersecting Objects
Open line objects (drawn with any AutoCAD line command) and self-intersecting objects
can be translated freely into .sm2 format. They cannot be translated into .obs format.
Note:
If you are not sure whether your model contains open line objects or selfintersecting objects, translate the .dxf file directly into .sm2, and edit the file
so that these types of objects don’t exist. Then, translate the .sm2 file to an
.obs file. If you do this, none of the desired information will be lost.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
85
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Crossed Lines and Open Vertices
Lines that appear as if they meet at a vertex point may not necessarily do so. Check the
vertices on all closed shapes that were not drawn with the Polyline, Trace, or Polygon
commands. If other commands are used to draw closed shapes, AutoCAD does not force
the sides of the shape to join at a single point. This can result in two conditions that cause
problems in the Maxwell 2D software:
•
•
•
Since open vertices or crossed lines may not be visible at normal magnification, zoom in
to the vertices on shapes created as a set of lines to verify that the line segments are
joined correctly. Generating a test mesh can help you to spot crossed lines that are too
small to be seen.
Layers
The Maxwell 2D software does not use layers. Multiple layers in .dxf files can be handled
in two ways:
•
•
Go Back
Contents
Open vertices. If the lines that make up the sides of the shape do not actually meet at
the vertex, the translator may not understand that it is a closed object when it reads in
the AutoCAD file. The shape will be translated as a group of open lines.
When reading in an AutoCAD file, you can specify the maximum distance within which
the translator considers two lines to meet at a point. Lines whose end points are within
this distance are translated as being joined at a single point. Lines whose end points
are further apart than this distance are translated as not meeting at the point.
Crossed lines. If the lines in the shape cross instead of meeting at the vertex, the
Maxwell 2D software will not be able to create a valid finite element mesh for this
geometry (even if the overlap is very small).
By merging all layers into one file (the default).
By saving each layer into a separate .sm2 file. To do this, specify the -s option when
translating the file.
Colors that are specified by layer in the .dxf file are preserved in the Maxwell 2D software
files when possible. Objects that are assigned colors different from the one assigned to
the layer are left in their original colors. Hidden (frozen) layers in .dxf files are translated
like any other layer.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
86
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
Go Back
Contents
The Translation Manager
Hidden Objects and Construction Lines
Unless they represent actual parts of a structure, do not save hidden objects and construction lines in the .dxf file that is to be translated. The translator translates hidden
objects as actual objects, and construction lines as open lines.
Cross-Hatching and Frames
Do not save frames, cross-hatches, or other decorations in the .dxf file that is to be translated.
•
Frames affect the way that the model is centered in the problem space. You may have
to manually re-center your drawing if it’s too close to one side of the problem region.
• Cross-hatches are translated as open lines, cluttering up a model with unnecessary
lines. The translator may also join cross-hatch lines into objects, which must be
manually deleted.
Point Objects
Point objects are ignored, since they do not have any significance in the realm of finite
element modeling.
Printing and Paper Space
The translator cannot handle paper space misalignment. In some files, the drawing frame
and captions are in “paper space,” while the drawing paper is in “drawing space.” These
should be matched so that they coincide.
Units of Measurement
By default, the dxf2mxwl translator uses meters as the linear unit of measurement and
radians as the angular unit of measurement when translating the AutoCAD geometry. To
specify other units of measurement, use the following translator options:
•
•
Use the -a option to specify the unit measurement for angles.
Use the -u option to specify linear units of measurement.
They may be entered in the Options field when you are specifying the source and destination files for translation.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
87
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
Go Back
The Translation Manager
Translating Maxwell 2D v. 4.x Files to 2D Modeler Files
This section gives guidelines for translating an .obs file from the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator version 4.x to an .sm2 file used by the 2D Modeler.
Note:
When translating files created in the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator version 4.x,
remember that both .obs and .att files are required to create the .sm2 file. If
both of these files are not available, the translation will fail.
Inverted Geometric Model
The geometry in a 2D Modeler .sm2 file that has been translated from a Maxwell 2D 4.x
.obs file appears upside-down on the 2D Modeler screen. This occurs because the y-axis
in Maxwell 2D version 4.x Meshmaker points in the opposite direction from the y-axis in
later versions of the Maxwell 2D software.
To return the model to its original orientation, choose Arrange/Mirror in the 2D Modeler
and mirror the geometry about a horizontal line bisecting the drawing.
Other than this, the geometric model in an .obs file is not changed when the file is translated to the .sm2 format.
Object Colors
Because the 2D Modeler does not handle colors in the same way as Maxwell 2D version
4.x, objects in the .sm2 file generally have different colors than they did in the .obs file.
Maxwell 2D version 4.x uses a predefined color list in which each color is identified by a
number. The 2D Modeler represents colors as combinations of red, green, and blue hues
in various intensities.
Objects in the translated file are assigned a color in the user color palette according to the
original object color’s position in Maxwell 2D version 4.x color list. For instance, objects
assigned to color 1 in the .obs file are given the first color in the user color palette.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
88
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Translating 2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D Field Simulator v. 4 Files
This section gives guidelines for translating a 2D Modeler .sm2 file into an .obs file used
by version 4.x of Maxwell 2D.
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
All closed objects in 2D Modeler .sm2 files (including zero-area objects) can be translated
into Maxwell 2D version 4.x .obs files. Open objects and text are not translated.
Inverted Geometric Model
The translated geometric model appears upside-down on Maxwell 2D version 4.x Meshmaker screen. This occurs because the y-axis in the 2D Modeler points in the opposite
direction from the y-axis in Maxwell 2D version 4.x. To return the model to its original orientation, mirror it about a horizontal line that bisects the drawing.
Curved Geometric Objects
Closed, curved objects in the .sm2 file are translated as polygons in the .obs file because
Maxwell 2D version 4.x uses polygons to approximate curved shapes. The number of
segments in the curved edge determines the number of sides in the resulting polygon. For
instance, a 40-segment circle in a translated .sm2 file will become a 40-sided polygon in
the resulting .obs file.
Background Object
The translator automatically creates a geometric object called background in the translated file. This object is made up of the part of the solution region that is not occupied by
other geometric objects. The Meshmaker in Maxwell 2D version 4.x requires the background object to create a finite element mesh for the model.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
89
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Object Colors
Because Maxwell 2D version 4.x does not handle colors in the same way as later versions
of the Maxwell 2D software, objects in the .obs file generally have different colors than
they did in the .sm2 file. The 2D modeler represents colors as combinations of red, green,
and blue hues in various intensities. Maxwell 2D version 4.x, on the other hand, uses a
predefined color list in which each color is identified by a number.
Objects in the translated file are assigned a color in Maxwell 2D version 4.x color list
according to their original color’s position in the user color palette (not the color’s shade
and hue). For instance, objects assigned to the first color from the palette in the .sm2 file
are given color 1 in the .obs file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
90
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid
Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Translating Maxwell 2D Files to Solid Modeler Files
Use the guidelines in this section to create or modify 2D geometries (.sm2 and .obs files)
for easy translation to Solid Modeler .sld files.
Note:
Both the .att and .obs files for a geometry created in Maxwell 2D version 4.x
are needed to generate the .sld file. If one of these files is missing, the translation will fail.
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
Only closed, non-zero area geometric objects from a 2D Modeler .sm2 file are written to a
Solid Modeler .sld file. Open objects, text, and closed, zero-area objects are not translated.
The translated 2D objects from the .sm2 and .obs files always lie in the xy plane in the
.sld file’s 3D geometry. By sweeping or rotating these objects, you can form a 3D geometric model in the Solid Modeler. The normal vectors to the 2D objects are pointed in the
positive direction along the z-axis, which ensures that they are always swept or rotated in
the positive z direction.
Curved Edges
Curved edges in the .sm2 and .obs files arebe translated as polygons in the .sld file
because the Solid Modeler uses polygons to approximate curved shapes. The number of
segments in the curved edge determines the number of sides in the resulting polygon. For
instance, a 24-segment circle in the original .sm2 or .obs file becomes a 24-sided, 2D
polygon in the translated .sld file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
91
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Translating Maxwell .sm2 Files to .dxf Files
Use the guidelines in this section to create or modify 2D geometries (.sm2 and .obs files)
for easy translation to .dxf files.
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
Only closed, non-zero area geometric objects from a 2D Modeler .sm2 file are written to
an AutoCAD .dxf file. Open objects, text, and closed, zero-area objects are not translated.
The translated 2D objects from the .sm2 files always lie in the xy plane in the .dxf file’s
geometry. The normal vectors to the 2D objects point in the positive direction along the zaxis, which ensures that they are always swept or rotated in the positive z direction.
Curved Edges
Curved edges in the .sm2 and are translated as polylines in the .dxf file because
AutoCAD uses polylines to approximate curved shapes. The number of segments in the
curved edge determines the number of sides in the resulting polyline object.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
92
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Translating Sonnet .geo Files to Maxwell Strata .sm2 Files
Use the guidelines in this section to modify Sonnet geometries (.geo files) for translation
to Maxwell Strata .sm2 files.
Open and Closed Geometric Objects
When translated, each layer in the .geo file is written to a separate .sm2 file that can be
read from Maxwell Strata. The converted files are named layerN.sm2, where layer0.sm2
describes the topmost layer in the Sonnet model. If any layers in the Sonnet model do not
contain conductors, no .sm2 file will be created for that layer. All layerN.sm2 files are written into the directory from which the translator is invoked
The names for each translated shape are created using the material name for the shape
followed by a number (e.g., silver1)
Vias are implemented using two-point line segments for the top and bottom edges of the
via. The via edges are named ViaTopN and ViaBotN, where N is a number identifying the
via, ViaN. In Sonnet, you can have a via that entends to the upper ground plane. SInce
there is no such plane in Strata, these vias are not translated into anything useful and can
be edited out of the Strata project after translation.
In addition to the .sm2 files, all stack up information and material properties are also written to the corresponding files. For conductors, the conductivity is computed from the RF
surface resistance coefficient. (For resistive materials, the DC resistance should be used,
but since Strata does not currently implement resistive materials, this is not done in this
version of the translator). All material properties are read in as local materials and are
given the names local_N. For conductors, always check the value computed for the conductivity before doing the analysis to ensure accuracy.
Go Back
In the stack up, each material layer is identified by layerN, where layer0 is the top layer.
The dielectric materials are named SubN, where Sub0 is the topmost dielectric layer. The
translator automatically merges adjacent layers that have the same material property, so
the substrate layer numbers in Sonnet may not match their Strata equivalents.
Contents
Each metal layer is defined to be a perfect conductor by default. Each object on the layer
is assigned to a local material property using an .asn file.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
93
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
The Translation Manager
Ports in Translation
The ports in the translated Strata project are located where the edge of the substrate
would have been in the equivalent Sonnet file. The reference plane information from the
Sonnet .geo file is not used for the translation. Internal ports (those not on the edge) are
not translated since Strata does not implement this feature. In Sonnet, if you specify that
the circuit is symmetic, you only need to create the ports on one side of the circuit. For
Sonnet .geo files that specify the symmetry, it may be necessary to manually add ports to
the mirrored half of the circuit after the translation.
The dielectric bricks implemented in Sonnet 4.0 are skipped in the translation.
Translation Failure
If the translation fails, an error report is written to a log file named geo_err.log. If an error
is encountered during the parsing of the .geo file, then a detailed description of the error,
along with the line number of the error will be given in the log file.
If the translator is to be used as a part of another program and not as a standalone executable, refer to the source file geostrat.cpp for a step-by-step description of how to use
the translator object.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
94
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Translators
Translators Commands
Translation Manager
Available Translators
General Procedure for Translating a File
Translation Manager Fields
Exiting the Translation Manager
Translator Properties
.dxf to Maxwell 2D
Maxwell 2D v. 4.x to 2D
Modeler Files
2D Modeler Files to Maxwell 2D v. 4
Maxwell 2D to Solid Modeler Files
Maxwell .sm2 to .dxf
Sonnet .geo to .sm2
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 to
ContecSPICE, HSPICE,
or PSpice
Previous Versions of
Ensemble to Ensemble
6.0
Go Back
Contents
The Translation Manager
Translating Berkeley SPICE 3E2 Files to ContecSPICE, HSPICE, or PSpice
By default, Maxwell Spicelink and its associated software packages generate Berkeley
SPICE 3E2 files. These files can be translated into the following versions of SPICE:
•
•
•
HSPICE
PSpice
ContecSPICE
After translating a SPICE equivalent file, you can modify it as desired and run it in your
own SPICE solver. Be aware that this is not a general SPICE translator. If you have not
used a Maxwell software product to create the Berkeley SPICE file, it cannot be translated
in the Translation Manager.
Note:
You can also export SPICE files to these formats using the Export SPICE
File command in the following software packages:
• Maxwell 2D Extractor
• Maxwell 3D Parameter Extractor
• Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
• Maxwell Q3D Extractor
Refer to the manuals for these Maxwell products for more information on this
command.
Translating Previous Versions of Ensemble to Ensemble 6.0
The BGF translator for Ensemble version 6.0 converts only versions 4.0 and 5.0 into the
new format.
The version 6.0 translator is more stringent in handling names and text symbols in the
.bgf file and notifies you about each modification it makes during the translation. For
example, if in a version 5.0 .bgf file, the text .01“ represents a length of .01 inches in the
model file, the version 6.0 translator converts the text to .01 i in the translated file.
Similarly, underscores are used to replace existing blank spaces in some numeric and
string values during the translation.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
95
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Screen Colors and
Screen Captures
Black and White Printers
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Print Manager
Choose Print from the Maxwell Control Panel to:
•
•
•
•
Print screen captures of Maxwell software product screens.
Specify the following options that determine how screen captures are to be printed:
• Whether the screen capture is printed or saved in a file.
• The type of printer (if printing a hard copy).
• The file format (if saving the screen capture to a file).
• How the screen capture appears on the printed page.
Save print options to a file (workstation version only).
Read print options from a file (workstation version only).
The Print Manager can be used to print hard copies of screens in any Maxwell software
package. Since the Maxwell Control Panel remains active at all times, you can make
screen captures at any time.
Because printing is set up differently on the workstation and PC versions of the software,
this chapter contains separate sections for each. If you are running the software on the
workstation version, refer to the Printing on the Workstation section. If you are running the
software on the PC, refer to the Printing on the PC section.
Screen Colors and Screen Captures
Depending on how your screen colors and print options are set, your screen captures
may not turn out the way you expect. For instance, if you set up the software to have a
white background and select the Invert Black/White option, your screen capture will turn
out to be too dark. Make a few test printouts and experiment with the various print options
and screen colors to find out which combination of options and colors works best.
Black and White Printers
Go Back
Contents
Black and white printers differentiate colors by shade (intensity) only. If you choose the full
spectrum to display a plot of a field quantity, the software displays each color at its maximum intensity, making all colors appear to be the same shade when printed. Therefore, to
generate a hard copy of a shaded plot on a black and white printer, choose a single color
instead of the full spectrum.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
96
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
When you choose Print from the Maxwell Control Panel, the Print Manager appears:
Print Manager Commands
The following are the commands in the Print Manager:
Print
Default
Go Back
Load
Save
Exit
Sends the specified screen area to the printer or file.
Displays the default settings for a particular output printer type that
were the original settings as hard-coded in the Maxwell software.
Loads a printer setup previously specified.
Saves the current printer setup.
Quits the Print Manager.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
97
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Print Manager
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
General Procedure for Printing a Screen Capture
> To print a hard copy of a screen when using the workstation version of a Maxwell
software package:
1. Set up the screen the way you want it to appear in the printout.
2. Display the Maxwell Control Panel in the foreground of your workstation screen.
3. Choose Print from the Maxwell Control Panel. The Print Manager appears.
4. Under Output type, select a printer type or file format. For instance, choose a
Postscript or LaserJet printer, or GIF or XWD format.
5. Choose whether to print the screen capture, save it to a file, or both. (Note that you
cannot print .gif or .xwd files.)
• To print the screen capture directly,
a. Select Printer under Destination(s).
b. Enter the appropriate print command for your system in the Print
command field.
• To save the screen capture to a file, select File under Destination(s). The image
is saved in a format that can be printed on the printer you selected under Output
type.
6. Do one of the following to specify printer options controlling the screen capture’s
appearance:
• Set the desired print options, as described in the Print Manager Fields section
(later in this chapter).
• Load a file of preset printing options, as described in Load Printer Setup (later in
this chapter).
7. Click the left mouse button on the Print button at the bottom of the window.
8. If you selected File, a pop-up window appears. Specify a file name and directory,
as described in the Saving a Screen Capture to a File section.
9. The cursor appears as a hand and the following message appears:
MOUSE LEFT: Select window to print
MOUSE RIGHT: Abort printing
10. Select the desired window, bringing it to the foreground. The cursor then appears
as cross-hairs and the following message appears at the bottom of the Print
Manager window:
MOUSE LEFT: Begin area selection
MOUSE RIGHT: Finish selection
98
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
11. Select the print region:
• To capture part of a window:
a. Position the cross-hairs at one corner of the desired region.
b. Click the left mouse button to select the first corner point.
c. Move the mouse to the other corner of the rectangular region you wish to
print. A rectangle appears, enclosing the area.
d. Click the right mouse button to select the second corner point and begin
capturing the screen area.
• To capture an entire window, click the right mouse button once on any part of the
window.
As the Print Manager captures the screen, the following message appears:
Waiting for hardcopy output to finish.
Depending on the selected options, the image is then saved in a file and/or sent to the
printer. As the image is printed, all Print Manager commands and options are temporarily
disabled, and the following message appears briefly:
Sending image to printer.
The image is then printed.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
99
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Saving a Screen Capture to a File
Cancel Printing
Print Manager Fields
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Saving a Screen Capture to a File
If you selected File, a file browser window appears.
> To save the screen capture to a file:
1. Use the file browser to change to the desired directory.
2. Specify the name of the file in the File for hardcopy output field. Depending on
the type of printer or file that was selected under Output type, the Print Manager
automatically adds one of the following extensions to the file:
PostScript
.ps
LaserJet
.pcl
PaintJet
.pj
PaintJet XL .pjx
XWD File
.xwd
GIF File
.gif
3. After entering the file name, choose OK.
4. Continue capturing the screen as you normally would.
Cancel Printing
While the screen capture is being sent to the printer, the Print button is replaced by the
Cancel Printing button.
> To cancel printing a screen capture:
• Choose Cancel Printing at the bottom of the Print Manager window.
The screen capture is cancelled.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
100
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Print Manager Fields
The Print Manager provides a number of options to select the type of output and control
the appearance of the screen capture. These options are described below. The printer
and file types that apply to each option are also given.
Output Type
The Output type field identifies the type of printer on which the screen capture is printed.
This field also identifies the type of file in which the screen capture is saved, if you choose
to write it to a disk file.
> To select a printer or file format:
1. Click the left mouse button on the button next to Output type. A menu of printer
and file types appears.
2. Select the desired printer or file type. The printer options that apply to it appear in
the Print Manager window.
Available printers and file types are:
PostScript
LaserJet
PaintJet
PaintJet XL
XWD File
Go Back
GIF File
Produces output (*.ps files) that can be printed on a black and white
or color PostScript printer or saved to a file.
Produces output (*.pcl files) that can be printed on a Hewlett-Packard
LaserJet printer or saved to a file.
Produces output (*.pj files) that can be printed on a Hewlett-Packard
PaintJet printer or saved to a file.
Produces output (*.pjx files) that can be printed on a Hewlett-Packard
PaintJet XL printer or saved to a file.
Saves the screen capture to a file in XWD (X Window Dump) format
(*.xwd files). These files can later be viewed using the UNIX command xwud.
Saves the screen capture to a file in GIF format (*.gif) that can be
viewed using a number of different GIF utilities.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
101
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Fewer Options and More Options
(PostScript.)
When you select PostScript as the output type, you can toggle the Fewer Options and
More Options buttons to display different print options. The following commonly-used
PostScript print options are displayed when you choose Fewer Options:
Black and Choose one of these settings if you have a black and white printer:
white printer
Grayscale
Prints the image in grayscale shading. (This automatically selects Transparent Background, Draw Image
Border, Shade Text, and Shade Colors.)
Black and white Prints the image in black and white, with no shading.
(This automatically selects Transparent Background
and Draw Image Border.)
Color printer Choose this setting if you have a color printer:
Color
Prints the image on a colored background. (This autobackground
matically selects Draw Image Border and Use
Color.)
These options also appear when you choose Default.
If you want to specify other options for the PostScript printout, choose More Options. The
Black and white printer and Color printer fields are replaced with the Image Options
and Color Mapping fields.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
102
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Destination(s)
(PostScript, LaserJet, PaintJet, and PaintJet XL.)
The Destination(s) options allow you to send your screen capture directly to a printer,
save it to a file, or both. If you select File and Printer, the Print Manager saves the
screen capture to a file and then prints the hard copy. If you just select File, the screen
capture is only saved to a file and is not printed out.
The following options are available:
File
The File option allows you to save screen captures to a disk file. The file is written in a format that can be printed on the type of printer you selected under Output type.
When you capture a screen after selecting File, the Print Manager automatically prompts
you to name the file in which the screen capture will be stored. See Saving a Screen Capture to a File for instructions.
Printer
(PostScript, LaserJet, PaintJet, and PaintJet XL.)
The Printer option enables you to send screen captures directly to a printer, producing a
hard copy of the desired screen. The screen capture is printed on the printer specified in
the Print command field.
Print Command
(PostScript, LaserJet, PaintJet, and PaintJet XL.)
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
When you select Printer, the Print command field automatically becomes accessible.
The Print Manager initially enters the default UNIX print command for your system in this
field. The exact print command depends on which UNIX operating system is installed on
your workstation and the configuration of your network.
If the default print command is different from the print command you generally use,
change it. For example, if you use the following command to print files:
lp -asis filename
change the Print command field to lp -asis.
103
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Page Layout
(PostScript, LaserJet, PaintJet, and PaintJet XL.)
The Page layout fields control how the screen capture appears on the printed page,
regardless of whether the image is directly printed out or saved to a file. These fields are:
Landscape
Prints the screen capture on a page that’s 11 inches wide by 8 1/2
inches high (or in landscape orientation if your paper is not this
size).
Portrait
Prints the screen capture on a page that’s 8 1/2 inches wide by 11
inches high (or in portrait orientation if your paper is not this size).
Left margin
The distance from the left edge of the page to the image.
Right margin
The distance from the right edge of the page to the image.
Top margin
The distance from the top edge of the page to the image.
Bottom margin The distance from the bottom edge of the page to the image.
Hardcopy Size
(PostScript, LaserJet, PaintJet, and PaintJet XL.)
The fields under Hardcopy size control the size of the printed image as follows:
Width
Height
Note:
The width of the image on the printed page.
The height of the image on the printed page.
The Width and Height values are adjusted according to the margins and
page orientation (portrait or landscape) that you specify. The margins are
adjusted according to the Width and Height values you specify. In general,
you only have to specify either the margins or the size of the paper.
No. of Copies
Go Back
Contents
(PostScript.)
Determines the number of copies to be printed.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
104
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Line Thickness
(PostScript.)
Controls the thickness of lines on the printout of the screen capture. Specify a lower number of lines per inch to obtain thicker lines on the printed image; specify a higher number
of lines per inch to obtain thinner lines on the image.
Font
(PostScript.)
Specifies which font appears in a the screen capture. This font is not necessarily the one
that is displayed on the screen. A PostScript printer font is substituted for the screen font.
Note:
If you choose a proportional font, the text in your printout will not look the
same as the text on the screen display. For best results, choose a monospaced font, so that the spacing does not vary from character to character.
> To select the font that is used in a PostScript screen capture:
1. Click the left mouse button on the button next to Font. A menu of fonts appears.
2. Select the desired font from the menu. Available fonts are:
• Helvetica
• Helvetica-Bold
• Courier
• Courier-Bold
• Times-Roman
• Times-Bold
• Other
3. If you selected Other — indicating that you’d like to use a font that’s not listed on
this menu — a pop-up window appears. Do the following to specify the font name:
a. Enter the name of the desired font in the Enter font name field.
b. Choose OK or press Return. The selected font name then appears next to
Font in the Print Manager window.
Go Back
Note:
The screen capture will not print properly if you select a font that is not available to the printer.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
105
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Image Options
The Image options fields control the way the dark and light areas of a picture print.
Invert Black/White
(PostScript, LaserJet, PaintJet, and PaintJet XL.)
Changes black images to white, and vice versa.
•
For black and white printers, white pixels are switched to black, and black pixels are
switched to white, and the grayscale shades are inverted in the PostScript file.
• For color printers, only black and white pixels are inverted.
Transparent Background
(PostScript, LaserJet, PaintJet, PaintJet XL, XWD File, and GIF File.)
Takes any background color (not just black) and makes it print white. Essentially, the system instructs the printer not to lay down any ink or toner for the background, regardless of
what color it is. This option also draws black lines for white lines and uses light gray for
white shadow colors. Use this option if your background color is something other than
black and you wish to save printing time and toner.
•
•
•
For PostScript printers, both the Background color (the color in the background of the
modeling windows) and the Control Background color (the background color for
menus and message bars) are made transparent.
For Laser Jet, PaintJet, and PaintJet XL printers, only the Background color is made
transparent.
For GIF and XWD files, the Background color is changed to white.
For more information on setting the system Background and Control Background colors, refer to the The Color Manager.
Transparency Mode
Go Back
(PaintJet and PaintJet XL.)
Contents
Instructs the PaintJet or PaintJet XL printer to make two passes over the page while printing, which produces a more intense image on the hard copy. This option is generally used
to make bright pictures for overhead transparencies.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
106
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Draw Image Border
(PostScript.)
Determines whether a black border is printed around the screen capture. If this option is
not selected, no border is printed.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
107
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Color Mapping
The fields under Color mapping allow you to adjust the way that colors are handled in a
screen capture.
•
•
For color printers, these fields identify how colors are printed on the hard copy.
For black and white printers, these fields specify how colors are represented as
shades of gray on the hard copy.
Use Color
(PostScript.)
Determines whether PostScript output is printed in color or in black and white.
•
•
For color printers, selecting this option causes the image to be printed in color.
For black and white printers, selecting this option causes the image to be shaded.
Shade Text
(PostScript.)
Determines whether text in a black and white PostScript output is shaded in grayscale to
indicate its color. If this option is not selected all text is printed in black. The Shade text
option is not available if you selected Use color.
Shade Colors
(PostScript.)
Determines whether colored objects, plots and other items in a black and white PostScript
output are shaded in grayscale to indicate their color (the default). If this option is not
selected, these items are printed in black or white.
Note:
Go Back
Contents
To increase the resolution in screen captures of plotted signals, deselect this
option. This forces colored signals in plots to appear as black lines on the
printout instead of grayscale, increasing their visibility.
The Shade colors option is not available if you selected Use color.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
108
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Output Type
Fewer Options and
More Options
Destination(s)
Page Layout
Hardcopy Size
No. of Copies
Line Thickness
Font
Image Options
Color Mapping
Default
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Halftone
(LaserJet, PaintJet, PaintJet XL.)
Halftone approximates the intensity of each screen pixel by expanding it into a larger
group of pixels. This produces a smooth grayscale or color appearance on the plot.
•
•
For a LaserJet printer, selecting this option causes colors to be printed as dots
representing different shades of gray.
For PaintJet and PaintJet XL printers, each pixel in the expanded group is assigned a
different ink color to approximate the correct screen color.
Be aware that the Halftone option may give some colors a speckled, uneven appearance.
To avoid this, change the screen colors to match the ink colors.
Dither
(LaserJet, PaintJet, PaintJet XL.)
Similar to Halftone, Dither approximates the intensity of each screen pixel by expanding
it into a larger group of pixels. Output printed with the Dither option is not as smooth in
appearance as Halftone printouts. However, Dither enables you to capture more screen
detail in the image. Selecting Dither may give some colors a speckled, uneven appearance. To avoid this, change the screen colors to match those of the ink colors.
Threshold
(LaserJet, PaintJet, PaintJet XL.)
When Threshold is selected, each pixel on the screen is mapped to black and white or to
a color, depending on the threshold value for the selected printer.
•
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
For LaserJet printers, the threshold is the average brightness of the picture’s contents.
All pixels are mapped to either black or white, depending on their brightness.
• For PaintJet and PaintJet XL printers, the red, green, and blue components of the
screen colors have independent thresholds. Depending on its intensity, each color is
mapped to an ink color on the printer. This avoids the uneven appearance of colors on
some dithered or halftone output.
Default
Choose Default to display the set of print settings stored in the default.prn file.
109
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Load Printer Setup
> To load printer options from a file:
1. Choose Load. One of the following things happens:
• If you have not made changes to your print options (or have saved any changes
you have made), the following window appears:
•
Go Back
Contents
If you made changes to your print options but not yet saved them, the following
message appears:
You have made changes to your current hardcopy setup.
Would you like to save them?
• Choose Yes to save the changes. Follow the procedure under Save Printer
Setup to save the changes.
• Choose No to cancel.
The pop-up window shown above appears.
2. Use the file browser to select a file name ending in .prn.
3. Choose OK or press Return.
The selected print option file is loaded into the Print Manager.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
110
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Save Printer Setup
> To save your print options to a file:
1. Select the desired print options, as described under Print Manager Fields.
2. Choose Save. The following window appears:
3. Use the file browser to select an existing printer settings file, or enter a new
filename.
4. When you have entered or selected the file name, choose OK.
5. If the file already exists, the Print Manager asks you whether you want to
overwrite it. Choose OK to continue.
The modified print setup is then saved and you return to the Print Manager. Each time
you access the Print Manager, it loads the last setup you saved.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
111
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Print Manager Commands
General Procedure for
Printing a Screen Capture
Print Manager Fields
Load Printer Setup
Save Printer Setup
Exit
Printing on the PC
The Print Manager
Exit
> To exit the Print Manager:
• Choose Exit.
If you did not make any changes to the print options, you exit the Print Manager.
If you changed one or more print options, a pop-up window appears prompting you to
save the changes you have made.
> To exit the Print Manager after making changes, do one of the following:
• To save the changes and exit, select Yes. A file browser window appears to allow you
to select a file to save in. Save the printer settings into a file ending in the conventional
.prn.
• To exit the Print Manager without saving your changes, select No.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
112
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
Printing on the PC
There are two ways of printing on the PC:
•
•
For lower resolution screen captures, use the Print command in the Maxwell Control
Panel. This command takes a bitmap screen capture of anything displayed in a
Maxwell window. Because bitmaps are limited by the resolution of your monitor, these
screen captures may be not be of the highest quality.
For higher resolution screen captures, use the Print command in the Windows Control
menu. For more details on how to print from the Control menu, refer to the Printing
from the Control Menu section.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
113
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
Printing from the Maxwell Control Panel
The Print Screen window appears when you choose Print from the Maxwell Control
Panel.
Note:
The PC version of the software uses the Windows Print Manager — which is
accessed through the Windows Control Panel — to control printer settings.
(For more information on the Windows Print Manager, see the Microsoft
Windows User’s Guide.)
Print Screen Commands
The following command menus are available in the Print Screen window:
File
Go Back
Contents
Allows you to read in and save bitmap files, set up printer options,
print the screen capture, and exit the Print Screen window.
Edit
Allows you to copy the screen capture to be edited in another Windows application, paste the screen capture for editing, and delete the
screen capture in the Print Screen window.
Grab screen Allows you to select an area of the screen to be printed.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
114
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen
Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
General Procedure
The general procedures for setting up and printing screen captures is as follows.
Setting Up Screen Captures
> To set up a screen capture:
1. Set up the screen as you want it to appear on the printout.
2. Display the Maxwell Control Panel in the PC’s foreground.
3. Choose Print from the Maxwell Control Panel. The Print Screen window appears.
4. Iconify the Maxwell Control Panel.
5. Choose Grab screen to select the area you wish to print.
6. (Optional.) Use the Edit commands to manipulate the screen capture.
Printing Screen Captures
> To print a screen capture:
1. Choose File/Print Setup.
2. Make the necessary changes to the setup for the desired printer.
3. Choose File/Print to print the screen capture. A menu appears.
4. Set the appropriate options for the desired printer and choose OK.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
115
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
File
Use the File commands to read in and save bitmap files for printing, set up and print
screen captures, and exit the Print Screen window. The following commands are available on the File menu.
Open
Save As
Print Setup
Print
Exit
Reads a bitmap (*.bmp) file into the Print Screen area for printing.
Saves the screen capture to a Windows bitmap (*.bmp) file.
Sets up the printer to print screen captures.
Prints the screen capture.
Exits the Print Screen window.
File/Open
Choose Open to read in a file to be printed.
> To read in a file:
1. Choose File/Open. The Open pop-up window appears.
2. Use the file browser to select any Windows bitmap (*.bmp) file to open.
3. Choose OK.
File/Save As
Choose File/Save As to save a screen capture to a file.
> To save the capture:
1. Choose File/Save As. A file browser appears, prompting you to save the file.
2. Use the file browser to choose a file name ending in .bmp.
3. Choose OK.
You can save any of the screen captures you create by adding a .bmp extension to the
end of the file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
116
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Print Manager
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
File/Print Setup
Choose File/Print Setup to set up a variety of printer settings.
> To specify different print options:
1. Choose File/Print Setup. The following window appears:
2. Select the desired printing options.
3. Choose OK.
In addition to the standard Windows print options, the following Maxwell specific print
options appear:
Orientation
More
Go Back
Contents
Transparent
Background
Invert black
and white
Sets up the paper for the screen capture in the following ways:
Portrait
Prints the screen capture in portrait orientation.
Landscape Prints the screen capture in landscape orientation.
Takes any background color (not just black) and makes it print
white. Essentially, the system instructs the printer not to lay
down any ink or toner for the background, regardless of what
color.
Changes black images to white, and vice versa. Colored objects
are not affected.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
117
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
Black and white
only
Draw window
frame
Margins in
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Prints the image in black and white with no shading.
Determines whether a black border is printed around the screen
capture. If this option is not selected, a border is not printed.
Lets you specify the units of measurement for screen capture
margins in the following units:
inches
Sets the margins in inches.
cm
Sets the margins in centimeters.
mm
Sets the margins in millimeters.
Sets the distance from the left edge of the page to the image.
Sets the distance from the right edge of the page to the image.
Sets the distance from the top edge of the page to the image.
Sets the distance from the bottom edge of the page to the
image.
For more information on other Microsoft Windows options that appear in the Print Setup
Screen, see the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
118
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
File/Print
Choose File/Print to send the screen capture to the printer.
> To print a screen capture:
1. Choose File/Print.
2. Optionally, choose Setup to set up other printing options.
3. Choose OK to exit the Print window and to begin printing. When the system
begins printing the screen, the following message appears:
Printing in progress.
4. When the system is finished printing, the message disappears and the cursor
displays normally.
Cancelling a Print Job
While the system is printing the screen, you can cancel the print job.
> To cancel the printing of a screen capture:
1. Choose Cancel print job. The following message appears:
Error in Printing
2. Choose OK.
The screen capture is cancelled.
File/Exit
Choose File/Exit to exit the Print Screen window.
> To exit the Print Screen window:
• Choose File/Exit.
The Print Screen window disappears from the screen.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
119
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
Edit
Use the Edit commands to do the following:
Copy
Paste
Clear
For more information on how to use the Microsoft Windows Clipboard with other editing
utilities compatible with Microsoft Windows, refer to either the Microsoft Windows User’s
Guide, or the documentation for the specific program you are using to edit the screen capture.
Grab screen
Use the Grab screen command to select the area of the screen you wish to print.
> To select the area of the screen for the screen capture:
1. Choose Grab screen.
2. Click on the first diagonal corner of the area to be printed.
3. Drag the mouse to the second diagonal corner and click the left mouse button to
finish selecting the area to be printed.
4. To cancel this command, use the right mouse button.
Note:
Go Back
Contents
Copies the contents from the Print Screen window to the Microsoft Windows Clipboard.
Pastes the contents from the Windows Clipboard to the Print Screen
window.
Deletes the contents of the Print Screen window.
If the screen capture you want to print does not have the correct colors after
the Print Screen window is iconified, do the following:
1. Click the right mouse button to abort the Grab screen command.
2. Select the area to be printed again. The colors are corrected
automatically.
3. Choose the Grab screen command again.
The screen capture appears with the correct colors in the Print Screen window.
The area you selected appears in the Print Screen window.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
120
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
Go Back
The Print Manager
Printing from the Control Menu
For higher resolution printouts, use the Print command in the Windows Control menu.
The settings you specify here override the settings specified in the Print Screen window,
accessible from the Maxwell Control Panel. Keep in mind that these changes only work
while you are running the Maxwell software packages, and will not affect the default Windows printer settings.
Note:
The Print command is only available in the Control menu from the application window containing Maxwell software.
> To print a hard copy of a screen capture using the Print command in the Control
menu:
1. Set up the screen image to be printed.
2. Choose Print from the Control menu. The following menu appears:
Entire Window Prints the entire window (including the display area, status
area, and so forth).
Subwindow
Prints the selected subwindow.
Rectangle
Prints a rectangular area of the screen.
3. Choose one of the commands listed. Refer to the next sections for more details on
using the Entire Window, Subwindow, and Rectangle commands.
After you have chosen one of these commands and set up the area to be printed,
the Print window appears.
4. Optionally, choose Setup to change the printing options.
5. Choose OK to begin printing. The cursor displays as an hour glass and the
following message appears:
Printing in progress
When the system finishes printing, the message disappears and the cursor displays normally.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
121
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Print Manager
Printing on the Workstation
Printing on the PC
Printing from the Maxwell
Control Panel
Print Screen Commands
General Procedure
Setting Up Screen Captures
Printing Screen Captures
File
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Print Setup
File/Print
File/Exit
Edit
Grab screen
Printing from the Control
Menu
Cancelling a Print Job
Selecting a Region
The Print Manager
Cancelling a Print Job
While the system is printing the screen, you can cancel the print job.
> To cancel the printing of a screen capture:
1. Choose Cancel print job. The following message appears:
Printing job was terminated.
2. Choose OK.
The screen capture is cancelled.
Selecting a Region
The following commands from the Print menu allow you to select a region of the screen to
be printed.
Entire Window
Choose Entire Window to print the entire window of a Maxwell application, including the
menu bar, display area, and status area.
Subwindow
Choose Subwindow to print one of the subwindows of the window from which you
accessed the Print menu. A subwindow is any part of the main window that is partitioned
off. For example, you can choose to print the tool bar via the Print/Subwindow command.
Rectangle
Choose Rectangle to print a selected area of the screen that may or may not be considered a subwindow.
Go Back
Contents
> To print the area in the rectangle:
1. Choose Print/Rectangle. The cursor turns into cross-hairs.
2. To select the print area:
a. Click the left mouse button on the first diagonal corner of the area to be printed.
b. Click the left mouse button on the second diagonal corner.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
122
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Process Manager
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
Process Manager
(UNIX only)
The Maxwell Process Manager controls the sequence in which projects, or jobs, are
solved. The Process Manager allows you to:
•
•
•
•
Schedule a time to solve a project.
Submit a project to be solved, or modify an existing project in the queue.
Add or remove a host machine on which to solve a project.
Configure a host machine.
When you choose Schedule from the Maxwell Control Panel, the following window
appears:
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
123
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
The Process Manager window displays functions and commands which enable you to
specify a date and time for solving your project. The process queue for the machine on
which you are currently executing projects appears in the upper right of the window. This
lists the jobs that are waiting to be solved on the machine.
A calendar allows you to page through the months to specify a date to solve your job. As a
shortcut to using the Jobs commands, you can select a date to solve your problem by
clicking on it in the calendar.
The process queue field appears in the lower right part of the window. This field lists:
•
•
•
•
The name of the Job to be solved.
The User who submitted the job.
When the job was submitted.
The Command the Process Manager executes on the current job.
Jobs are listed in the order of submission to the queue.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
124
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
The commands in the Process Manager are as follows:
File
Jobs
Configure
Preferences
Help
Submit
Modify
Remove
Set Current
Host
Imports the hosts and saves the current process configuration.
Submits, modifies, or removes processes in the Process Manager.
Adds, modifies, or removes a host machine from the Process Manager.
Configures the host machine settings.
Specifies the default host, path, calendar style. Also saves the specified
preferences.
Accesses the online documentation on the Process Manager.
Identical to Jobs/Submit. Submits a project to the Process Manager.
Identical to Jobs/Modify. Modifies a submitted project.
Identical to Jobs/Remove. Removes a submitted project.
Similar to Preferences/Default Host. Specifies the current host
machine on which to solve your project and starts the process daemon.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
125
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
File Commands
Use the File commands in the Process Manager to:
•
•
Import a host.
Save the current host configuration.
The commands on the Process Manager File menu are:
Import Hosts
Save
Configuration
Exit
Imports a new host machine to the Process Manager.
Saves the current host machine configuration.
Exits the Process Manager.
File/Import Hosts
Use this command to import a host machine on which to solve a project.
> To import a host:
1. Choose File/Import Hosts.
2. Select the host machine you wish to import.
File/Save Configuration
Use this command to save the current host configuration.
> To save the current host configuration:
• Choose File/Save Configuration.
The current host configuration is saved.
File/Exit
Use this command to exit the Process Manager.
Go Back
> To exit the Process Manager:
• Choose File/Exit.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
126
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
Jobs Commands
Use the Jobs commands to:
•
•
•
Submit a job to be solved.
Remove a job currently in the queue to be solved.
Modify an existing job in the Process Manager queue.
The commands in the Jobs menu are:
Submit
Modify
Remove
Submits a job to the Process Manager.
Modifies a job in the Process Manager.
Removes a submitted job from the Process Manager.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
127
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
Go Back
Contents
The Process Manager
Jobs/Submit
Use this command to submit a job to the Process Manager.
> To submit a job:
1. Choose Jobs/Submit, the Submit button, or the date on the calendar on which
you wish to solve your project. To specify a date with the calendar, use the arrow
keys to page through the months and choose a month and day. A dated window
appears.
2. Under Hosts, choose a machine on which to solve the project.
3. Specify command line procedures in one of the following ways:
• Enter any commands at the command line.
• Choose Select Project to specify the project to solve. The Select Project file
browser appears.
• Select the project you wish to solve, then choose OK.
• Toggle Display on to add display to the command line. Display makes the
X Application appear on the local X server.
• Toggle Iconic on to add iconic to the command line. Iconic makes the X
application to appear iconified.
• Toggle Queue on to add queue to the command line. Queue tells the
Process Manager to wait for a license if one isn’t currently available.
• Toggle No Graphics on to add nographics to the command line.
Nographics allows you to run the software non-graphically.
• Toggle Batch on to add batch to the command line. Batch allows you to run
the software for the nominal problem from the command line. Depending on
the project type, you may have to define the type of batch solution.
4. Toggle Submit now on (the default) to submit the project immediately. Toggle
Submit after on to enter a job number after which to submit the project. Toggle
Submit at on to specify the date and time of the submission.
5. Toggle Foreground on to see a dialog box of the results when the job is complete.
6. Toggle Logging to specify the logfile for the project.
7. Choose Submit to submit the project or choose Done to save the settings but not
submit the project.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
128
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
Go Back
The Process Manager
Jobs/Modify
Use this command to modify a job in the Process Manager. Only jobs still waiting in the
queue may be modified.
> To modify a job:
1. Select the job your wish to modify.
2. Choose Jobs/Modify.
3. Under Hosts, select a machine on which to solve the project.
4. Specify command line procedures in one of the following ways:
• Enter any commands at the command line.
• Choose Select Project to specify the project to solve. The Select Project file
browser appears.
• Select the project you wish to solve, then choose OK.
• Toggle Display on to add display to the command line. Display makes the
X Application appear on the local X server.
• Toggle Iconic on to add iconic to the command line. Iconic makes the X
application appear iconified.
• Toggle Queue on to add queue to the command line. Queue tells the
Process Manager to wait for an available license if one cannot be readily
accessed.
• Toggle No Graphics on to add nographics to the command line.
Nographics allows you to run the software non-graphically.
• Toggle Batch on to add batch to the command line. Batch allows you to run
the software for the nominal problem from the command line. Depending on
the project type, you may have to define the type of batch solution.
5. Toggle Submit now on (the default) to submit the project immediately. Toggle
Submit after on to enter a job number after which to submit the project. Toggle
Submit at on to specify the date and time of the submission.
6. Toggle Foreground to see a dialog box of the results when the job is complete.
7. Toggle Logging to specify the logfile for the project.
8. Choose Submit to submit the modified job or choose Done to exit the command.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
129
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
Jobs/Remove
Use this command to remove a job from the Process Manager.
> To remove a job:
1. Select the job you wish to remove.
2. Choose Jobs/Remove. If the job is currently running, you are prompted to confirm
the removal of the job. Choose Yes to remove the job.
The job is removed from the queue.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
130
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
Configure Commands
Use the Configure commands to:
•
•
•
Add a host machine to the Process Manager.
Modify the existing configuration of a host machine.
Remove a host machine from the Process Manager.
The commands in the Configure menu are:
Add Host
Modify Host
Remove Host
Adds a host machine to the Process Manager.
Modifies the existing configuration of a host machine.
Removes the host machine from the Process Manager.
Configure/Add Host
Use this command to add a host machine to the Process Manager. This provides a new
machine on which to solve the projects you create.
> To add a host machine:
1. Choose Configure/Add Host. The Add Host window appears.
2. Enter the Hostname of the machine you wish to add as a host.
3. Enter the IP Address for the host machine.
4. Enter a Path for the host machine or accept the default.
5. Enter any Notes that are pertinent to the host machine.
6. Choose Accept to accept the changes. Choose Done to exit the command without
saving the changes.
Note:
The port number for the host machine can be set non-graphically in the
/etc/services directory. To set the port number for the Process Manager,
consult the Maxwell Installation Guide.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
131
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
Configure/Modify Host
Use this command to modify the configuration of an existing host machine.
> To modify a host’s configuration:
1. Choose Configure/Modify Host. The Modify Host window appears.
2. Select the name of the host machine you wish to modify.
3. Enter the Hostname of the machine you wish to add as a host.
4. Enter the IP Address for the host machine.
5. Enter a Path for the host machine or accept the default.
6. Enter any Notes that are pertinent to the host machine.
7. Choose Accept to accept the changes. Choose Done to exit the command without
saving the changes.
Configure/Remove Host
Use this command to remove a host machine from the Process Manager.
> To remove a host machine:
1. Choose Configure/Remove Host. The Remove Host window appears.
2. Select a host machine.
3. Choose Done.
The host machine is removed from the host list.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
132
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default
Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
Preferences Commands
Use the Preferences commands to:
•
•
•
Specify your default settings, such as the host machine and directory path.
Modify the calendar defaults.
Save the preferences you specified.
The commands in the Preferences menu are:
Default Host
Default Path
Calendar
Timeout
Save
Preferences
Specifies the default host machine on which to solve projects.
Specifies the default path in which projects are solved.
Specifies the calendar defaults.
Specifies the time within which the Process Manager must contact the
process daemon.
Saves the default preferences.
Preferences/Default Host
Use this command to specify the default host machine. This machine is the one that your
jobs will be solved on.
> To specify the default host:
1. Choose Preference/Default Host. The Default Host window appears.
2. Select a host machine.
3. Choose OK to accept the machine as the default host or choose Cancel to cancel
the action.
Preferences/Default Path
Use this command to specify the default directory path of your projects.
Go Back
Contents
> To specify the default path:
1. Choose Preference/Default Path. The Default Path window appears.
2. Enter the new default path for your projects.
3. Choose OK to accept the path or choose Cancel to cancel the action.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
133
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current Host
The Process Manager
Preferences/Calendar
Use this command to specify the calendar settings.
> To configure the calendar:
1. Choose Preference/Calendar. The Calendar Settings window appears.
2. Toggle Display Calendar Pictures off to turn off the calendar pictures. Skip this
step to keep the calendar pictures visible.
3. Toggle Default Ansoft Pictures to turn off Ansoft’s pictures as the default for the
calendar. This button automatically toggles off User Supplied Pictures.
4. Toggle User Supplied Pictures and enter a new path for the calendar pictures to
supply your own calendar pictures. This button automatically toggles off Default
Ansoft Pictures.
5. Choose OK to accept the calendar settings or choose Cancel to cancel the action.
Preferences/Timeout
Use this command to define the default timeout setting. This value determines how much
time is permitted for the Process Manager to contact the process daemon before an error
is returned. This command is used to prevent the software from stalling while it searches
for the process daemon.
> To define the timeout:
1. Choose Preferences/Timeout. The Default Timeout window appears.
2. Enter the timeout value in the Default Timeout field.
3. Choose OK to accept the timeout value or Cancel to ignore the setting.
Preferences/Save Preferences
Use this command to save your default preferences.
> To save your preferences:
• Choose Preferences/Save Preferences.
Go Back
Your preferences are saved.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
134
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Process Manager
Process Manager Commands
File Commands
File/Import Hosts
File/Save Configuration
File/Exit
Jobs Commands
Jobs/Submit
Jobs/Modify
Jobs/Remove
Configure Commands
Configure/Add Host
Configure/Modify Host
Configure/Remove Host
Preferences Commands
Preferences/Default Host
Preferences/Default Path
Preferences/Calendar
Preferences/Timeout
Preferences/Save Preferences
Specifying the Current
Host
The Process Manager
Specifying the Current Host
Occasionally, you will wish to specify the current host without changing the default host
machine.
> To specify a new current host:
1. Choose Set Current Host. The set current host window appears.
2. Select the machine you wish to specify as the current host.
3. Choose OK.
If no process daemon exists on the machine, you are asked if you wish to start one.
Choose Yes if you wish to start a process daemon. Choose No if you do not wish to start
a process daemon.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
135
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Utilities Panel
Utilities Panel Commands
The Utilities Panel
The Utilities Panel
The Utilities panel allows you to do the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Change user or system colors.
Access the 2D Modeler.
Access PlotData, a stand-alone plotting utility.
Evaluate mathematical expressions.
Access the Material Manager to create or derive new materials.
When you choose Utilities from the Maxwell Control Panel, the following window
appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
136
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Utilities Panel
Utilities Panel Commands
The Utilities Panel
Utilities Panel Commands
The following commands are available in the Utilities panel:
Colors
Loads, changes, and saves settings for the user and system colors used
in Maxwell software products.
2D Modeler Opens, creates, and saves two-dimensional models. Also saves twodimensional models to 3D model files.
PlotData
Creates and saves plots using parametric equations, loads and plots data
files, opens plots created in Maxwell Spicelink and Ansoft HFSS, and
exports files in 2D Modeler file format.
Evaluator Evaluates mathematical expressions for calculations for any of the Maxwell software products.
Materials
Accesses the Materials Manager which allows you to create new materials or derive materials from existing ones in the material database.
Exit
Exits the Utilities panel.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
137
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
The Color Manager
Choose Colors to do the following:
•
•
•
Modify the colors that are used in Maxwell software displays.
Save the modified color map to a file.
Read in an existing color map from a disk file.
Note:
If you are running on a workstation with a black and white monitor, an error
message appears when you select Colors. To change your screen colors,
you must modify the color settings that the Ansoft configuration program
placed in your .Xdefaults file. An explanation of each of these settings is
given in Xdefaults File Color Settings.
The following window appears, displaying available system and user colors:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
138
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
Maxwell software represents each color as a combination of red, green, and blue shades.
The intensity of each shade is given as a numerical value between zero and 1000. By
changing the intensity of red, green, and blue shades, you can change a system or user
color.
You can use the software’s default color map or create a color map of your own. Color
maps can be saved in disk files and loaded into the Color Manager at a later time.
System Colors
The available System colors are listed below. These colors are used in the software’s
windows, menus, drawing areas, warning messages, and so forth.
Background
Foreground
Bottom shadow
Top shadow
Ctl. background
Ctl. foreground
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Alert
Auxiliary
Gradient
Background, 3D
The background color on which the model and plots are displayed.
The color of items that are drawn on the background, like selection
boxes, plot axes, and axis labels.
(UNIX only.) The color of the shadow along the bottom of menus,
buttons, and window frames. This color and Top shadow give a
three-dimensional effect for these screen elements.
(UNIX only.) The color of the shadow along the top of menus, buttons, and window frames.
(UNIX only.) The background color for command menus, buttons,
and window frames.
(UNIX only.) The color of text on command menus, buttons, and
window frames.
The color of the progress bars that appear during the solutions.
The color of the grid in the modelers.
Toggles the bars for the high and low gradient background colors.
If you are running the PC version of the software, use the colors specified in the Microsoft
Windows Color Manager to change the software’s windows, menus, drawing areas, and
so forth. Any changes you make in that Color Manager, however, will affect the colors of
other software applications. See System Colors on the PC for a list of the Microsoft Windows elements that cannot be set using the Maxwell system colors.
139
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
User Colors
The User colors are a palette of sixteen colors that determine the colors of items such as
geometric objects and text, circuit elements, field and signal plots, and so forth. If desired,
use the Color Manager to change these 16 default colors as described in the Modifying
Colors section.
The items mentioned above can be assigned new colors from the palette in the Maxwell
software package in which they appear. When you change the color of one of these items
in the software, the user color palette is displayed to give you a selection of all the colors
in the palette. Refer to the appropriate online documentation for more details.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
140
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Color Manager Commands
The following commands are available in the Color Manager:
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Reads an existing color file (*.rgb) into the Color Manager.
Saves changed system and user colors in a file with the extension
.rgb.
Exits the Color Manager.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
141
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Modifying Colors
The colors you use in the color panel are not limited to the default palette. You may
change the shade and intensity of both system and user colors.
> To change the shade and intensity of a system or user color:
1. Click the left mouse button on the desired system color or user color. The color and
color name appear in the upper right corner of the Color Manager window. The
square displaying a user color enlarges to indicate the color that is being changed.
2. Do one of the following to adjust the amounts of red, green, and blue in the
selected color:
• Enter a numerical value for the red, green, or blue intensity. These values must be
between zero and 1000.
• Click the left mouse button above or below one of the boxes in the up- or downarrows on the sliding color scale change the intensity incrementally. The numerical
value for the red, green, or blue intensity of a color goes up or down by ten each
time you click the mouse button on an arrow.
• Drag the bar indicating the intensity value up or down on the sliding scale. The
numerical intensity automatically changes to match it. When the color reaches the
desired intensity, stop.
3. Choose Save to save the new set of system and user colors to a file.
The color is changed to match the specified red, green, and blue intensities.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
142
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Load Color Map
You can load an existing color file into the Color Manager. This allows you to use a color
scheme other than the default settings for your projects.
> To read an existing color file into the Color Manager:
1. Do one of the following:
• Choose Load Color Map/Standard, White Background to use a standard white
background for the viewing windows in the Ansoft software package you are using.
• Choose Load Color Map/Standard, Black Background to use a standard black
background for the viewing windows in the Ansoft software package you are using.
• Choose Load Color Map/User Color File. A file browser appears. Do one of the
following:
• If the desired file name is listed in the Files box, select it. The file name
automatically displays in the Load RGB file field. Choose OK.
• If the desired file is not listed, search for the file using the file browser.
Choose OK.
The desired color file is then read into the software. Its name appears in the title bar of the
Color Manager window. All system and user colors are changed to match the color map
in this file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
143
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Save
> To save the changed system and user colors:
1. Choose Save. The Save Color File As window appears, asking you to enter a file
name for this color set. By default, *.rgb — the extension automatically given to
color files — appears in the pop-up window.
2. Do one of the following:
• To save the colors to a new file, enter the file name in the Enter a name for this
file field. The system automatically adds an .rgb extension to the specified file
name if it does not already end in .rgb.
• To save the colors to the existing file, accept the default name in the name field.
3. When you have entered the file name, choose OK.
4. If the file already exists, the Color Manager prompts you whether you want to
overwrite it. Choose Yes to overwrite it and continue.
The modified color setup is then saved and you return to the Color Manager.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
144
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Exit
When you are finished making changes to the color scheme, you are ready to exit the
Color Manager.
>
To exit the Color Manager:
• Choose Exit.
• If you did not make any changes, you exit the Color Manager.
• If you changed one or more colors, a pop-up window appears that prompts you to
save the changes you have made. Do one of the following:
• To save the changes and exit, choose Yes. The changes to the color setup
are saved to the current color file before you exit the Color Manager.
• To exit the Color Manager without saving your changes, choose No.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
145
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through Your .Xdefaults File (Workstation)
When you first configure the Maxwell software on a workstation, comment lines (lines preceded by exclamation points) for default color entries are added to your .Xdefaults file.
The set of lines beneath the !Color settings for color displays and !Black and white
settings for color displays labels allow you to specify user, system, and window frame
colors for workstations.
•
To specify user and system colors, use the Color Manager, or edit these lines, as
described in the procedure at the end of this section.
Note:
•
Color Manager settings override the corresponding default settings in the
.Xdefaults file, as they are loaded after the default settings.
To specify window frame colors, edit these lines only. These colors cannot be
specified using the Color Manager.
The lines added to the .Xdefaults file are in the following form:
!Maxwell*element Background: Color
!Maxwell*element Foreground: Color
Where element is the name of a program element, and Color is the name of a color.
Go Back
Contents
> To modify these color settings:
1. Use a text editor to delete the exclamation point at the beginning of the desired
line. See .Xdefaults File Color Settings for a description of each setting.
2. Change the color assigned to the program element to another color.
3. Save the file, and perhaps exit the text editor.
4. Do one of the following to make the new settings take effect:
• Enter the following command at the UNIX prompt:
xrdb -merge .Xdefaults
• Restart the X server by logging out and logging back in again.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
146
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
Each .Xdefaults setting is explained below. The colors specified for these screen elements are intended to give you an acceptable set of defaults for running the software on
either a black and white or color monitor.
Maxwell*activeBackground
This setting specifies the color of active window frames which cannot be set through the
Color Manager. If you leave this line commented out, the system uses the color specified
for your window manager’s active window frames.
Maxwell*activeForeground
This setting specifies the color of text on the title bar of the active window, which cannot
be set through the Color Manager. If you leave this line commented out, the system uses
the color of text in your window manager’s active window frames.
Maxwell*borderBackground
This setting specifies the color of inactive window frames, which cannot be set through
the Color Manager. If you leave this line commented out, the system uses the color specified for your window manager’s inactive window frames.
Maxwell*controlForeground
This setting specifies the color of text on the title bar of the inactive window, which cannot
be set through the Color Manager. If you leave this line commented out, the software
uses the color of text in your window manager’s inactive window frames.
Maxwell*controlBackground
Go Back
Contents
This setting specifies the default background color for command menus, buttons, message bars, executive command menus, and so forth. It corresponds to the Ctl. background color in the Color Manager.
Maxwell*controlForeground
This setting specifies the default color of text on menus, buttons, executive menu screens,
and so forth. It corresponds to the Ctl. foreground color in the Color Manager.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
147
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the PC
The Color Manager
Maxwell*drawingBackground
This setting specifies the default color of the background on which the models and plots
are displayed. It corresponds to the background color in the Color Manager.
Maxwell*drawingForeground
This setting specifies the default color of items that are drawn on the background, the
“rubber bands” for changing the display and selecting items, and plot axes, grids, and legends. It corresponds to the foreground color in the Color Manager.
Maxwell*privateColors
This setting tells the software to use Maxwell private color maps for determining the colors
of the background, objects, and axes. The Maxwell private color map assigns a series of
colors to each window in the software. When different windows become active, the color
map is preserved for each window and the inactive window retains its originally mapped
colors.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
148
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
The Color Manager
Color Manager Overview
System Colors
User Colors
Color Manager Commands
Modifying Colors
Load Color Map
Save
Exit
Color Settings
Setting Colors Through
Your .Xdefaults File
(Workstation)
.Xdefaults File Color Settings
System Colors on the
PC
Go Back
Contents
The Color Manager
System Colors on the PC
You cannot change certain screen elements on the PC via the Maxwell Color Manager.
Use the Windows Color Manager to change the following Maxwell window elements:
Maxwell Window Element
Microsoft Windows Color Manager
Title bar
Active Title Bar, Inactive Title Bar,
Active Title Bar Text, Inactive Title Bar
Text
Window borders
(project windows and windows of
commands from main menu)
Active Border, Inactive Border, Window
Frame
Buttons
Button Shadow, Button Highlight, Button Face, Button Text
Menus
Menu Bar, Menu Text
Highlight, Highlighted Text
Query messages, error messages,
and information messages that are
standard Windows messages
Window Background, Window Text,
Active Title Bar, Inactive Title Bar
Pop-up windows, warning messages, and information messages
that are related to the Maxwell
software
Active Title Bar, Button Face, Button
Text, Button Shadow, Button Highlight
The specific colors assigned to these elements depend on how you have set up screen
colors on your PC. For an explanation of the Windows Color Manager elements, refer to
the Microsoft Windows User’s Reference.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
149
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
2D Modeler
Choose 2D Modeler to access a stand-alone version of the 2D Modeler. Use this module
to:
•
•
Create and save 2D geometric models that can be read into various Maxwell 2D or 3D
software packages.
View or edit an existing 2D model.
The 2D Modeler that is accessible through the Utilities panel is similar to the one that’s
accessed through the following packages:
•
•
•
Maxwell 2D (version 6.1 or later)
Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor
Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
The differences between the 2D Modeler in the Utilities panel and the other Maxwell 2D
software packages are explained later in this chapter.
When you choose 2D Modeler from the Utilities panel, the following window appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
150
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
The commands in the 2D Modeler have the following functions:
File
Edit
Reshape
Boolean
Arrange
Object
Constraint
Model
Window
Go Back
Help
Contents
Use the File commands to read other geometries into the 2D Modeler
from disk files, to save the geometry being created in a disk file, to open
and close project windows, and to exit the 2D Modeler.
Use the Edit commands to cut, paste, select, display, and copy objects
and text.
Use the Reshape commands to change the shape of geometric
objects.
Use the Boolean commands to unite, intersect, or subtract objects.
Use the Arrange commands to move, rotate, and mirror objects and
text.
Use the Object commands to sketch the objects that make up the geometric model and to create text labels. Closed objects, such as circles
and rectangles, can be created as well as open shapes, such as lines,
arcs, and splines.
If you have purchased the Parametrics Analysis option, the Constraint
menu appears. For more information on adding, modifying, and deleting variables that allow you to resize objects in a model, see the explanation of the Constraint commands in the Maxwell 2D online
documentation.
Use the Model commands to select the drawing units that are used in a
model, measure distances between points, specify the mouse “snap-to”
behavior, and set the default attributes for subwindows.
Use the Window commands to select the active project window, create
new subwindows, manipulate project windows and subwindows,
change the grids and views of structures in subwindows, and display
objects as filled-in solids.
Use the Help commands to access the online documentation on the
Maxwell Control Panel and its features.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
151
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
2D Modeler Tool Bar
The tool bar is the row of icons that appears above the 2D Modeler window. Icons give
you easy access to the most frequently used commands, as shown below:
Click on one of the previous icons to access the online documentation on the command it
represents.
> To access or view information on the commands in the tool bar:
• To execute a command, click on the appropriate button.
• To display a brief description of the command in the message bar, move the cursor to
the desired icon and hold down the left mouse button. Move the cursor off the icon
before releasing the mouse button to avoid executing the command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
152
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Menu Bar
Drawing Region
Project Windows
Subwindows
Subwindow Coordinate
Systems
Subwindows Versus
Project Windows
Active Windows
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Screen Layout
Components of the screen layout are more completely discussed in the Windows section
of the document describing The User Interface.
Menu Bar
The menu bar appears at the top of the 2D Modeler window. Each item in the menu bar
has a menu of commands associated with it. To display a menu, simply place the cursor
on the desired command and click the left mouse button. For example, to display the list of
Edit commands left-click on the Edit command.
Drawing Region
The drawing region is the grid-covered area in which you draw objects. This region initially
represents a 100 millimeters by 70 millimeters drawing space.
•
•
See the Object menu for a description of commands that allow you to create the
objects that make up a geometric model.
See Model menu for a description of commands that allow you to manipulate the size
of the drawing region, the unit of length used in specifying distances, the behavior of
the mouse and cursor in selecting points from the grid, and other such parameters.
Project Windows
Each project window can display a different geometric model. As described in The User
Interface, each project window is a window that can be moved and resized using its window frame. To open a new project window, use the File/Open command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
153
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Menu Bar
Drawing Region
Project Windows
Subwindows
Subwindow Coordinate Systems
Subwindows Versus
Project Windows
Active Windows
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Subwindows
The 2D Modeler supports subwindows that can be used to display different views of the
drawing region. For example, you can zoom in on a detailed portion of a structure in one
subwindow and leave a normal view of the full structure in a second subwindow. Also, you
can use different grids (cartesian and polar) in different subwindows when creating
objects.
Use the Window commands to create and manipulate subwindows.
Subwindow Coordinate Systems
Each subwindow’s coordinate system can be independently set. By default, subwindows
use a cartesian (rectangular) coordinate system in which u and v represent the local coordinates of a point. The local uv-key is displayed in the lower-left corner of each subwindow. Use the commands under Window/Coordinate System to shift or rotate each local
coordinate system.
Subwindows Versus Project Windows
Subwindows are different than project windows. Project windows contain different geometric models, and each project window can contain multiple subwindows that allow you
to view that geometric model differently.
Active Windows
Only one project window and one subwindow can be active at any one time. Click the left
mouse button on a project window or subwindow to make it the active one.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
154
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Message Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Status Bar
The status bar appears at the bottom of the 2D Modeler screen. It contains fields that display the coordinates of the mouse and which allow you to enter coordinates for object
points. It also displays status information.
•
The following fields display the coordinates of the cursor:
If a cartesian (rectangular) grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is
located, the fields U and V appear in the status bar.
• If a polar (radial) grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is located,
the fields R and Theta appear in the status bar.
Because different coordinate systems can be used locally in each subwindow,
these fields specify the local coordinates of whatever window the cursor is in.
•
These fields can also be used to enter coordinates of points directly from the keyboard.
See Selecting Points With the Keyboard for more details.
•
•
UNITS displays the current unit of length in which the geometry is being entered. By
default, it is millimeters (mm), and mm is displayed on the status bar.
The SNAPTO mode settings indicate the “snap-to-point” behavior of the mouse as
points are being picked on the screen. For example, when SNAPTO: grid vertex is
set (the default), the 2D Modeler grabs the grid or object vertex point closest to the
mouse click.
For more information on changing units, grid and mouse snaps, see the explanation of the
commands on the Model menu.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
155
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Message Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Message Bar
The message bar appears at the bottom of the window frame. Text describing the mouse
button functions for the selected command appears here. For example, the following text
is displayed in the message bar after the command Window/Change View/Zoom In is
selected:
MOUSE LEFT: Enter zoom-in area
MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command
After selecting or deselecting objects and text, the message bar displays the number of
items that are currently selected. After changing the view with the Window/Change View
commands, it also displays the current magnification level of the view in the active subwindow.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
156
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
Drawing Plane
Constraints
General Procedure
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Differences Between 2D Modelers
Drawing Plane
The Model/Drawing Plane command is available in the Utilities 2D Modeler and the 2D
Modeler in version 6.1 (or later) of Maxwell 2D. It enables you to change the drawing
plane of the 2D geometry from xy (representing a cross-section that extends into the zdirection) to RZ (representing a cross-section that’s revolved around an axis of symmetry), and vice versa. This command is not available in the Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor
or the Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor packages because only straight cross sections
are considered in these packages.
For more information on the drawing planes in general, refer to Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models in the Things to Consider section.
Constraints
If you have purchased the Parametrics Analysis option, the Constraints menu appears in
the 2D Modeler in the Utilities panel and in the 2D Modeler in versions 6.2 and later of
Maxwell 2D. For more information on adding, modifying, and deleting variables that allow
you to resize objects in a model, see the explanation of the commands on the Constraint
Menu in Maxwell 2D’s online help system.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
157
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The 2D Modeler
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Selecting Points With the
Keyboard
Object Names and Colors
Viewing a Model
Zooming and Panning in
Subwindows
Displaying Objects as
Wire Frames or Shaded
Solids
Reading, Writing, and Saving Objects
Things to Consider
More
Go Back
General Procedure
There is no strict procedure to follow in creating a geometric model. The following steps,
however, serve as general guidelines.
1. Choose the Model/Drawing Plane command to set the drawing plane for the
model. Refer to the explanation of Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models for more
information on drawing planes.
2. Choose Model/Drawing Size to specify the size of the drawing region. Refer to
Sizing the Drawing Region for more information on sizing the drawing region.
3. Use the Model/Drawing Units command to designate the units for the area of the
drawing region in which you create the model.
4. Use the Object commands to create objects. When drawing the cross-section of a
structure, build it as a collection of 2D objects. Treat each different conductor or
material in the structure as a separate object. For example, the following model
represents a stripline with three conductors.
As a geometric model, the structure above is simply a set of objects to which the
names Stripline1 through Stripline3, Substrate, and Ground have been
assigned.
5. If necessary, use the Edit, Reshape, and Arrange menu commands to modify the
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
158
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Selecting Points With the
Keyboard
Object Names and Colors
Viewing a Model
Zooming and Panning in
Subwindows
Displaying Objects as
Wire Frames or
Shaded Solids
Reading, Writing, and
Saving Objects
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
geometry that you have created.
Note:
You can also use the Constraint commands if you have purchased the Parametrics Analysis option with the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator.
6. If necessary, use the Window menu commands to adjust the view of the drawing
region as follows:
• Choose the Window/New command to create additional subwindows in which to
display different views or parts of the geometric model.
• Choose the Window/Tile and Window/Cascade commands to layout the
windows in a convenient way. Also, use the resizable borders of subwindows to
resize and reposition them as described in The User Interface.
• Choose the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift or rotate the local
coordinate system used in the active window.
7. Choose File/Save to periodically save the geometry to a disk file.
8. Choose File/Exit to complete your drawing session.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
159
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Selecting Points With
the Keyboard
Object Names and Colors
Viewing a Model
Zooming and Panning in
Subwindows
Displaying Objects as
Wire Frames or
Shaded Solids
Reading, Writing, and
Saving Objects
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Selecting Points With the Keyboard
When drawing objects, you are expected to select points from the screen using the mouse
and cursor. As an alternative to selecting points with the mouse, you can use the keyboard to enter points in the U and V fields located in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen. Use keyboard entry to do the following:
•
Enter coordinates and angles with greater precision than can be achieved using the
mouse.
• Select points that are between grid or mouse “snaps” without having to change the
mouse behavior.
> To enter points using the keyboard:
1. Move the mouse to the U field in the status bar and click the left mouse button.
2. Enter the u-coordinate of the point.
3. Move the mouse to the V field in the status bar and click the left mouse button.
(Alternatively, press the Tab key.)
4. Enter the v-coordinate of the point.
5. Click on the Enter button that appears in the status bar or press Return.
The desired point is then selected.
Additional entry fields appear in the status bar as necessary. For example, an Angle field
appears when you choose the command Window/Coordinate System/Rotate. Occasionally, other fields may appear in the status bar instead of U and V. For instance, if a
polar grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is located, the fields R and
Theta appear in the status bar instead of U and V. Use the same procedure to enter values in these fields.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
160
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Selecting Points With the
Keyboard
Object Names and Colors
Viewing a Model
Zooming and Panning in
Subwindows
Displaying Objects as
Wire Frames or
Shaded Solids
Reading, Writing, and
Saving Objects
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Object Names and Colors
After you have created a closed 2D object, the following pop-up window appears.
> To assign a new color and name to an object:
1. Enter the new object name in the Name field. By default, new objects are assigned
the name objectn (where n is a sequential number assigned to subsequent
objects.)
Note:
The name background is reserved for use by the system and cannot be
assigned to any object in the geometric model. The “background” object consists of the parts of the drawing region that aren’t occupied by closed
objects.
2. Choose a new object color.
a. Click the left mouse button on the color block next to the Color field. A palette
of colors appears.
b. Select the new color.
3. Choose OK to complete the command.
4. The new object is then assigned a name and a color. To change the name or color,
use the Edit/Attributes/Recolor and Edit/Attributes/Rename commands.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
161
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Selecting Points With the
Keyboard
Object Names and Colors
Viewing a Model
Zooming and Panning
in Subwindows
Displaying Objects as
Wire Frames or
Shaded Solids
Reading, Writing, and
Saving Objects
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Viewing a Model
You can change how objects are displayed.
Zooming and Panning in Subwindows
Although the same set of objects are displayed in all subwindows for a project, you can
display only a part of the geometry in a subwindow. For example, one subwindow can
show a zoomed view of one portion of a structure while another subwindow shows the
entire structure. Use the Window/Change View/Zoom In and Window/Change View/
Zoom Out commands to change the view in the active subwindow.
Once you zoom in on a portion of a subwindow, horizontal and vertical scroll bars appear
along the bottom and right side of the subwindow. They allow you to pan left, right, up,
and down the magnified structure. The horizontal scroll bar appears in a subwindow only
when the entire structure is not visible along the local U-axis, and the vertical scroll bar
appears in a subwindow only when the entire structure is not visible along the V-axis.
> To change your view using the scroll bars, do one of the following:
• Click on one of the arrow buttons that appear at the ends of the scroll bar.
• Use the thumb scroll. Do the following:
1. Move the cursor to the off-colored bar, or “thumb scroll,” that appears in the
scroll bar.
2. Drag the thumb scroll in the scroll bar to the the data that you want to display.
For instance, to pan down a geometric model, drag the thumb scroll in the vertical scroll
bar down, or click the mouse button on the down arrow button.
Displaying Objects as Wire Frames or Shaded Solids
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Closed objects are normally displayed as transparent, wire frame objects through which
you can see the underlying grid. To display objects in the active window as opaque,
shaded solids, choose Window/Fill Solids. Doing so causes the 2D Modeler to fill in the
objects with the colors of their borders.
Use Window/Fill Solids and Window/Wire Frame to toggle between wire frame and
opaque displays. The system displays only one of the two commands at a time. For example, if shaded models are being displayed, the system displays the Window/Wire Frame
command so that you can toggle back to a wire frame display.
162
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Selecting Points With the
Keyboard
Object Names and Colors
Viewing a Model
Zooming and Panning in
Subwindows
Displaying Objects as
Wire Frames or
Shaded Solids
Reading, Writing, and
Saving Objects
Things to Consider
The 2D Modeler
Reading, Writing, and Saving Objects
As you are creating a geometric model, you may want to copy objects from another structure into the model that you are currently creating. To do so, use the File/Open command
to open the file containing the desired geometric model in a new project window.
You may also want to import a model from another project and then edit the model to create a new 2D model. To do so, use the File/Import command to import the file containing
the desired geometric model into the existing project window.
To save objects as you work and to save the final geometric model, choose the File/Save
(or File/Save As) command.
Note:
Make sure you save objects periodically. They are not saved automatically!
Frequently saving your geometric model can prevent you from losing part or
all of your work if a system crash occurs while you are editing a model.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
163
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models
Keep it Simple
Level of Detail
Background Object
Sizing the Drawing Region
Objects within Objects
Consider Boundaries
Partial Overlapping Not
Allowed
The 2D Modeler
Things to Consider
When creating the geometry representing the cross-section of a structure, keep the following guidelines in mind.
Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models
Before drawing the model, you need to consider whether you want to create a cartesian
model or an axisymmetric model. In both models, the system assumes that the geometry
represents a cross-section of a device or system of objects.
•
•
In a cartesian (XY) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a device
that extends perpendicular to the modeling plane.
In an axisymmetric (RZ) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a
device that is rotated 360°.
The figure below shows the difference between the two types of models.
Choose XY Plane to
create a cartesian
geometry. Visualize the
rectangle as extending
perpendicular to the
plane being modeled.
Choose RZ Plane to
create an axisymmetric
geometry. Visualize the
rectangle as being
revolved around an axis
of symmetry, z.
Z
Y
R
X
Z
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
φ
By default, the 2D Modeler uses the XY drawing plane, unless you have chosen the RZ
setting the previous time. More information on how to choose the drawing plane for your
model can be found in the section describing the Model Menu.
164
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models
Keep it Simple
Level of Detail
Background Object
Sizing the Drawing Region
Objects within Objects
Consider Boundaries
Partial Overlapping Not
Allowed
The 2D Modeler
Keep it Simple
Keep the model as simple as possible. The more complex a geometric model is, the more
complex the finite element mesh (which is used in generating the field solutions) has to be
— resulting in greater requirements for memory and processing power. If necessary, it is
always possible to add detail to the model later. Therefore, always start with as simple a
model as possible.
Level of Detail
Be careful not to create geometries in which large dimensions and small dimensions differ
by more than three orders of magnitude. For example, do not create an object with one
side larger than 2 inches and another side smaller than 0.002 inches. Likewise, do not
place two objects with sides that are approximately 5 millimeters in length any closer than
0.005 millimeters to one another. The Maxwell 2D software may not be able to create a
finite element mesh — and, hence, cannot generate solutions for geometries in which
dimensions vary by more than three orders of magnitude.
Background Object
An object named background is automatically created by the system. This object occupies any portion of the drawing region that is not occupied by objects that you have created. Although it cannot be displayed while the geometric model is being created, material
characteristics and boundary conditions can be assigned to it just as they can for any
other object in the geometric model once you import the model into the Maxwell 2D software package. For example, if desired, you can assign the material attributes of water to
the background.
Note:
The name background is reserved for use by the Material Manager. It cannot be assigned to any other object in the geometric model other than the
background region.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
165
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models
Keep it Simple
Level of Detail
Background Object
Sizing the Drawing
Region
Objects within Objects
Consider Boundaries
Partial Overlapping Not
Allowed
The 2D Modeler
Sizing the Drawing Region
The drawing region is the area in which you can create the 2D model. To specify the size
of the drawing region, use the Model/Drawing Size command. By default, the drawing
region for all project regions is 100 units by 70 units high.
To conserve computing resources, it is generally a good idea to explicitly define the size of
the region in which you are interested. If you know that the field solution in which you are
interested is approximately contained within a region that is different than the default, use
this command to shrink or expand the drawing region.
Objects within Objects
In cases where one object is entirely contained inside another object, the material
assigned to the outer object stops at the boundary of the inner object. The inner object
represents a “void” or “hole” in an object that’s filled with another material.
Consider Boundaries
Although you do not set boundary conditions while creating the geometric model, you
must plan for the boundaries when defining the size of the drawing region. For example, in
cases where you are modeling the device or structure as being far away from any outside
influence, be sure to size the drawing region so that its outer boundaries are far enough
away from objects. Far enough, of course, is relative. In general, a boundary is far enough
away if the energy density stored in the field near the boundary is negligible.
In all cases, consciously deciding on the size of the drawing region can conserve computing resources.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
166
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
2D Modeler
2D Modeler Commands
2D Modeler Tool Bar
Screen Layout
Status Bar
Differences Between 2D
Modelers
General Procedure
Things to Consider
Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models
Keep it Simple
Level of Detail
Background Object
Sizing the Drawing Region
Objects within Objects
Consider Boundaries
Partial Overlapping Not
Allowed
The 2D Modeler
Partial Overlapping Not Allowed
Objects that partially overlap — that is, that occupy the same region of space without one
object being contained entirely within the other — cannot be used in the final geometric
model! Such overlapping objects are not allowed even if you assign the same material
characteristics to both. In addition, self-intersecting objects cannot be used in the final
model. Examples of both appear below.
The 2D Modeler displays a warning message if you create overlapping or self-intersecting
objects. If you read a file into the 2D Modeler in one of the Maxwell 2D software projects,
the system checks for self-intersecting and overlapping objects when you exit. For example, if you have overlapping objects in your model when you leave the 2D Modeler, the following message appears:
Main project still has overlapping objects.
Go Back
Contents
At this point, you should either redraw the parts of the model that overlap or use the Boolean menu to subtract, intersect, or union the objects. If you don’t, after you leave the 2D
Modeler, the remaining commands on the main menu are disabled, and you cannot continue to set up the model. You must return to the 2D Modeler and delete these objects or
identify them as non-model objects before you can continue.
Self-intersecting and overlapping objects are not permitted in the final model. The Maxwell 2D software packages cannot generate an accurate electromagnetic field solution for
a geometric model that contains such objects — it has no way of knowing which material
characteristics apply to the overlapping region.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
167
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
Go Back
The File Menu
File Menu
Use the File commands to perform the following tasks:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create new geometric models.
Open existing model files.
Close models.
Save models in disk files.
Delete changes made since the last time a model was saved.
Exit from the current software module.
When you choose File from the 2D Modeler menu bar, the following menu appears:
Note:
Not all of these commands are available in all Maxwell software modules.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
168
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File Commands
The function of each File command is as follows.
New
Open
Import
Close
Save
Save As
Revert
Print
Print Setup
Exit
Opens a project window in which a new geometric model may be created.
Reads in an existing geometric model. The opened model is displayed in a new project window so that more than one model may be
opened at a time.
Reads in geometric files. Also allows you to edit these files and save
the changes.
Closes a model.
Writes out a model to a set of disk files.
Writes out a model under a different name or in a different file format.
Reverts to a previously saved version of a model, deleting all changes
made since the last time the model was saved.
Prints the selected window or portion of a window to a hardcopy or
postscript file.
Defines the printer settings.
Exits the current module.
Not all of these commands are available on the File menu of each software module.
Your model is not automatically saved. Therefore, be sure to frequently save your work
while creating or editing a project. This can prevent you from losing all of your changes if
a problem occurs that causes your workstation or PC to crash. If you made changes since
the last time the model was saved, you will be prompted to save when you close the
project or exit the software.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
169
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File Extensions
Different modules of Maxwell software save their files with different file extensions so that
you and the software can tell which module created which file. A file extension is a three
character code that goes after the file name and is separated from it by a period. For
instance, the file named gear.sm2 is a 2D Modeler file. Some commonly used file extensions and their associated software modules are listed below.
.sm2
.obs
.att
.sld
.sm3
The 2D Modeler from the Utilities Panel
The Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor
The Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
Maxwell 2D, version 6.1 or later
Maxwell Strata.
A 2D modeler file created in PlotData
Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, version 4.33 or earlier
Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, version 4.33 or earlier
Maxwell 3D Field Simulator, version 4.1 or earlier
Maxwell 3D, version 4.1 or later
Ansoft HFSS, version 6.0 or later
Maxwell Q3D Extractor
Maxwell Ensemble
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
170
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
Go Back
Contents
The File Menu
File/New
Use the File/New command to create a new, unnamed geometric model. The model that
is drawn in this window can be saved as a new project and is independent of any other
model that may be loaded in the software.
> To create a new project:
• Choose File/New.
A new project window appears.
By default, the title of the new model, shown in the title bar, appears as Unnamedn,
where n is the number of new models that have not yet been assigned a name. For example, the default name of the first new window opened would be Unnamed1.
Note:
Specify a name for the new project using the File/Save or File/Save As
commands.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
171
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Open
Use the File/Open command to read in a previously saved geometric model. Objects can
be copied from other models into the current project, but other models cannot be edited or
saved as part of the current project.
Compressed files are automatically uncompressed when they are opened.
> To read in a previously created geometric model file:
1. Choose File/Open.
2. Use the file browser that appears to select the file you wish to open. By default,
files with the correct file extensions for the software you are using appear in the
pop-up window.
3. Click the left mouse button on the desired file:
• On the workstation, these files appear in the Files list box.
• On the PC, these files appear next to the Directories box.
The selected file automatically appears in the Select model file field.
4. If you are using the 2D Modeler from the Utilities Panel, do one of the following:
• Do not select read only if you plan to edit the geometric model being read in.
• Select read only if you only want to view the model being read in.
5. Choose OK to complete the command.
The geometric model then appears in the software.
Read Only Mode
In the 2D Modeler from the Utilities Panel, you can select read only to open a file in “readonly” mode. The words [read-only] appear next to the model file name in the title bar of
the project window after the model is opened in this mode.
Go Back
In read-only mode, the system prevents you from saving any changes to the original file.
However, you can use the File/Save As command to save the changes to a new file. Any
2D Modeler command except File/Save may be accessed.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
172
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files
version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
Opening Maxwell 2D Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
In the 2D Modeler, the File/Open command is able to open geometry files created using
version 4.33 (or earlier) of the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator. This allows you to directly
import these geometric models into the 2D Modeler, bypassing the Translators command on the Maxwell Control Panel.
To open a file created with version 4.33 (or earlier) of the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, simply add an .obs or .att extension to the file name. The selected file is automatically translated into the .sm2 file format used by the 2D Modeler. The original file will not be
modified unless you choose to save the changes in .obs or .att format.
Only 2D geometric models may be read into the 2D Modeler (whether in the Utilities panel
or another Maxwell software package). No mesh, material, boundary, or solution information can be translated or read from the 2D files.
More information is available on how translating a Maxwell 2D Field Simulator model
(.obs extension) to a 2D model with extension (.sm2) affects its geometry.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
173
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Import
Use the File/Import command to directly read a previously saved geometric model into
the current project window. The imported model replaces the existing model in the project
window, and can be edited and saved like any other geometric model.
Like the File/Open command, this command can sometimes be used to bypass the
Translators command in the Maxwell Control Panel.
Compressed files are automatically uncompressed when they are opened.
> To import a geometry file:
1. Choose File/Import.
2. Use the file browser that appears to find the file you wish to open.
3. Click the left mouse button on the desired file:
• On the workstation, these files appear in the Files list box.
• On the PC, these files appear next to the Directories box.
The selected file automatically appears in the Select model file field.
4. Choose OK.
The pop-up window disappears and the file is imported.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
174
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Close
Use the File/Close command to close an open geometric model and its associated
project window.
> To close a model file:
1. Select the desired project window as the active window.
2. Choose File/Close.
If the project has changed since the last time it was saved, you will be prompted whether
or not to save it to a disk file. Afterwards, the project window in which the model is displayed disappears.
Note:
For Maxwell 2D software packages, this command only applies to project
windows other than the main one. To close the main project, use the File/
Exit command.
File/Save
Use the File/Save command to save a geometric model to a file.
> To save a model:
1. Select the desired project window as the active window.
2. Choose File/Save. One of the following things happens:
• If the file has been saved before or you have specified a name for the project, the
system saves the model to a disk file.
• If this is the first time the project is being saved and you have not yet specified a
name for it, the menu shown under the description of the File/Save As command
appears. Follow the directions for this command to save the unnamed model for
the first time.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
175
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Save As
Use the File/Save As command to do the following:
•
•
Save a geometric model under a different name.
Save a geometric model in a file format different from the default. When you save the
files in different file formats, you can bypass the Translators command on the
Maxwell Control Panel.
> To save a geometry file using the File/Save As command:
1. Select the desired project window as the active window.
2. Choose File/Save As.
3. Use the file browser to select the directory where you wish to save the file.
4. Enter the name of the file, using the correct file extension for the file type you wish
to save the model as.
5. If the window has a Switch to saved field, do one of the following:
• Leave the field selected to display the new file name, and close the current file. In
effect, this command copies and closes the project, then opens the copy of your
project.
• Deselect Switch to saved to save the model under the new name without
changing which file is displayed. In effect, the model is copied under the new
project name, but the copied project is not opened.
6. Choose OK or press Return.
The software saves the model using the name and file format you selected.
Note:
Be sure to save your models periodically; they are not saved automatically.
Saving frequently can help to prevent you from losing your work if a problem
occurs that causes your workstation to crash.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
176
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Revert
Use the File/Revert command to delete all changes made to the geometric model since
you last used the File/Save or File/Save As commands. This has the same effect as closing the model without saving the changes and then re-opening it. The project reverts back
to the way it was when it was last saved to a disk file.
> To revert to a previously saved version of the model:
1. Choose File/Revert. The following message appears:
Revert to last saved version of “projectname”?
where projectname represents the name of the selected project.
2. To revert to the previous version of the model, select Yes.
All changes made to the model since the last time it was saved are deleted.
You cannot use the File/Revert command until you have saved the project at least once
and have made changes since the last time you saved it.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
177
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Print
Use the File/Print commands to do the following:
Rectangle
Active View
Project
Prints the selected area in a window.
Prints the selected subwindow.
Prints all the subwindows in a project.
File/Print/Rectangle
> To print a rectangular area of a window:
1. Choose File/Print/Rectangle. The cursor symbol changes to “+”.
2. Click on a corner of the region in the window to print.
3. Use the mouse to select the region in which to print. As you move the mouse, a
box appears outlining the selected area.
4. Click on a corner that is diagonally opposite the one you just selected. The Print window appears.
5. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings.
6. Choose OK to print the active view window or Cancel to exit the window without printing.
All objects that lie completely inside the selected region are printed.
File/Print/Active View
Choose this command to print only the active view window.
Go Back
> To print the model in the active view window:
1. Choose File/Print/Active View. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
2. Select the window you wish to print. The Print window appears.
3. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings.
4. Choose OK to print the active view window or Cancel to exit the window without printing.
The specified subwindow is printed.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
178
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Print/Project
Choose this command to print all windows in the active project.
> To print the entire window:
1. Choose File/Print/Project. A window similar to the following one appears, listing the
available print settings for the print job. The available printer settings are denoted by a
selected checkbox:
2. Optionally, choose Print Setup to define printer the settings. This command allows
you to define which type of output to which to send the print job.
3. Choose OK to print the project or Cancel to dismiss the window without printing.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
179
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
The File Menu
Print Setup Within the Windows
When you choose Print Setup from within one of the printing windows, the following window appears, listing the current active printer, job status, type of image to print and any
additional information pertinent to the print job:
> To define the print settings from within a printing window:
1. Select the Name of the printer to send the output to.
2. Optionally, choose Properties and do the following:
• From the Page Setup tab, select default settings for the Paper Size, Paper
Source, Copy Count, Orientation, and Color Appearance of the print job.
• From the Advanced tab, select the type of field to alter from the list and select a
new default setting.
Choose OK to accept the settings and return to the Print Setup window.
3. Select the Paper Size from the pull-down menu.
4. Select the Paper Source from the pull-down menu.
5. Select the Orientation as with Portrait or Landscape.
6. Optionally, choose Network and select the name of the printer to send to from the
list. Choose OK to accept the settings and return to the Print Setup window.
7. Choose OK to accept the settings and begin printing, or Cancel to cancel the print
job.
180
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
The File Menu
File/Print Setup
Choose this command to define the printer settings, such as the printer you wish to send
the output to and the form and orientation of the output. If you are running the software
using Microsoft Windows, use the following steps. If you are using a workstation, this
command is identical to the Print Manager function in the Utilities Panel.
> To define the printer settings on a PC:
1. Choose File/Print Setup. The Print Setup window appears:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select the Printer that you will send the output to.
Select the Form of the output document.
Select the Orientation of the output document.
Optionally, choose Network and select a new printer for the print jobs.
If the output is two-sided, select the type of output form you prefer.
Specify any Maxwell options.
Choose OK to accept the settings or Cancel to ignore the new settings.
181
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
File Menu
File Commands
File Extensions
File/New
File/Open
Read Only Mode
Opening Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)
File/Import
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Revert
File/Print
File/Print Setup
File/Exit
The File Menu
File/Exit
Use the File/Exit command to exit the 2D Modeler.
> To exit the 2D Modeler:
1. Choose File/Exit. The following message appears for each open project with
unsaved changes:
Save changes to “projectname” before closing?
where projectname represents the name of the selected project.
2. Do one of the following:
• Choose Cancel to stay in the module and not save the changes.
• Choose Yes to save the changes for the project before exiting.
• Choose No to exit without saving the changes.
If several projects are open, you are cycled through all of them before you exit the module.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
182
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit Menu
Use the Edit commands to do the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cut, copy, and paste objects and text.
Select objects and text to be edited.
Unselect items.
Delete and undelete items.
Duplicate objects and text along a line or an arc, or mirror them about a line.
Change the attributes of objects and text.
Specify which objects are to be included in the final geometric model.
Display or hide objects.
When you choose Edit from the 2D Modeler menu bar, the following menu appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
183
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Undo Clear Reverses the effect of the last Clear command, restoring all deleted items
to the active project.
Cut
Deletes the selected items, placing them in the paste buffer.
Copy
Copies the selected items to the paste buffer.
Paste
Copies the contents of the paste buffer to the active project.
Clear
Deletes the selected items but does not place them in the paste buffer.
Duplicate
Duplicates the selected items:
Along Line
Along a straight line.
Along Arc
Along an arc of a circle.
Mirror Duplicate By mirroring them about a line.
Select
Select items to be edited.
Deselect All Deselects all currently selected objects.
Current Project
Deselects objects in the current project.
All Projects
Deselects all the objects in every project.
Attributes
Allows you to change attributes of an item:
By Clicking
Changes various object and text attributes.
Recolor
Changes the color of the selected items.
Rename
Changes the names of selected geometric objects.
Visibility
Allows you to display or hide 2D objects.
Hide Selection
Hides the selected 2D object(s).
By Item
Hides or makes visible selected 2D objects.
Show All
Displays all invisible objects.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
184
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Undo Clear
Choose the Edit/Undo Clear command to reverse the effect of the Edit/Clear command.
All items in the active project window that were deleted using the most recent Edit/Clear
command are restored and displayed in their original locations. All restored items remain
selected until you deselect them.
The Edit/Undo Clear command only restores the items deleted by the latest Edit/Clear
command; it cannot restore items deleted in previous Edit/Clear commands. It also cannot restore items after other items have been cut, copied or pasted, or new objects have
been drawn.
Edit/Cut
Use the Edit/Cut command to remove objects and text from the active project window
and place them in the paste buffer.
> To cut items from the active project window:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Cut. The items are deleted from the screen and put into the paste
buffer.
Items that have been cut may be pasted back into the active window using the Edit/Paste
command. The items currently stored in the paste buffer are replaced by the next items
that are cut or copied into the buffer.
Edit/Copy
Use the Edit/Copy command to copy the selected objects and text into the paste buffer.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
> To copy items into the paste buffer:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Copy. The items are copied into the paste buffer.
Items that have been copied may be pasted into the active window using the Edit/Paste
command. The items currently stored in the paste buffer will be replaced by the next items
that are cut or copied.
185
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Paste
Use the Edit/Paste command to copy the contents of the paste buffer to the active window. The objects and text in the paste buffer may be pasted back into the same window,
or into a different subwindow or project window. An item in the paste buffer can be pasted
any number of times via the Edit/Paste command.
The Edit/Paste command only pastes the items that were placed in the paste buffer by
the latest Edit/Cut or Edit/Copy command. Each time the command Edit/Cut or Edit/
Copy is chosen, the buffer is overwritten with new items.
> To paste an item or group of items:
1. Use one of the following commands to place the desired items in the paste buffer:
• Edit/Cut
• Edit/Copy
2. Select the project window into which the items are to be pasted as the active
window.
3. Choose Edit/Paste. A rectangle outlining the location of the items from the paste
buffer appears on the screen to show you their location.
4. Move the rectangle to the place where the items will be located and click the left
mouse button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point where the pasted
items will be centered.
The pasted items are then displayed in the desired location. All pasted items remain
selected so that you can clear them if you want to undo the effect of the Edit/Paste command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
186
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Clear
Use Edit/Clear to delete all selected items. The deleted items are not stored in the paste
buffer.
> To clear items:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Clear. The selected items are deleted from the screen.
The command Edit/Undo Clear restores the latest set of items deleted using the command Edit/Clear. However, items cleared previously are lost.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
187
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Duplicate/Along
Line
Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc
Edit/Duplicate/Mirror
Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
The Edit Menu
Edit/Duplicate
Use the Edit/Duplicate commands to make copies of objects in the active window. These
commands combine the functions of the Edit/Copy and Edit/Paste commands, copying
the selected items and pasting them the number of times you specify. They are:
Along Line
Along Arc
Mirror Duplicate
Duplicates the selected item along a straight line.
Duplicates the selected item along an arc of a circle.
Duplicates the selected item and mirrors it about a line.
Before duplicating an item, you must first select it by clicking on it or by using one of the
commands on the Edit/Select menu. The Edit/Duplicate commands can only be used to
copy items within a project. To copy items to another project, use the Edit/Cut and Edit/
Paste commands.
Edit/Duplicate/Along Line
Use this command to copy the selected objects and text along a straight line. The line
along which the items are duplicated can be vertical, horizontal, or lie at an angle.
> To duplicate items along a line:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Line.
3. Click the left mouse button on an anchor point for the items to be duplicated. This
point is used to align the duplicated objects along the line. Any point in the drawing
space can be selected; however, selecting an anchor point on an item’s edge or
within the item makes it easier to select the duplication line.
4. Move the mouse to move the anchor point to a new location. As you do, the
object’s outline moves with the mouse.
5. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. Alternatively, use the keyboard to
enter the point’s coordinates.
6. Enter the number of copies to be made in the Total Number field. The number of
copies that you specify includes the original copied object.
7. Choose OK or press Return.
The system then copies the items, spacing them along the line according to the point you
selected.
188
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Duplicate/Along Line
Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc
Edit/Duplicate/Mirror
Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc
Use Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc to copy the selected objects and text along a circular arc.
> To duplicate items along an arc:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc.
3. To select the center of the arc on which the duplicates are to be located, move the
cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button. Alternatively, use the
keyboard to enter the point’s coordinates. A pop-up window with the following
fields then appears:
Angle
Total Number
4. Enter the angle between each duplicate in the Angle field.
• A positive angle causes the items to be copied in the counter-clockwise direction.
• A negative angle causes the item to be copied in the clockwise direction.
5. Enter the number of copies to be made in the Total Number field. The number of
copies that you specify includes the original copied object.
6. Choose OK or press Return.
The system copies the selected items, spacing each duplicate along the arc at the angle
you specified. For example, to the right, a rectangle was copied five times, each copy at
an angle of 30 degrees. Note that the copies of the original object are selected.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
189
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Duplicate/Along Line
Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc
Edit/Duplicate/Mirror
Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate
Use the Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate command to mirror and copy the selected
objects and text about a line. This command is similar to the Arrange/Mirror command,
except that it copies the selected items instead of moving them.
> To mirror and duplicate items about a line:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate.
3. Move the mouse to the first point in the line and click the left mouse button.
Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point’s coordinates.
4. Move the mouse to the second point in the line and click the left mouse button.
(Again, as an alternative, enter the point from the keyboard.)
A mirror-image copy of the selected items then appears on the screen.
Characters in a duplicated line of text are not mirrored. Instead, the text is simply copied
about the line you entered.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
190
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Select/By Area
Edit/Select/By Name
Edit/Select/All Items
Edit/Select/Open Objects
Edit/Select/Closed
Objects
Edit/Select/Model Objects
Edit/Select/NonModel
Objects
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Select
Use the Edit/Select commands to select items to be edited. You can also select (and
deselect) items by clicking the left mouse button on them.
The commands on the Edit/Select menu are listed below.
By Area
By Name
From List
All Items
Open Objects
Closed Objects
Model Objects
NonModel
Objects
Selects all items in a rectangular area.
Selects the geometric objects that you name.
Selects the objects from a list.
Selects all items in the model.
Selects all open objects.
Selects all closed objects.
Selects all objects that are identified as “model objects”, objects
that are to be included in the final geometric model.
Selects all objects that are not identified as “model objects”,
objects that will not be included in the final geometric model.
You must select an item or group of items with one of the Edit/Select commands before
entering the commands in the tables below. Selecting identifies the objects and text on
which those commands act. The following commands require a selection:
Edit Menu
Reshape Menu
Cut
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Scale Selection
Arrange Menu
Move
Copy
Rotate
Clear
Mirror
Deselect All
Duplicate
Attributes
Visibility/Hide Selection
191
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Select/By Area
Edit/Select/By Name
Edit/Select/All Items
Edit/Select/Open Objects
Edit/Select/Closed
Objects
Edit/Select/Model Objects
Edit/Select/NonModel
Objects
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Select/By Area
Choose Edit/Select/By Area to select all objects and text in a rectangular area. The
items must lie entirely within the rectangle to be selected.
> To select all items in a rectangular area:
1. Choose Edit/Select/By Area.
2. Move the mouse to a corner of the desired rectangle and click the left mouse
button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point’s coordinates.
3. Move the mouse to the corner that is diagonally opposite the one you just picked.
As you move the mouse, the system draws a box outlining the selected area.
4. Click the left mouse button to select the other diagonal corner of the area. (Again,
as an alternative, enter the point from the keyboard.)
All items that lie completely inside the rectangle are highlighted, indicating that they’ve
been selected.
Edit/Select/By Name
Use the Edit/Select/By Name command to select a geometric object by name.
> To select objects by name:
1. Choose Edit/Select/By Name. A pop-up window appears with the following field:
Enter item name/regular expression
2. Enter the name of the object to be selected in the field, using wild cards when
appropriate. For example, entering “line*” selects objects line_1, line_2, line_3,
and so on.
3. Choose OK. The objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected.
To abort this command, choose Cancel.
Edit/Select/From List
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Choose Edit/Select/From List to select the objects from a list of object.
> To select from a list:
1. Choose Edit/Select/From List. The Select Object window appears.
2. Select the names of the objects from the list.
3. Choose OK. The objects are selected in the modeling window.
192
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Select/By Area
Edit/Select/By Name
Edit/Select/All Items
Edit/Select/Open
Objects
Edit/Select/Closed
Objects
Edit/Select/Model
Objects
Edit/Select/NonModel
Objects
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Select/All Items
Use the Edit/Select/All Items command to select all objects and text in the model.
> To select all items in the geometric model:
• Choose Edit/Select/All Items. All items in the active project window are highlighted,
indicating that they have been selected.
Edit/Select/Open Objects
Use the Edit/Select/Open Objects command to select all open geometric objects to edit.
Open geometric objects, or line objects, are those whose edges do not meet to form a
closed shape.
> To select all open objects:
• Choose Edit/Select/Open Objects. All open objects are highlighted, indicating that
they have been selected.
Edit/Select/Closed Objects
Use the Edit/Select/Closed Objects command to select all closed geometric objects to
edit. Closed objects are those whose edges meet to form closed shapes.
> To select all closed objects:
• Choose Edit/Select/Closed Objects. All closed objects are highlighted, indicating
that they have been selected.
Edit/Select/Model Objects
Use the Edit/Select/Model Objects command to select all model objects. Model objects
are identified using the command Edit/Attributes/By Clicking as part of the final geometric model that is used in generating a solution.
Go Back
Contents
> To select all model objects:
• Choose Edit/Select/Model Objects. All model objects are highlighted, indicating that
they’ve been selected.
For more information on identifying objects as model objects, see the description of the
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command that appears later in this chapter.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
193
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Select/By Area
Edit/Select/By Name
Edit/Select/All Items
Edit/Select/Open Objects
Edit/Select/Closed
Objects
Edit/Select/Model Objects
Edit/Select/NonModel
Objects
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Select/NonModel Objects
Use the Edit/Select/NonModel Objects command to select all non-model objects. Nonmodel objects are those that are not identified using the command Edit/Attributes/By
Clicking as part of the final geometric model that is used in generating a solution.
> To select all non-model objects:
• Choose Edit/Select/NonModel Objects. All non-model objects are highlighted,
indicating that they have been selected.
For more information on identifying non-model objects, see the description of the Edit/
Attributes/By Clicking command that appears later in this chapter.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
194
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Deselect All/Current Project
Edit/Deselect All/All
Projects
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Deselect All
Use the Edit/Deselect All command to unselect any items that are currently selected.
You may deselect the objects in the following ways:
Current
Project
All Projects
Deselects all the objects in the current project.
Deselects all the objects in all the open projects.
Edit/Deselect All/Current Project
Choose this command to deselect all the objects in the current project.
> To deselect all selected items:
• Choose Edit/Deselect All/Current Projects.
All items that were selected are deselected and no longer highlighted.
To deselect individual items, click the left mouse button on them.
Edit/Deselect All/All Projects
Choose this command to deselect all selected objects in every open project.
> To deselect all selected items:
• Choose Edit/Deselect All/All Projects.
All items that were selected are deselected and no longer highlighted.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
195
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
Go Back
Contents
The Edit Menu
Edit/Attributes
Use the commands on the Edit/Attributes menu to do the following:
By Clicking
Recolor
Rename
Change various object and text attributes, including names, crosshatching, color, text alignment, and so forth.
Change the color of the selected items.
Change the names of selected geometric objects.
These attributes are set on an item-by-item basis.
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Use Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to modify object and text attributes one item at a time.
The following attributes may be changed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The name of a geometric object.
Whether cross-hatches display on an object.
Whether an object is used in the model from which a solution is generated.
The color of a geometric object or text block.
The text that’s displayed in a text block.
Text alignment about the insertion point.
The angle at which text characters are slanted.
> To change the attributes of an object or block of text in the active window:
1. Choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking. The cursor changes to an upward-pointing
arrow.
2. Click the left mouse button on the desired item.
• If you selected an object, a screen of Object Attributes appears.
• If you selected text, a screen of Text Attributes appears.
3. Change the desired object or text attributes.
4. Choose OK or press Return. The item’s attributes are changed. To leave an item’s
attributes unchanged, choose Cancel.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to change the attributes of other items.
6. To exit the Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command, click the right mouse button.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
196
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Object Attributes
When you select an object using the Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command, the following
window appears:
The following object attributes may be modified.
Color
Controls the object’s color.
> To change the color:
1. Click on the box next to the Color field. A palette of colors appears.
2. Select the desired color.
Go Back
For more information on defining which colors can be used in objects and text, see the
document describing The Color Manager.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
197
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
> To change the name:
1. Click the left mouse button on the field Name.
2. Enter the new name for the object.
Object names can be up to 15 characters long. They may only include alphanumeric characters (a-z, A-Z, and 0-9) and underscores (_). You cannot assign the same name to
more than one object. In addition, the name background is reserved for use by the system and cannot be assigned to an object.
Show Hatches
Determines whether hatches display on the object, as shown in the geometric objects
illustrated below. Hatches mark the following points on an object:
•
•
•
Vertex points. These points, which appear as square hatches, mark corner points on
closed line objects or end points on open objects.
Spline control points. These points, which appear as circular hatches, act as “handles”
that allow you to change the shape of the spline curve.
Segments in curved shapes. These points appear as small, straight hatches.
By default, hatches are turned off.
Go Back
Contents
Displaying hatches is useful when you are moving an object’s vertices or control points,
inserting vertices, deleting edges, and so forth. It makes the vertex, control, and segment
points on the object visible, allowing you to easily manipulate the object’s geometry.
> To toggle hatching on and off:
• Select Show Hatches.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
198
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Model Object
Determines whether the object is used in the final geometric model — that is, whether
material properties and boundary conditions are defined and a finite element mesh generated for the object. By default, all objects are model objects.
No materials or boundary conditions can be specified for “non-model” objects. These
objects are saved with the rest of the geometry and remain a part of the geometric model,
however, they are not used in generating a solution.
> To toggle between “model” and “non-model” status for an object:
• Select Model object.
Show Orientation
Determines whether or not the orientation of the object is displayed. Arrows in the view
windows mark the directions of the axes.
> To toggle the display of the orientation of an object:
• Select Show Orientation.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
199
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Text Attributes
When you select text using the Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command, the following popup window appears.
The following text attributes may be modified.
Text
Specifies the actual text that appears on the screen.
> To change the text:
1. Click the left mouse button on the field Text.
2. Enter the new text. A line of text can be up to 50 characters long.
Color
Controls the color of the text.
> To change the text color:
1. Click the left mouse button on the square next to the field Color. A palette of colors
appears.
2. Select the desired color.
For more information on defining which colors can be used in objects and text, see the
document describing The Color Manager.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
200
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Alignment
Allows you to change the way in which text is aligned about the insertion point.
> To change the text alignment:
1. Click the left mouse button on the button next to Alignment. The following options
appear:
left
Text is lined up to the right of the insertion point.
center
Text is centered on the insertion point. This is the default setting.
right
Text is lined up to the left of the insertion point.
2. Choose the desired alignment.
Slant
Specifies the angle at which the characters in a line of text are slanted. Slanting the text
produces the same effect as italics. To change the text slant:
1. Click the left mouse button on the Slant field.
2. Enter the desired slant angle. The angle must be between 45° and -45°. The
default slant is zero.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
201
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Use the Edit/Attributes/Recolor command to change the color of the selected objects
and text. You may select any color that’s defined as part of the user color palette in the
Color Manager.
> To change the color of the selected items:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Attributes/Recolor. A pop-up window appears, displaying the
current default drawing color in a square next to the field Color.
3. Click the left mouse button on the colored square. A palette of colors appears.
4. Click the left mouse button on the desired color.
5. Choose OK.
The object and text colors are changed to match the one you selected. For more information on defining which colors can be used in objects and text, see the document describing The Color Manager.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
202
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
Object Attributes
Text Attributes
Edit/Attributes/Recolor
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Attributes/Rename
Use the Edit/Attributes/Rename command to change the names of the selected geometric objects.
> To rename the selected objects:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Edit/Attributes/Rename. The following window appears. The names of
all selected objects are listed in the window.
3. Select the desired object name. It automatically appears in the field below.
4. Enter the new name for the object. Object names may be up to 15 characters long.
Note:
Go Back
Object names may only include alphanumeric characters (a-z, A-Z, and 0-9)
and underscores (_). You cannot assign the same name to more than one
object. In addition, the name background is reserved for use by the system
and cannot be assigned to an object.
5. Choose Rename. The object is renamed and the new name appears in the list box
in the window.
6. To change the names of the other selected objects, repeat steps 3 through 5.
7. After you are finished, choose OK.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
203
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Visibility/Hide
Selection
Edit/Visibility/By Item
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Visibility
Use the Edit/Visibility commands to hide or display items:
Hide Selection Hide selected objects and text.
By Item
Specify, object by object, whether to display objects.
Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection
Use the Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection command to hide selected object and text. Hidden
objects that are defined as model objects are included in the final geometric model, but
are not visible.
> To hide an object:
1. Select the objects and text to be hidden, either by clicking on them or by using one
of the Edit/Select commands.
2. Choose Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection.
The selected objects and text are hidden. To redisplay them, use either the Edit/Visibility/By Item or Edit/Show All command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
204
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection
Edit/Visibility/By Item
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Visibility/By Item
Choose Edit/Visibility/By Item to either hide or display items.
> To hide or display items:
1. Choose Edit/Visibility/By Item. The menu shown below appears.
All object names and text appear in the box, and are set to either Yes or No.
2. Select the name of the object whose visibility you wish to change:
• To hide an object, set it to No.
• To display an object, set it to Yes.
3. Choose OK when you are finished changing the settings.
Objects are then hidden or displayed accordingly. To redisplay all objects, use the Edit/
Show All command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
205
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Clear
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear
Edit/Duplicate
Edit/Select
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Attributes
Edit/Visibility
Edit/Show All
The Edit Menu
Edit/Show All
Choose Edit/Show All to display all object and text that have been made invisible with
one of the Edit/Visibility commands.
> To display all invisible items:
• Choose Edit/Show All.
All of the items created for the current project appear in the window.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
206
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
Reshape Menu
Use the Reshape commands to change the shape of geometric objects by:
•
•
•
•
Changing their scale.
Moving, aligning, or inserting object vertex points.
Deleting an edge of an object.
Changing the number of arc segments in a curved edge.
When you choose Reshape from the menu bar, the following menu appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
208
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
The function of each Reshape command is as follows:
Scale Selection
Vertex
Edge
Note:
Changes the scale of a geometric object or text.
Allows you to move, align, and insert object vertices or the control points of splines. Performs the following operations on
object vertices or the control points of splines:
Move
Moves a vertex point or spline control point.
Align
Aligns two vertices (or control points) according
to their local or global coordinates.
Insert
Inserts a vertex point on an edge of an object.
Changes the number of segments or edges in a selected
object. Performs the following functions on object edges:
Number of
Changes the number of arc segments in a
Segments
curved edge.
Delete
Removes an edge of an object.
Before using the Reshape commands to modify objects, use the Edit/
Attributes/By Clicking command display vertices and control points of the
desired objects . Use this command to display hatches — which are not displayed by default — over vertices and control points, which make moving,
adding, or deleting vertices and control points easier.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
209
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
Reshape/Scale Selection
Use Reshape/Scale Selection to change the scale of an object’s dimensions or the size
of the characters in a block of text. The figure below shows an object before and after
scaling. Notice that the object is positioned differently depending on which anchor point
you selected when scaling it.
Anchor Pt.
Scale x 0.5
Anchor Pt.
Original
Scale x 2
> To rescale the dimensions of an object or a line of text:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Reshape/Scale Selection.
3. Move the mouse to the desired point and click the left mouse button. (Alternatively,
use the procedure described in Selecting Points With the Keyboard.) A pop-up
window appears, showing the Scale Factor field.
4. Enter the desired scale factor.
5. Choose OK or press Return.
Go Back
Selected items are then rescaled about the anchor point. For example, if you specify 2 as
a scale factor for a geometric object, object vertices are moved so that the distance
between them and the anchor point is doubled, making the object twice as large. On the
other hand, if you specify 0.5 as the scale factor, object vertices are moved so that the distance between them and the anchor point is halved, making the object half as large.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
210
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
Reshape/Vertex
The commands on the Reshape/Vertex menu are:
Move
Align
Insert
Moves a vertex point or spline control point.
Aligns two vertices or control points according to their coordinates.
Inserts a vertex point on the edge of an object.
Vertex points mark the corners or end points of objects. Spline control points act as “handles” for reshaping the spline. They are the points that you entered when drawing the
spline.
To display hatches on object vertex or control points, use the Edit/Attributes/By Clicking
command.
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Use the command Reshape/Vertex/Move to move a vertex or control point, changing the
shape of an object.
> To move a vertex or control point:
1. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Move
2. Select the desired vertex or control point.
3. Select the new vertex point. (You may use the procedure described in Selecting
Points With the Keyboard.) The object is redrawn with the vertex in the new
location.
4. To move additional vertices, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To exit the Reshape/Vertex/Move command, click the right mouse button.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
211
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Reshape Menu
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number of
Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Use the Reshape/Vertex/Align command to align two vertices or control points so that
one or both coordinates of the first point are changed to match those of the second point.
A vertex or control point may be aligned with another point in the same object, or with a
point in a different object.
For example, to make the object on the right look like the object on the left, align the vcoordinate of Point B with the v-coordinate of Point A.
Point B
Point A
Note that the local uv coordinate system is conveniently rotated in the figure. You would
not obtain the same results if you attempted to align the global y-coordinate of Point B
with the global y-coordinate of Point A.
More
> To align two vertices or control points:
1. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Align.
2. Select the vertex to which the first point is to be aligned. This vertex can be on the
same object or on another object. The following window appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
3. To select how the vertices are to be aligned:
212
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
•
•
•
•
Choose U to force the first vertex to have the same u-coordinate as the second.
Choose V to force the first vertex to have the same v-coordinate as the second.
Choose both U and V to force the vertices to have the same u- and v-coordinates.
To align the vertex points according to their local R and θ coordinates substitute R
and Theta for U and V in the above instructions. If specifying R and Theta
coordinates, first use the Window/Grid command to display a polar grid.
• To align the vertex points according to their global abscissa and ordinate substitute
Abscissa and Ordinate for U and V in the above instructions.
4. Choose OK or press Return. The object is redrawn with the vertex in the new
location.
5. To align additional vertices on the same object or on other objects, repeat steps 2
through 4.
6. To exit the Reshape/Vertex/Align command, click the right mouse button.
Note:
Aligning two vertices so that formerly open objects are now closed causes
new objects to be created. The names and colors of such objects are automatically assigned; pop-up windows for naming the new objects do not
appear. To change the names and colors of these objects, use the Edit/
Attributes commands.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
213
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Use Reshape/Vertex/Insert to insert a vertex point on the edge of a geometric object.
Vertex points can be inserted on any type of object, whether curved or angular.
> To insert a vertex point on an edge of an object:
1. Use Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to display hatches on the vertices of the desired
object. If you do not display hatches, you may be inserting vertices without knowing
it.
2. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Insert.
3. Do one of the following to insert a vertex point:
• To insert a vertex point at the intersection of overlapping lines, click the left mouse
button on the intersection.
Note:
You cannot insert a vertex point at the intersection of two lines if one or both
are splines.
•
To insert a vertex point on an edge of an object, click the left mouse button on an
edge.
The new vertex is automatically inserted.
4. To insert another vertex, repeat step 3.
5. To exit the Reshape/Vertex/Insert command, click the right mouse button.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
214
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Reshape Menu
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
Reshape/Edge
Use the commands on the Reshape/Edge menu to do the following:
Number of Segments
Delete
Changes the number of arc segments in curved edges of
objects such as circles, splines, and so forth.
Removes an edge of an object.
This figure illustrates the effect of these commands on a set of geometric objects.
Original Objects
Modified Objects
9
Segments
36
Segments
Deleted
Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments
Use the command Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments to do the following:
•
•
Change the number of segments in a curved edge of an object.
Change the angle between segments in circles and arcs.
The 2D Modeler uses a series of line segments to represent curved shapes. When you
create a curved object, it prompts you to enter the number of line segments used to
approximate the curve. For circles and arcs, it also prompts you to enter the angle (in
degrees) between each segment of the curve.
More
Changing the number of segments or the angle between each segment allows you to
adjust the appearance and shape of curved objects as follows:
Go Back
•
Contents
•
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Increasing the number of segments or decreasing the angle between each segment
produces smoother curves, but makes the model more complex.
Decreasing the number of segments or increasing the angle between each segment
produces angular shapes that do not look very much like curves, but can reduce the
complexity of the geometric model.
215
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
> To change the number of arc segments in a curved object:
1. Choose Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments.
2. Select the desired curved object or edge. (Clicking on a geometric object with
straight edges has no effect.) A pop-up window appears, showing the following
fields:
Number of segments
Angular Increment
Shows the current number of arc segments.
For circles and circular arcs, shows the angle (in
degrees) between each arc segment.
3. Enter the new number of segments or the new angle between each segment.
Generally, you should specify a new value for only one of these fields. Changing
the angle between each segment automatically changes the number of segments
in the curve (and vice versa).
4. Choose OK or press Return. The curve is redrawn.
5. To change the number of segments in another curved edge, repeat steps 2
through 4.
6. To exit the Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments command, click the right mouse
button.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
216
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Reshape Menu
Reshape Commands
Reshape/Scale Selection
Reshape/Vertex
Reshape/Vertex/Move
Reshape/Vertex/Align
Reshape/Vertex/Insert
Reshape/Edge
Reshape/Edge/Number
of Segments
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Object Stitching
The Reshape Menu
Reshape/Edge/Delete
Choose Reshape/Edge/Delete to delete an edge of a geometric object.
Note:
Circles, splines, and arcs are only considered to have one edge. If you delete
what appears to be “one segment” of a curved edge, the entire curve, spline,
or arc is deleted.
> To delete an edge:
1. Choose Reshape/Edge/Delete.
2. Click the left mouse button on the desired edge. The edge is deleted.
3. To delete other edges on the same object or other objects, repeat step 2.
4. To exit the Reshape/Edge/Delete command, click the right mouse button.
Object Stitching
Be careful when deleting the edges of adjacent objects. If deleting an edge results in the
free vertices of adjacent objects being joined, the two objects are stitched together as
one.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
217
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Boolean Menu
Boolean Commands
Boolean/Union
Boolean/Subtract
Boolean/Intersect
Boolean/Simplify
The Boolean Menu
Boolean Menu
Use the Boolean commands to:
•
•
•
•
Unite overlapping objects.
Subtract one object from another. Multiple objects may be subtracted.
Intersect overlapping objects. The area shared by the overlapping objects becomes
the new object.
Remove extra vertices on the objects created from a boolean operation.
Boolean Commands
The function of each Boolean command is as follows:
Union
Subtract
Intersect
Simplify
Go Back
Unites two or more overlapping objects.
Subtracts one or more objects from another object or objects.
Creates a new object from the intersecting region of two or more overlapping objects.
Removes any extra vertices on edges of objects created through a
boolean operation.
All Boolean commands apply only to the active project window.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
218
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Boolean Menu
Boolean Commands
Boolean/Union
Boolean/Subtract
Boolean/Intersect
Boolean/Simplify
The Boolean Menu
Boolean/Union
Use Boolean/Union to unite two or more overlapping objects . The following graphic
demonstrates the simplest case of a union. Two overlapping objects are united to form
one object.
> To unite overlapping objects:
1. Select the overlapping objects that you wish to unite by clicking on them or using
the Edit/Select commands. When selecting objects, keep the following in mind:
• The more objects you union, the longer the operation takes.
• Open objects may not be united.
2. Choose Boolean/Union. The selected overlapping objects combine to form one
object. The combined objects are not deleted; they are defined as non-model
objects and hidden from view.
3. In the window that appears, select the color and enter the name of the object.
Note:
Go Back
Contents
If you have multiple objects that were created from the boolean operation,
toggle Select on or off to select or deselect the object. If you are entering
your own names, this allows you to view the object you are naming. Objects
remain selected after you choose OK.
4. Choose OK.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
219
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Boolean Menu
Topics:
Boolean Menu
Boolean Commands
Boolean/Union
Boolean/Subtract
Boolean/Intersect
Boolean/Simplify
Boolean/Subtract
Use Boolean/Subtract to subtract an object (or objects) from another object (or objects).
The following graphic demonstrates the simplest case of a subtraction. An object is subtracted from a base object to form a new object:
Base
Object
Overlapping
Region
Object to
Subtract
> To subtract overlapping objects:
1. Choose Boolean/Subtract. The following window appears.
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
2. Select one of the following selection modes:
By Item
By Area
By Name
220
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Boolean Menu
Boolean Commands
Boolean/Union
Boolean/Subtract
Boolean/Intersect
Boolean/Simplify
The Boolean Menu
Note:
Use the Change View commands — Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Fit All — to
modify the view of the geometry and make selecting objects easier.
3. Choose Select Base Objects to select the base object or objects you wish to
subtract objects from. The Subtract Objects window vanishes allowing you to
select the objects. When selecting objects, note the following:
• The more objects you subtract, the longer the operation takes.
• Open objects may not be subtracted.
When you have finished selecting the base objects, click the right mouse button
anywhere in the project window to return to the Subtract Objects window. A check
mark indicates that base objects have been selected.
4. Choose Select Objects to Subtract to select the objects you wish to subtract from
the base objects. When you finish selecting the objects, click the right mouse
button anywhere in the project window to return to the Subtract Objects window.
A check mark indicates that objects to subtract have been selected.
Note:
If you wish to change the base objects or objects to subtract, use one of the
Clear buttons to unselect the objects. You may then reselect the base
objects or objects to subtract.
5. Choose Perform Subtraction to subtract the selected objects from the base
objects. A new object is created which looks like the base object minus the shared
overlap. The subtracted objects are not deleted; they are defined as non-model
objects and hidden from view.
6. In the window that appears, select the color and enter the name of the object.
Note:
Go Back
If you have multiple objects that were created from the boolean operation,
toggle Select on or off to select or deselect the object. If you are entering
your own names, this allows you to view the object you are naming. Objects
remain selected after you choose OK.
7. Choose OK.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
221
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Boolean Menu
Boolean Commands
Boolean/Union
Boolean/Subtract
Boolean/Intersect
Boolean/Simplify
The Boolean Menu
Boolean/Intersect
Use Boolean/Intersect to create a new object from the intersecting region of two or more
overlapping objects. The following graphic demonstrates the simplest case of an intersect.
Two overlapping objects are intersected to form one object.
Intersecting
Region
> To intersect overlapping objects:
1. Select the overlapping objects that you wish to intersect by clicking on them or
using the Edit/Select commands. When selecting objects, keep the following in
mind:
• The more objects you intersect, the longer the operation takes.
• Open objects may not be intersected.
2. Choose Boolean/Intersect. The area shared by the overlapping objects becomes
a new object. The overlapping objects are not deleted; they are defined as nonmodel objects and hidden from view.
3. In the window that appears, select the color and enter the name of the object.
Note:
Go Back
Contents
If you have multiple objects that were created from the boolean operation,
toggle Select on or off to select or deselect the object. If you are entering
your own names, this allows you to view the object you are naming. Objects
remain selected after you choose OK.
4. Choose OK.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
222
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Boolean Menu
Boolean Commands
Boolean/Union
Boolean/Subtract
Boolean/Intersect
Boolean/Simplify
The Boolean Menu
Boolean/Simplify
Use Boolean/Simplify to remove extraneous vertices that remain along an edge after
you perform a boolean operation. When you perform a boolean operation, the object created may have a vertex on an edge, as the following graphic demonstrates.
Vertices on
edges.
A vertex on an edge divides the edge into multiple line segments. Because of this, the
edge cannot be defined as a port (the line segments that comprise a port cannot be
touching). Therefore, if you intend to make this edge a port, remove the extra vertices
along it.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
223
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Arrange Menu
Arrange Commands
Arrange/Move
Using the Mouse
Using the Keyboard
By Entering Offsets
Arrange/Rotate
Arrange/Mirror
The Arrange Menu
Arrange Menu
Use the Arrange commands to:
•
•
•
Move objects and text.
Rotate objects and text.
Mirror objects and text about a line.
Arrange Commands
The function of each Arrange command is as follows:
Move
Rotate
Mirror
Moves the selected items by the distance you specify.
Rotates the selected items about a center point by the angle you specify.
Mirrors the selected items about a line.
The Arrange commands only move, rotate, or mirror objects. They cannot be used to
copy objects. If you wish to move, rotate, or mirror a copy of an object, use the Edit/Duplicate commands.
Note:
The Arrange commands are accessible only if the objects on which they can
operate have been selected.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
224
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Arrange Menu
Arrange Commands
Arrange/Move
Using the Mouse
Using the Keyboard
By Entering Offsets
Arrange/Rotate
Arrange/Mirror
The Arrange Menu
Arrange/Move
Use the Arrange/Move command to move the selected objects or text. The items can be
moved in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
By picking and moving the items with the mouse.
By entering the cartesian or polar coordinates where the items are to be moved.
By entering the new location of the items as offsets from their current location.
The exact method that you use depends on the way your geometric model is set up and
your personal preference.
Using the Mouse
> To move the selected items using the mouse:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by picking them with one of the
Edit/Select commands.
2. Choose Arrange/Move.
3. Select a point to serve as a base (anchor) point.
4. Pick a target point. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. You can also
switch to keyboard entry.
All selected items are moved the distance determined by the offset between the base
point and target point. To move copies of the objects instead of the originals, use the Edit/
Duplicate/Along Line command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
225
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Arrange Menu
Arrange Commands
Arrange/Move
Using the Mouse
Using the Keyboard
By Entering Offsets
Arrange/Rotate
Arrange/Mirror
The Arrange Menu
Using the Keyboard
> To move the selected items using the keyboard:
1. Select the desire items by clicking on them or by picking them with one of the Edit/
Select commands.
2. Choose Arrange/Move.
3. Select a point to serve as a base (anchor) point. To enter the point through the
keyboard, use the procedure described in Selecting Points With the Keyboard. By
default, the coordinates that appear in the U and V or R and Theta fields are those
of the center point of the selected items.
4. Select a target point by entering the point’s coordinates in the coordiantes fields.
All selected items are moved the distance determined by the offset between the base
point and target point. To move copies of the objects instead of the originals, use the Edit/
Duplicate/Along Line command.
By Entering Offsets
Fields for dU and dV also appear in the status bar. (Polar grids display dR and Angle
fields.) These fields allow you to move the object using offsets from the current point.
> To move the selected items by entering offsets:
1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Arrange/Move.
3. Enter the distance in the u direction that the items are to be moved in the dU field.
If a polar grid is displayed, enter the R distance in the dR field.
4. Enter the distance in the v direction that the items are to be moved in the dV (or
Angle) field.
5. Choose Enter or press Return. The objects are moved the specified distance.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
226
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Arrange Menu
Arrange Commands
Arrange/Move
Using the Mouse
Using the Keyboard
By Entering Offsets
Arrange/Rotate
Arrange/Mirror
The Arrange Menu
Arrange/Rotate
Use the Arrange/Rotate command to rotate the selected objects or text in the counterclockwise direction about a center point.
> To rotate items about a center point:
1. Select the desired items by either clicking on them or using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Arrange/Rotate.
3. Select the point about which the item is to be rotated. The Rotate Selection popup window appears, which allows you to enter the angle of rotation for the selected
objects.
4. Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field.
5. Choose OK or press Return.
The selected item (or group of items) is then rotated counter-clockwise about the pivot
point by the specified angle. To rotate copies of objects, use the Edit/Duplicate/Along
Arc command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
227
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Arrange Menu
Arrange Commands
Arrange/Move
Using the Mouse
Using the Keyboard
By Entering Offsets
Arrange/Rotate
Arrange/Mirror
The Arrange Menu
Arrange/Mirror
Use the Arrange/Mirror command to mirror selected objects or text about a line.
> To mirror an item about a line:
1. Select the desired items by either clicking on them or using one of the Edit/Select
commands.
2. Choose Arrange/Mirror.
3. Select the first point in the mirror line.
4. Select the second point in the mirror line.
The selected items are then mirrored about the line you entered.
Note:
Mirrored text is not reversed; rather, it is moved to the other side of the mirror
line.
To copy objects across a mirror line, use the Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
228
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Object Menu
Use the Object commands to do the following:
•
•
•
Draw open objects such as arcs and lines.
Draw closed objects such as circles, rectangles, and other polygons.
Add text to a model.
When you select Object from the 2D Modeler menu bar, the following menu appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
229
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Object Commands
The function of each Object command is as follows:
Polyline
Arc
Spline
Text
Rectangle
Circle
Spiral
Draws a multiple-segment line.
Draws a clockwise or counter-clockwise arc.
Clockwise
Draws a clockwise arc.
Counter-Clockwise Draws a counter-clockwise arc.
Draws an open or closed spline curve.
Adds text to a geometric model.
Draws a rectangle.
Draws a circle by specifying the following:
2 Point
The center and radius of the circle.
3 Point
Three points on the circumference of the circle.
Draws a spiral by specifying the following:
Rectangular
Draws a rectangular spiral.
Circular
Draws a circular spiral.
All Object commands apply only to the active project window. Objects can be drawn in
any subwindow belonging to the active project, however.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
230
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Open Objects
Closed Objects
Simple Closed Objects
Complex Closed
Objects
Entering Points from the
Keyboard
Selecting Points in Several
Subwindows
Overlapping Objects
Self-Intersecting Objects
Modeling Thin Objects
Importing Complex
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Objects
All geometric models that you create are simply a collection of closed objects. The final
geometric model must have no overlapping objects (unless one object is entirely within
another), or open objects. However, while you are still constructing the model you can create temporary objects that violate these rules.
Open
Objects
Open Objects
Open objects are polylines, arcs, and splines, or any combination of polylines, arcs, and
splines that have not yet been closed to form the boundary of an object. They are created
using the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Go Back
Closed
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc/Clockwise
Object/Arc/Counterclockwise
Object/Spline
Generally, open objects are used as temporary objects from which to create complex
closed objects.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
231
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Open Objects
Closed Objects
Simple Closed
Objects
Complex Closed
Objects
Entering Points from
the Keyboard
Selecting Points in Several
Subwindows
Overlapping Objects
Self-Intersecting Objects
Modeling Thin Objects
Importing Complex
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Closed Objects
Closed objects are objects with boundaries that enclose a region. All closed objects are
automatically saved as part of the geometric model after you choose the File/Save (or
File/Save As) command.
Simple Closed Objects
Simple closed objects such as rectangles and circles are created with the following commands:
•
•
•
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle/2 Point
Object/Circle/3 Point
Each of the above commands results in a simple closed object. In addition, the Object/
Polyline and Object/Spline commands can be used to create more complicated closed
objects.
Complex Closed Objects
A complex closed object is one created by joining open objects to enclose an area. For
example, to turn an open object into a closed object, simply use the command Object/
Polyline to create a polyline that connects the end points of the open object.
Entering Points from the Keyboard
In the sections that describe the commands of the Object menu, it is assumed that you
will use the mouse to select points. However, if you need to enter coordinates with greater
precision than the mouse provides, or to choose points between grid and mouse snaps,
you will need to enter coordinates directly from the keyboard.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
232
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Open Objects
Closed Objects
Simple Closed Objects
Complex Closed
Objects
Entering Points from the
Keyboard
Selecting Points in Several Subwindows
Overlapping Objects
Self-Intersecting Objects
Modeling Thin Objects
Importing Complex
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Selecting Points in Several Subwindows
You can select points for objects from different subwindows. The software uses the local
coordinate system in each subwindow to place the points.
When using the command Object/Rectangle, keep in mind that as you move the mouse
between subwindows, the rectangle’s alignment changes to match that of the local coordinate system.
For example, objects “A” and “B” were both created using the Object/Rectangle command. However, object “B” is rotated because its second point was selected from the subwindow with the rotated grid.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
233
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Open Objects
Closed Objects
Simple Closed Objects
Complex Closed
Objects
Entering Points from the
Keyboard
Selecting Points in Several
Subwindows
Overlapping Objects
Self-Intersecting Objects
Modeling Thin Objects
Importing Complex
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Go Back
The Object Menu
Overlapping Objects
Objects cannot partially overlap. The software checks for overlapping objects when each
object is created. If overlapping objects are present, the following message appears:
Warning: Overlapping objects created.
The software checks for overlapping objects again when you exit. If your final model contains overlapping objects, you will be unable to use it in any Maxwell 2D software package.
To reposition overlapping objects, use the Arrange and Edit commands. You can also
use the Boolean commands to unite, subtract, or intersect the objects to stop them from
overlapping. Another option is to use the Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command to
declare the overlapping objects as “non-model” objects that will not be used in a solution.
In cases where one object is entirely contained inside another object, the material
assigned to the outer object stops at the boundary of the inner object. Assign material
characteristics to the two objects using the normal procedure.
Self-Intersecting Objects
If you cross over a line or arc segment while using Object/Polyline, Object/Spline,
Object/Arc (or a combination thereof), the following message appears:
Warning: Self-intersecting object created.
To the software, a self-intersecting object is an object that has been twisted or folded over
onto itself — the system cannot determine what surface represents the inside surface of
the object. If you attempt to solve for the electromagnetic field using a geometric model
that contains self-intersecting objects in a Maxwell 2D software package, the system cannot converge on an accurate solution.
To modify self-intersecting objects, use the Reshape commands. Alternatively, use the
Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command to declare the self-intersecting objects as “nonmodel” objects that will not be used in a solution.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
234
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Open Objects
Closed Objects
Simple Closed Objects
Complex Closed
Objects
Entering Points from the
Keyboard
Selecting Points in Several
Subwindows
Overlapping Objects
Self-Intersecting Objects
Modeling Thin Objects
Importing Complex
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Modeling Thin Objects
If an object is extremely thin, such as a ground conductor, modeling it using its actual
dimensions might not be appropriate. In a Maxwell 2D software package, the electromagnetic field solution for the model may not converge if objects with very tiny dimensions (as
compared to the other objects in the model) are included in the geometry. Therefore,
model thin ground planes using a zero-area closed object. Such traces can be modeled
by using the Object/Polyline command to create a line that folds back onto itself.
Importing Complex Objects
You can import complex objects, such as ellipses, that you cannot otherwise create in the
software from PlotData.
> To import or open a .sm2 file created in PlotData:
1. Choose File/Import or File/Open to import or open the .sm2 file.
2. If you are opening or importing an open object, use any of the Object commands
listed in the Open Objects section to create closed 2D objects.
3. If you wish to modify the 2D objects, use the following commands to edit them:
• Use the Edit commands to cut, paste, select, display, and copy objects.
• Use the Reshape commands to scale and change the shape of geometric objects.
• Use the Arrange commands to move, rotate, and mirror objects.
• Use the Boolean commands to unite, intersect, or subtract objects.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
235
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Object/Polyline
Use Object/Polyline to draw an object with one or more straight segments. This command can be used to draw closed or open objects. It can also be used to connect the
ends of an open object, turning it into a closed object.
> To draw a polyline:
1. Choose Object/Polyline.
2. Move the mouse to the first point in the line and click the left mouse button to enter
the point. The dU and dV fields appear below the status bar allowing you to enter
the U and V offset of the next point in the polyline using the keyboard, rather than
the mouse.
3. Choose the next point in the line, using either the keyboard or mouse. Notice that
the system draws a line that follows the cursor.
4. Repeat step 3 for each point to be entered.
Note:
If you make a mistake while picking points for the polyline, click the right
mouse button to delete the last point that was entered.
5. Double-click the left mouse button on the final point in the line to end the polyline.
If the line segment forms a closed object, the software prompts you to specify a name and
a color for the object. To turn an open object into a closed object, simply create a new
polyline that connects the end points of the open object.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
236
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Object Menu
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Object/Arc
Use the commands on the Object/Arc menu to draw a circular arc:
Clockwise
Counter-Clockwise
Draws an arc in the clockwise direction.
Draws an arc in the counter-clockwise direction.
The two types of arcs are shown below.
Start Point
Center
Start Point
End Point
Counter-Clockwise Arc
Center
End Point
Clockwise Arc
Notice the difference in the arcs, even though they have similar center points, start points,
and end points.
More
Go Back
> To create an arc:
1. Choose one of the following commands:
• Object/Arc/Clockwise
• Object/Arc/Counter-Clockwise
2. Select the center of the arc. Move the cursor to the desired point and click the left
mouse button.
3. Select the arc’s start point. Move the cursor to the desired point and click the left
mouse button.
4. Select the arc’s end point. Move the cursor to the desired point and click the left
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
237
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
mouse button. The following window appears:
5. Do one of the following:
• Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented by
a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments.
For instance, specifying a value of 15 for a 90˚ arc creates an approximation to the
arc consisting of 15 line segments with each line segment comprising 6˚ of the arc.
The value of 6˚ automatically appears in the field Angular Increment.
• Alternatively, specify the angular increment. Doing so automatically adjusts the
Number of segments.
Generally, accept the default values for these fields. Using too few segments can
result in an arc that is not very smooth, and using too many segments can
unnecessarily complicate a geometry.
6. Choose OK or press Return.
The arc is then drawn in the clockwise or counter-clockwise direction.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
238
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Object/Spline
Choose Object/Spline to draw a curved line — a piecewise cubic Bezier spline with c´
continuity. You can use this command to:
•
•
Draw closed or open objects.
Connect the ends of an open object, turning it into a closed object.
> To draw a spline:
1. Choose Object/Spline.
2. Move the mouse to the first point in the spline and click the left mouse button to
enter the point. The dU and dV fields appear below the status bar allowing you to
enter the U and V offset of the next point in the polyline using the keyboard, rather
than the mouse.
3. Choose the next point in the line, using either the keyboard or mouse. Notice that
the system draws a line that follows the cursor.
4. Repeat step 3 for each point to be entered.
5. Double-click the left mouse button on the final point in the line. The following popup window appears:
6. Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented by
a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments.
For instance, specify a value of 20 to approximate the spline as a polyline with 20
line segments.
7. Choose OK or press Return.
Go Back
If the curved line forms a closed object, the software prompts you to specify a name and a
color for the object. To turn an open object into a closed object with this command, simply
create a spline that connects the end points of the open object.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
239
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Object/Text
Choose Object/Text to add text to a geometric model. Such text, which is saved with the
geometric model, is generally used for labels that can be included in screen captures.
> To add text to the model:
1. Choose Object/Text. The following window appears:
2. Enter the desired label or comment in the Text field. Text can be any length;
however, be aware that a long line of text does not automatically wrap to a second
line if the text extends outside the drawing space.
3. Specify how to align the text about the insertion point. The current alignment
choice appears next to the field Alignment. To change the text alignment:
a. Click the left mouse button on the alignment. Doing so displays the following
options:
left
center
right
The first character of the string is flush left at the insertion point.
The string is centered on the insertion point. This is the default.
The last character of the string is flush right at the insertion point.
b. Choose the desired alignment from the menu.
4. Choose OK or press Return. The cursor displays as a cross.
5. Click the left mouse button on the point where you want to place the text.
The text then appears in the desired location using the alignment that you specified.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
240
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Scaling Text
Generating Screen Captures
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Scaling Text
To change the default text size, use the Model/Defaults/Text Size command. All text that
is subsequently added to the model will use the size that you specify.
To change the size of text that is currently displayed in the model, use the Reshape/Scale
Selection command to change the scale of the text.
Generating Screen Captures
Text is generally used to label objects and annotate a geometric model for a screen capture. Refer to the document describing the Print Manager for instructions on how to print a
hardcopy of a screen brought up in the Maxwell software.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
241
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Object/Rectangle
Choose Object/Rectangle to draw a rectangle by selecting two diagonally opposite corners.
> To create a rectangle:
1. Choose Object/Rectangle. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
2. Choose the first diagonal corner. Do one of the following:
• Click the left mouse button on the point.
• Enter coordinates of the point using the keyboard.
When you choose the first diagonal, the dU and dV fields appear below the status
bar, allowing you to enter the offset distance to the second diagonal of the
rectangle.
3. Choose the second diagonal corner using either the mouse or the keyboard. A
window appears with fields for entering the name and color of the object.
4. Specify the name and color of the object.
5. Choose OK.
Note:
If you are picking the rectangle’s corners from subwindows with different uvaxes orientations, the rectangle will be aligned with the uv-axes in the subwindow from which the second corner was picked.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
242
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Object Menu
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Circle/2 Point
Object/Circle/3 Point
Object/Spiral
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Object/Circle
Use the following commands on the Object/Circle menu to draw a circle:
2 Point
3 Point
Draws a circle by specifying the center and radius.
Draws a circle by specifying three points on the circumference.
Object/Circle/2 Point
Use the Object/Circle/2 Point command to draw a circle by specifying its center point
and radius.
> To draw a two-point circle:
1. Choose Object/Circle/2 Point.
2. Move the mouse to the center of the circle and click the left mouse button.
3. Move the mouse to a point on the circle’s circumference. As the mouse moves, the
system forms a line from the center point to show the circle’s radius. To select the
point, click the left mouse button. The following window appears:
4. Do one of the following:
• Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented by
a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments.
For instance, specify a value of 20 to approximate the circle as a polygon with 20
line segments, with each line segment comprising 18˚ of the circle. Changing the
Number of segments automatically adjusts the Angular increment. The
minimum number of segments that you can enter is eight.
• Specify the angular increment. Changing the Angular increment automatically
adjusts the Number of segments. The maximum Angular increment that you
can enter is 45.
As shown below, there is a trade-off between circles approximated with too few
and too many segments. If too few segments are specified, the result is a shape
243
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Circle/2 Point
Object/Circle/3 Point
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
that doesn’t much resemble a circle. If too many segments are specified, the
model becomes more complicated than necessary, resulting in increased
computing requirements. Therefore, in most cases accept the default.
8
Segments
12
Segments
24
Segments
5. Choose OK or press Return to complete the command. A pop-up window appears
with fields for entering the name and color of the object.
6. Specify the name and color of the object.
7. Choose OK.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
244
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Circle/2 Point
Object/Circle/3 Point
Object/Spiral
The Object Menu
Object/Circle/3 Point
Choose Object/Circle/3 Point to draw a circle by selecting three points on its circumference.
>
To draw a three-point circle:
1. Choose Object/Circle/3 Point.
2. Move the mouse to the first point on the circle’s circumference and click the left
mouse button. After you do, an “x” appears on the screen, marking the point’s
location.
3. Move the mouse to the second point on the circle’s circumference and click the left
mouse button. After you do, an “x” appears on the screen, marking the point’s
location.
4. Move the mouse to the third and final point on the circle’s circumference and click
the left mouse button. After you do, a pop-up window with the following fields
appears:
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Number of segments
Angular increment
Enter either the desired number of segments or the angular increment in the same
way as described for the command Object/Circle/2 Point. The minimum number
of segments that you can enter to approximate a circle is eight.
Choose OK or press the Return key to complete the command. The New Object
window appears with fields for entering the name and color of the object.
Enter the name of the new circle.
Choose the color of the new circle.
Choose OK. The window closes.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
245
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Object Menu
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Object/Spiral/Circular
Object/Spiral
Use the Object/Spiral commands to draw two types of spirals:
Rectangular Draws a rectangular spiral.
Circular
Draws a circular spiral.
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Use Object/Spiral/Rectangular to draw a rectangular spiral.
> To draw a rectangular spiral:
1. Choose Object/Spiral/Rectangular. The following window appears.
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
2. Specify the direction in which to generate the spiral — Clockwise or Counter246
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Object/Spiral/Circular
The Object Menu
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clockwise.
Enter the angle at which to begin drawing the spiral in the Start Angle field. The
angle the spiral begins at is relative to the u-axis originating from the starting point
(the outer end). You may enter any number, including decimals.
Enter the number of turns for the spiral in the Number of Turns field. You may
enter any number, including decimals, greater than 0.25.
Enter the width of the trace in the Trace Width field.
Enter the distance between each turn of the trace in the Trace Spacing field.
Enter the length of the spiral in the Overall Length field. This does not refer to the
actual length of the spiral, but to the length of the rectangular area the spiral
occupies. This corresponds to the longest edge along the length of the spiral.
Enter the overall width of the spiral in the Overall Width field.
Select the corner type from the following:
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Makes the corners pointed.
Rounds the corners.
Miters the corners at a 45o angle from the edges.
10. Choose OK. A window appears prompting you to select the center point for the
spiral. The spiral follows the mouse. This is just a guide to help you place the
spiral.
11. Select the center point. The rectangular spiral is drawn.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
247
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Object Menu
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Object/Spiral/Circular
Square Corners
Select Square Corners to make the corners of the spiral 90 degrees.
Rounded Corners
Select Rounded Corners to round the corner of a rectangular spiral with a 90 degree arc.
> To create a spiral with rounded corners:
1. From the Rectangular Spiral window, select Rounded Corners. The Corner
Radius and Segments Per Arc fields become active.
2. Enter the radius at which to draw the arc in the Corner Radius field. The corner
radius is measured from each edge of the spiral. The resulting arc is the quarter of
the circle that joins the two perpendicular edges. To maintain a constant trace
width, the corner radius must decrease as the trace spirals inward. The decrease
is calculated from the ratio of the corner radius you enter and the shortest length
on the edges touching the outermost corner radius. This radius-to-length ratio is
then used to calculate the radius on each successive corner. This is shown below.
rc
Radius-to-length ratio:
drl =
Spiral with rounded corners
lc
Corner Radius
Shortest
Edge
rc
lc
l1
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
r1 = drl x l1
Note:
If the radius ever decreases to the point where it becomes impossible to
maintain the trace width and have a rounded edge, the inner corner of that
turn will remain a square corner.
3. Enter the number of segments used to approximate the arc in the Segments Per
Arc field.
248
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Object/Spiral/Circular
The Object Menu
Mitered Corners
Select Mitered Corners to miter each turn of a rectangular spiral. The miter is always
made at a 45 degree angle from the edges of the spiral.
> To create a spiral with mitered corners:
1. From the Rectangular Spiral window, select Mitered Corners. The Miter
Percentage field becomes active.
2. In the Miter Percentage field, enter the percentage of the diagonal distance from
the outermost corner of a turn to create the mitered corner. For example, to create
a corner with a miter cut three quarters of the distance from the outermost corner,
enter 75 as the percentage.
Note:
The Miter Percentage must be greater than 0 and less than 100.
This figure represents a spiral with two turns and mitered corners. The miter
percentage is set at 50.
Mitered Corner
Diagonal Distance
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
249
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Object Menu
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Object/Spiral/Circular
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Object/Spiral/Circular
Use Object/Spiral/Circular to draw a circular spiral.
> To draw a circular spiral:
1. Choose Object/Spiral/Circular. The following window appears.
2. Specify the direction in which to generate the spiral — Clockwise or CounterClockwise.
3. Enter the angle at which to begin drawing the spiral in the Start Angle field. The
angle the spiral begins at is relative to the u-axis originating from the starting point
(the outer end). You may enter any number between 0 and 360, including
decimals.
4. Enter the number of turns for the spiral in the Number of Turns field. You may
enter any number, including decimals.
5. Enter the width of the trace in the Trace Width field.
6. Enter the distance between each turn of the trace in the Trace Spacing field.
7. Enter the overall radius of the spiral in the Outermost Radius field. This is similar
to the Overall Length and Overall Width used in the Object/Spiral/Rectangular
250
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Object Menu
Object Commands
Objects
Object/Polyline
Object/Arc
Object/Spline
Object/Text
Object/Rectangle
Object/Circle
Object/Spiral
Object/Spiral/Rectangular
Square Corners
Rounded Corners
Mitered Corners
Object/Spiral/Circular
The Object Menu
command.
8. Enter the number of degrees that each line segment represents in the Degrees
Per Segment field. In the 2D Modeler, arcs and circles are approximated by line
segments. Therefore, you must specify the number of degrees that each line
segment represents. For example, if you chose 90 as the Degrees Per Segment,
it would generate a diamond-shaped spiral (only 4 line segments). You may enter
a value greater than 0 or less than or equal to 90.
9. Choose OK. A window appears prompting you to select the center point for the
spiral. The spiral follows the mouse. This is merely a guide to help you place the
spiral.
10. Select the center point. The circular spiral is drawn.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
251
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint Menu
Use the commands on the Constraint menu (shown below) to do the following:
•
•
•
•
Add constraints to a geometric model. Constraints can be varied during a parametric
analysis to determine the effect that dimensional changes have on a design. They
may be defined as constants or mathematical expressions relating the constraint’s
value to that of another constraint or a predefined variable.
Modify variable constraints to change a geometry’s dimensions. Different numeric
values, math functions, or proportional relationships can be assigned to constraints.
Delete constraints from a model.
Activate (or “enforce”) new constraint settings.
When you choose Constraint from the menu bar, the following menu appears.
The Constraint commands are available in the 2D Modeler, which may be accessed via
the Maxwell 2D Extractor, Maxwell 2D, Maxwell Strata, and the Utilities panel.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
252
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
The function of each Constraint command is as follows:
Add
Allows you to add one or more constraints to your geometric model.
Point-To-Point Dis- Sets a constraint based on the distance between two
tance
points.
Line-To-Line
Sets a constraint based on the angle between two
Angle
straight lines.
Arc Radius
Sets a constraint based on the length of the radius of an
arc.
Rotation
Sets a constraint based on the angle from a selected
anchor point on an object to the local u-axis.
Lock X Coordinate Sets a constraint by locking an x-coordinate.
Lock Y Coordinate Sets a constraint by locking a y-coordinate.
Modify Allows you to modify the values of constraints.
By Clicking
Lets you use the mouse to select constraints to be modified, one at a time.
Edit Variables
Lets you modify multiple constraints at one time using
the Constraint Variables table. Also lets you define
variables for use in functional constraints.
Delete Deletes one or more constraints.
By Clicking
Deletes the constraints you select via the mouse.
By Name
Deletes a constraint by name.
All
Deletes all of the constraints.
Enforce Activates new constraint or variable settings.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
253
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Constraint Menu
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraints and Parametric Sweeps
Direction of Constraints
Over-Constraining a Model
Deleting Objects and
Edges
Moving Objects and Edges
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
More
Go Back
Constraints
Constraints allow you to easily and precisely vary the dimensions of your geometric
design. By changing a dimension in a model — for example, the distance between two
objects or the angle between two intersecting lines — you can test how that changes
affect the results of the solution.
You can use constraints as follows:
•
•
To set a dimension to a specific value.
To set a dimension to an expression relating it to a mathematical formula — such as
one relating it to the value of another constraint. For example, defining the constraint
c2 as c2= 0.5*c1 sets c2 to always be one-half the value of the constraint c1.
Constraints are particularly helpful when you want to change two or more dimensions in
relation to each other.
In this example, all the constraints are defined in relation to the constraint c1. Constraint 2
(c2) is set to be equal to half of constraint c1 (or 0.5*c1); constraint 3(c3) is set to be
equal to the sum of c1 and c2. To increase the size of the object, for example, you need
only change c1. The other three constraints will change to maintain the established relationships. As a result, the object becomes longer but generally retains its original shape.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
254
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Constraint Menu
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraints and Parametric Sweeps
Direction of Constraints
Over-Constraining a Model
Deleting Objects and
Edges
Moving Objects and Edges
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
Constraints and Parametric Sweeps
During a parametric sweep, you can vary the values of selected geometric constraints
and solve for fields various executive parameters (, and so forth). This type of analysis is
primarily used in variational design, where the lengths of various dimensions are changed
while other parts of the geometry are kept the same or change proportionally. It is also
used in tolerance testing, where small variations in dimensions can have a large impact
on the design.
To vary constraints during a parametric sweep, simply add the desired constraints as
solution variables when setting up the sweep. You can then enter the values that the constraints are to be set to during the solution.
Direction of Constraints
All constraints are marked with arrows labeled with the constraint’s name. Be sure that
you define a constraint in the direction that you wish the object, point, or edge to be
moved. When in doubt, check the arrow marking the constraint’s location. It indicates the
direction in which the constraint operates.
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
255
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Constraint Menu
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraints and Parametric Sweeps
Direction of Constraints
Over-Constraining a
Model
Deleting Objects and
Edges
Moving Objects and Edges
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
Over-Constraining a Model
A geometric model becomes over-constrained when more than one constraint controls
the location of a point, edge, or object. For example, the geometry on the left in the figure
below is over-constrained. Two constraints, L1 and L2, control the location of object A.
Neither of these constraints can be enforced, since changing the value of L1 changes the
value of L2 (and vice-versa).
Ov er - c onst r ained geomet r y
A
L1
A
L1
L2
C
B
B
L2
C
The software displays an error message if you over-constrain a model. The constraint you
were attempting to define is then deleted.
Note that the geometry on the right is not over-constrained. The constraint L2 defines the
location of object C in relationship to object A, as indicated by the direction of the arrow.
Changing the value of L1 does not change the value of L2 in this case. Object C is simply
moved to preserve this relationship.
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
256
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraints and Parametric Sweeps
Direction of Constraints
Over-Constraining a
Model
Deleting Objects and
Edges
Moving Objects and
Edges
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Deleting Objects and Edges
When you delete an object, all constraints that are defined for that object are also deleted
— including those defined between it and other objects. When you delete edges of
objects for which constraints are defined, one of the following occurs:
•
•
•
Arc radius and line-to-line angle constraints are automatically deleted when the edge
for which they are defined is deleted. Note that the 2D Modeler considers circles and
arcs to have a single edge, even though they may appear to have multiple edges if
they are approximated with a low number of segments.
Point-to-point constraints are deleted if deleting the edge removes the vertex or spline
control point where the constraint is defined.
Rotational constraints are not deleted unless all edges of the object are deleted. The
constraint simply uses the new geometric center of the object to define its rotation.
Moving Objects and Edges
When you move an object or an edge, the constraints that are defined for it retain their
current values even though the location of the point, edge, or object for which the constraint was defined is now different. Enforcing constraints may undo the effects of the
move, depending on how the constraints were defined.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
257
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-ToPoint Distance
Effect of Point-to-Point
Constraints on Object
Dimensions
Constraints Between
Arbitrary Object Points
Constraint/Add/Line-ToLine Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X
Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y
Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Add
Original Object
Object with Constraints Enforced
C1
C1
C1
C1
Use the Constraint/Add commands to add variable constraints for the following:
Point-To-Point Distance
Line-To-Line Angle
Arc Radius
Rotation
Note:
Sets a constraint based on the distance between two
points.
Sets a constraint based on the angle between two straight
lines.
Sets a constraint based on the length of the radius of an
arc.
Sets a constraint based on the angle from a selected
anchor point on an object to the local u-axis.
Before using the Constraint/Add commands to define constraints for a geometric model, be sure to display the vertices and control points of objects. To
do this, use Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to draw hatches over them. This
helps you to locate object vertices and spline control points easily, simplifying the task of adding constraints.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
258
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-ToPoint Distance
Effect of Point-to-Point
Constraints on Object
Dimensions
Constraints Between
Arbitrary Object Points
Constraint/Add/Line-ToLine Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X
Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y
Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance
Use the Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance command to set a constraint along the
distance between two points. The points can be within the same object or on separate
objects. You can then alter the constraint to change the distance or relate it to another
constraint. Point-to-point constraints can only be defined for object vertices and spline
control points.
> To set a point-to-point distance constraint:
1. Choose Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance.
2. Click on the first point along the distance you wish to set up as a constraint.
3. Move the mouse to the second end point and click on it. A pop-up window
appears.
4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.
5. Enter the distance between the two points in the Expr field. The default is the
current distance.
6. Choose Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the
added constraint won’t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/
Enforce command.
7. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Note:
Each constraint is represented by an arrow labeled with the constraint’s
name. To avoid a cluttered screen, keep the constraint names as short as
possible.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
259
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-ToPoint Distance
Effect of Point-toPoint Constraints on
Object Dimensions
Constraints Between
Arbitrary Object
Points
Constraint/Add/Line-ToLine Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X
Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y
Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Effect of Point-to-Point Constraints on Object Dimensions
The effect of enforcing a point-to-point constraint depends on whether you defined the
constraint between points on two different objects or two points on the same object.
•
If you defined the constraint between two points on different objects, the distance
between them changes when you enforce the constraint — as shown in the figure
below. However, the dimensions of the objects remain the same.
• If you defined the constraint between two points within the same object, the dimension
along which the constraint is defined changes when you enforce the constraint. This
changes the shape of the object.
Constraints Between Arbitrary Object Points
To define point-to-point constraints between arbitrary points on objects, insert new vertices at the desired points using the Reshape/Vertex/Insert command. For instructions on
how to do this, see the Reshape menu.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
260
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-ToPoint Distance
Constraint/Add/Line-ToLine Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X
Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y
Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle
Use the Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle command to create a constraint for an
angle between two straight lines. This constraint does not work with circles, arcs, or
splines.
> To create a line-to-line angle constraint:
1. Choose Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle.
2. Click on the first line you wish to set up as a constraint.
3. Move the mouse to the second line and click on it. A pop-up window appears.
4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.
5. Enter the angle between the two lines in the Expr field. Angles are given counterclockwise from the anchor line.
6. Choose Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the
added constraint will not take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/
Enforce command.
7. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
261
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-ToPoint Distance
Constraint/Add/Line-ToLine Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc
Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X
Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y
Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Use the Constraint/Add/Arc Radius command to create a constraint equal to the radius
of the chosen arc. This constraint only works on circles and arcs (both open arcs and arcs
that are part of closed objects.)
> To create an arc radius constraint:
1. Choose Constraint/Add/Arc Radius.
2. Click the mouse on the arc whose radius you wish to constrain. A pop-up window
appears.
3. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.
4. Enter the radius of the circle or arc in the Expr field. The default is the current
radius.
5. Choose Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the
added constraint won’t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/
Enforce command.
6. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
262
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-ToPoint Distance
Constraint/Add/Line-ToLine Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X
Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y
Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Use the Constraint/Add/Rotation command to create a constraint on the angle between
the anchor point and the center of the object you wish to rotate. Angles are given counterclockwise from the local u-axis.
> To create a contraint on the angle:
1. Choose Constraint/Add/Rotation.
2. Click the left mouse button on the point around which you wish to rotate the object.
You can select either a point that is outside of the object or on the object for the
anchor point.
3. Select the object you wish to rotate. A pop-up window appears.
4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.
5. Enter the angle (in degrees) between the object’s center point and the u-axis in the
Expr field.
6. Choose Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the
added constraint will not take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/
Enforce command.
7. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
263
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Add/Point-ToPoint Distance
Constraint/Add/Line-ToLine Angle
Constraint/Add/Arc Radius
Constraint/Add/Rotation
Constraint/Add/Lock X
Coordinate
Constraint/Add/Lock Y
Coordinate
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate
Choose Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate to create a constraint on the x-coordinate of
a vertex.
> To create an x-lock constraint:
1. Choose Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
2. Click on the point on which to lock the x-coordinate and define the constraint. The
New Constraint window appears.
3. Enter the Name of the new constraint or accept the default.
4. Enter the expression for the constraint in the Expr field. Expressions can be
functional, and can depend on other constraints.
5. Optionally, select Enforce to enforce the constraint on the coordinate.
6. Choose OK.
The constraint on the x-coordinate is now defined.
Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate
Choose Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate to create a constraint on the y coordinate of
a vertex.
> To create an y-lock constraint:
1. Choose Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
2. Click on the point on which to lock the y-coordinate and define the constraint. The
New Constraint window appears.
3. Enter the Name of the new constraint or accept the default.
4. Enter the expression for the constraint in the Expr field. Expressions can be
functional, and can depend on other constraints.
5. Optionally, select Enforce to enforce the constraint on the coordinate.
6. Choose OK.
Go Back
The constraint on the y-coordinate is now defined.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
264
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Constraint Menu
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Modify/By
Clicking
Constraint/Modify/Edit
Variables
Defining Functional
Constraints
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
Constraint/Modify
Use the Constraint/Modify commands to change existing constraints. as follows:
By Clicking
Edit Variables
Select constraints to be modified with the mouse.
Lets you modify multiple constraints at one time using the Constraint Variables table. Also lets you define variables to be
used in mathematical expressions.
Constraint/Modify/By Clicking
Use the Constraint/Modify/By Clicking command to select constraints for modification
using the mouse.
> To modify the contraints:
1. Choose Constraint/Modify/By Clicking.
2. Select the constraint you wish to modify. A pop-up window appears.
3. To change the name of the constraint, enter a new name in the Name field.
4. To change the value of the constraint, enter a new numeric value or math
expression in the Expr field.
5. Choose Enforce to immediately enact the constraint change. Otherwise, the
change will not take effect until you choose the Constraint/Enforce command.
6. Select OK. You can then select another constraint to modify, or click the right
mouse to abort the command.
Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables
Use the Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables to:
More
Go Back
•
•
Modify multiple constraints at one time using the Constraint Variables table.
Define variables to be used in mathematical relationships.
> To modify a constraint or define variables:
1. Choose Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables. The pop-up window shown below
appears. The table lists the name of each constraint, its current value, and the
expression that defines the constraint. Below the table are two fields, one for the
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
265
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Modify/By
Clicking
Constraint/Modify/Edit
Variables
Defining Functional
Constraints
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
constraint name, and the other for the constraint expression.
2. Select the desired constraint from the table.
3. Enter the new name in the Name field.
4. Enter the new constraint value in the Expression field. To define a constraint as a
math expression, see Defining Functional Constraints.
5. Choose Update to enact the change.
To delete a constraint, choose Delete.
6. Choose Done when you are finished making changes.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
266
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Modify/By
Clicking
Constraint/Modify/Edit
Variables
Defining Functional
Constraints
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Defining Functional Constraints
To define a constraint as a mathematical expression (such as the tangent of an angle),
you must first define the variables to be used in the math expression. Existing constraints
may be used as variables, and additional variables may be defined using the Constraint
Variables window.
> To define a constraint as a mathematical expression:
1. Define the variables to be used in the function, if they are not already defined as
constraints. (Constraints and variables are treated identically when setting up
functions.)
a. Enter the new variable’s name in the Name field.
b. Enter its value in the Expression field.
Note:
Variables that you define via the Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables command can be used to define the values of new constraints and constraints
modified via the Constraint/Modify/By Clicking command.
2. Select the desired constraint.
3. Enter the math function as the constraint’s value.
The Constraint Variables window is similar to the Expression Evaluator in the Utilities
Panel.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
267
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Delete/By
Clicking
Constraint/Delete/By
Name
Constraint/Delete/All
Constraint/Enforce
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Delete
Use the Constraint/Delete commands to delete constraints in the following ways:
By Clicking
By Name
All
Deletes the constraints you select via the mouse.
Deletes a constraint by name.
Deletes all of the constraints.
Constraint/Delete/By Clicking
Use the Constraint/Delete/By Clicking command to delete the constraints you select
with the mouse.
> To delete the constraint by clicking:
1. Choose Constraint/Delete/By Clicking.
2. Select the constraint you wish to delete. It is immediately deleted.
3. When you are done, click the right mouse button to abort the command.
Constraint/Delete/By Name
Use the Constraint/Delete/By Name command to delete constraints by name.
> To delete the constraint by choosing its name:
1. Choose Constraint/Delete/By Name. A pop-up window appears, asking you to
enter a constraint name or regular expression.
2. Enter the name of the constraint you wish to delete. To delete more than one
constraint at a time, use wild cards to specify the part of the constraint name to be
matched.
3. Choose OK.
Constraint/Delete/All
Go Back
Contents
Use the Constraint/Delete/All command to delete all the constraints you have set for a
model.
> To delete all the constraints:
1. Choose Constraint/Delete/All. A pop-up window appears prompting you to delete
the constraints.
2. Click on the Yes button to continue, or No to cancel the deletion.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
268
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Constraint Menu
Constraint Commands
Constraints
Constraint/Add
Constraint/Modify
Constraint/Delete
Constraint/Enforce
Errors in Enforcing Constraints
Exiting With Unenforced
Constraints
The Constraint Menu
Constraint/Enforce
Choose Constraint/Enforce to activate new constraints or changes in the constraints you
have just set. Use this command if you did not choose the Enforce option when using the
Constraint/Add and Constraint/Modify/By Clicking commands. The 2D Modeler does
not automatically enforce constraints.
Errors in Enforcing Constraints
Occasionally, enforcing a constraint results in one of the following conditions:
•
•
•
Objects that lie outside the problem space.
Self-intersecting objects.
Overlapping objects.
The 2D modeler displays an error message if any of these problems occur. The constraint
is not enforced, and the dimension being changed reverts back to its previous value. However, the constraint is still set to the value you specified. You must modify the constraint to
prevent the error from happening the next time you enforce constraints.
Exiting With Unenforced Constraints
If you exit the 2D Modeler without enforcing constraints, the uses the current dimensions
of the geometric model when generating a finite element mesh. The constraint values are
not lost, however, and can later be enforced when you return to the 2D Modeler.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
269
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model Menu
Use the Model commands to do the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Determine the distance and the angle between two points.
Select the default units of measurement for the project.
Set the drawing size.
Specify the “snap-to” behavior of the mouse.
Set the default object color, text size, and window settings for a project.
When you choose Model from the menu bar, the following menu appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
270
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model Commands
The Model commands affect all subwindows within the active project window. The function of each Model command is as follows:
Measure
Displays the coordinates of any two points that you select, and measures the distance, offsets, and angle between the two points.
Drawing Units Selects the unit of measurement to use in creating the geometric
model.
Drawing Size Defines the drawing size — the size of the region in which the geometric model is drawn and in which a field solution is displayed.
Drawing Plane (Available only in the 2D Modeler and the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator.)Allows you to choose either the XY or RZ drawing plane for creating a cartesian or axisymmetric model.
SnapTo Mode Specifies the “snap-to” behavior for the mouse.
Defaults
Allows you to view and change default settings.
Color
Sets the default object and text color.
Text Size
Sets the default text size.
Window Settings Displays the default subwindow settings such
as grid type, the origin and orientation of the
local coordinate system, and the distance
between adjacent grid points.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
271
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model/Measure
Use the Model/Measure command to display the coordinates associated with any two
points. The figure below shows the information that appears after two points are selected.
> To display coordinate information:
1. Make the desired project window the active one.
2. Choose Model/Measure.
3. Select the first point.
4. Select the second point. A pop-up window displaying the desired information
appears.
5. Choose OK or press the Return key.
6. Do one of the following:
• To continue selecting point pairs, repeat steps 3 through 5.
• Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
272
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Measurements
The following values appear in the pop-up window after you choose the second point. All
values are given in the unit of length specified by the Model/Drawing Units command.
These measurements are taken from the global xy coordinate system (for cartesian models) or the global rz coordinate system (for axisymmetric models), not the local coordinate
system for the subwindow. The local coordinate system values appear in the status bar
fields.
1st point
2nd point
Offsets
Distance
Angle
The x- and y- or r- and z-coordinates of the first point.
The x- and y- or r- and z-coordinates of the second point.
The difference between the x- and y- or r- and z- coordinates of the two
points.
The linear distance between the points (that is, the length of a line connecting the two points).
The angle, in degrees, between a line connecting the two points and
the global x-axis or r-axis.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
273
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model/Drawing Units
Choose Model/Drawing Units to select the unit of length for the model displayed in the
active project window.
> To set the unit of length for the model:
1. Make the desired project window the active one.
2. Choose Model/Drawing Units. A window appears listing the available units of
measurement. The default unit is mm (millimeters).
3. Select the units you want for your model.
4. Specify how the change in units is to affect the geometric model.
• Select Display in New Units (the default) to display the model’s dimensions in the
new units without changing their scale. For instance, choosing centimeters as the
new unit causes a dimension of ten millimeters to be displayed as one centimeter.
• Select Rescale to New Units to change the scale of the model so that all
dimensions are converted to the new units. For instance, choosing centimeters as
the new unit causes a dimension of ten millimeters to become ten centimeters.
5. Choose OK or press Return to complete the command.
The dimensions of objects in the geometric model are now given in the units you selected.
Enter all dimensions in the same units.
Note:
In the Maxwell 2D software, the new unit of length has no effect on the units
of electromagnetic quantities. They are always expressed in SI (MKS) units.
For instance, even though a geometric model is entered in inches, its computed magnetic field is still expressed in amperes/meter.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
274
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Model Menu
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
More
Go Back
Contents
Model/Drawing Size
Use Model/Drawing Size to define the drawing region for all subwindows of the active
project. The drawing region is the rectangular area, displayed as a grid, in which the geometric model is drawn. In the Maxwell 2D software, a finite element mesh and field solution are also generated, but the software does not attempt to compute a field solution
outside the drawing region.
It is important to explicitly define a drawing region because the software computes electromagnetic field quantities throughout the entire drawing region. Defining a region that is
the appropriate size conserves computing resources.
The figure below shows the drawing region for a sample geometry. You can see that it has
been sized to be about twenty-five percent larger than the entire geometric model.
Note:
If you are drawing an axisymmetric model, remember that the geometry is
revolved around the z-axis. When you size the drawing region for this type of
model, you cannot assign a value less than zero to the r-coordinates.
> To define the drawing size for a project window:
1. Make the desired project window the active one.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
275
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Model Menu
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
2. Choose Model/Drawing Size. The following window appears:
For axisymmetric models, the X and Y fields are replaced with R and Z.
3. Specify the desired size of the drawing region. Do so in one of two ways.
• Enter the coordinates marking the lower-left and upper-right corners of the drawing
region as follows:
Minima
Maxima
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
•
Specify coordinates of the lower-left corner of the drawing region:
X or R Enter the x- or r-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the
drawing region.
Y or Z
Enter the y- or z-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the
drawing region.
Specify the coordinates of the upper right corner of the drawing
region:
X or R Enter the x- or r-coordinate of the upper-right corner of
the drawing region.
Y or Z
Enter the y- or z-coordinate of the upper-right corner of
the drawing region.
All x and y or r and z values are given in the units that are specified by the Model/
Drawing Units command.
Alternatively, enter a Padding Percent and choose Fit All. The system will
automatically size the drawing region so that all objects fit inside the region with a
given percent of padding. (Padding refers to the blank space around the edge of
276
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
the objects.) The system automatically recalculates the x and y or r and z values
and displays them in the fields listed above.
For example, specifying a padding of zero results in a rectangular drawing region
that is just large enough to hold all objects that are already drawn. A padding of ten
percent results in a drawing region with sides that are ten percent larger than this.
Note:
> To round off the x and y or r and z values after resizing the drawing
area:
• Choose Round Off.
This rounds off the x and y or r and z fields to produce reasonable dimensions for the drawing region. Since the drawing region size is also used to
set the default grid spacing, text size, and so forth, rounding off the dimensions also gives you appropriate defaults for these 2D Modeler parameters.
4. Leave the Fit Drawing option selected so that the entire drawing space is
displayed in the window.
5. Leave the Set grid spacing option selected so that the suggested grid spacing is
automatically set.
6. Choose OK or press Return.
The drawing region in all subwindows is then resized.
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
If the drawing region is too large to fit in the viewing area of a particular subwindow, scroll
bars automatically appear on the bottom and left side of the subwindow. Use them to
scroll across the drawing region. Alternately, use the command Window/Fit Drawing to
rescale the viewing area of the subwindow to display the entire drawing region.
Adjusting the View
Go Back
When you change the drawing size, the software automatically adjusts the view so that
the entire drawing region can be viewed in the window.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
277
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Model Menu
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
Model/Drawing Plane
Choose Model/Drawing Plane to view and change the drawing plane in which you create
the model. Two types of geometric models are available:
•
•
In a cartesian (XY) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a device
that extends perpendicular to the modeling plane.
In an axisymmetric (RZ) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a
device that is rotated 360° about an axis of symmetry.
The figure below shows the difference between each type of drawing.
Choose XY Plane to
create a cartesian
geometry. Visualize the
rectangle as extending
perpendicular to the
plane being modeled.
Choose RZ Plane to
create an axisymmetric
geometry. Visualize the
rectangle as being
revolved around an axis
of symmetry, z.
Z
Y
R
X
Z
φ
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
This command is available in the 2D Modeler in the Utilities panel and in the Maxwell 2D
Field Simulator version 6.1 (or later). In the Utilities panel 2D Modeler, you can change
the drawing plane; in the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator 2D Modeler, you can view the drawing plane you specified in the Solver command.
Because the other Ansoft 2D software packages do not support axisymmetric models, the
Model/Drawing Plane command is not available in any other 2D product.
> To view or change the drawing plane:
1. Choose Model/Drawing Plane. A pop-up window appears.
278
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
2. Select one of the following:
XY Plane
Creates a cartesian model.
RZ Plane
Creates an axisymmetric model.
3. Choose OK.
The drawing region is then redisplayed and the axes in the lower left corner of the 2D
Modeler appear to indicate which drawing plane you have selected.
If the entire drawing region is not displayed when you select the RZ drawing plane, use
the Window/Change View/Fit Drawing command.
Because an axisymmetric model represents a device that’s revolved around the z-axis,
you cannot specify a value for r that is less than zero when creating objects or setting the
drawing size. For example, if you create objects in the XY drawing plane and then change
the drawing plane to RZ, the following occurs:
•
The xy-coordinates assigned to the objects in the XY drawing plane are changed to rzcoordinates for the RZ drawing plane.
• If there are any objects that overlap into the negative RZ space (or were assigned
negative x- or y-coordinates when created in the XY drawing plane), the following
message appears:
Warning! Drawing size and/or items have been shifted into
positive R space.
> To correct the position of the objects:
1. Choose OK after getting the error message.
2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region.
3. Move objects so that they are positioned correctly in relationship to the axis of
symmetry.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
279
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model/SnapTo Mode
Use Model/SnapTo Mode to specify the “snap-to” behavior of the mouse — that is, the
way in which the mouse selects points on the grid.
> To reset the mouse “snap-to” behavior:
1. Choose Model/SnapTo Mode. The following pop-up window appears:
2. Select one or both of the following options:
Snap to Grid
Snap to Vertex
Forces the mouse to grab the nearest point on the grid.
Forces the mouse to grab the nearest vertex point on an
object.
By default, both options are selected.
3. Choose OK or press Return.
If Snap to Grid is in effect, the system snaps to the closest grid point and uses the coordinates of that point rather than the exact location of the mouse. If Snap to Vertex is in
effect, the system snaps to the closest object vertex point and uses the coordinates of
that point rather than the exact location of the mouse. The mouse must be within three
pixels of the vertex. This option allows you to easily create closed objects, since the
mouse automatically snaps to the vertex point you are trying to connect. If both Snap to
Grid and Snap to Vertex are in effect, the mouse snaps to either an object point or a grid
point, depending on which is closer.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
280
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Snaps
In general, select at least one of the snap-to options. If neither of these options are
selected, the software is in “free mode” and selects whatever point you click on, regardless of its coordinates. This can cause problems when you are trying to create closed
objects. Although the point you select may appear to be the vertex point of an open
object, you may not have actually selected the exact coordinates of the point (and thus did
not create the closed object).
Keyboard Entry
Occasionally, you may need to enter a point that is between grid spacings or object vertices. Instead of changing the mouse behavior, it may be easier to simply enter the point
from the keyboard.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
281
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model/Defaults
Use the Model/Defaults commands to specify the following for the software:
Color
Text Size
Window Settings
Default object and text color.
Default size for text.
Default subwindow settings, such as grid type, the origin of the
local coordinate system, and the distance between adjacent
grid points.
Model/Defaults/Color
Use the Model/Defaults/Color command to specify the default color of objects and text.
All new objects and text will be displayed in the default color you specify.
> To set the default object and text color:
1. Choose Model/Defaults/Color. The following window appears:
2. Click on the color square next to the Default Color field. A palette of colors
appears.
3. Select the desired color.
4. Choose OK or press Return.
All new objects and text will use the selected color as the default color.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
282
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Use the Model/Defaults/Text Size command to specify the default size of text. All new
text will use the size you select as the default text size.
> To set the default text size:
1. Choose Model/Defaults/Text Size. The following window appears:
2. Enter the desired text size in the Default text size field. The size is entered in the
current drawing units. You may choose the Suggested Size button to set the text
size to its suggested value. The suggested size value is based on the size of your
model’s drawing space.
3. Choose OK or press Return.
All new text created with Object/Text will appear in the specified size.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
283
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Model Menu
Model Commands
Model/Measure
Measurements
Model/Drawing Units
Model/Drawing Size
Things to Consider
Scroll Bars
Adjusting the View
Model/Drawing Plane
Model/SnapTo Mode
Snaps
Keyboard Entry
Model/Defaults
Model/Defaults/Color
Model/Defaults/Text Size
Model/Defaults/Window
Settings
The Model Menu
Model/Defaults/Window Settings
Use the Model/Defaults/Window Settings command to specify which window settings
should be used as the default. The settings include:
•
•
•
•
Grid type (cartesian or polar).
Grid spacing.
The origin of local coordinate system.
The angle at which the local coordinate system is rotated from the global x-axis (for
cartesian models) or r-axis (for axisymmetric models).
All new windows that you create use the default values. In addition, if you exit the software, the defaults will be saved for the next time you enter the software.
> To specify the default window settings:
1. Set up a window with the desired grid spacing, grid type, coordinate system origin,
and angle of rotation, using the commands on the Window menu.
2. Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings.
3. Select the desired window. A pop-up window appears showing the window’s grid
type, grid spacing, the origin of its coordinate system, the angle at which the
coordinate system is rotated from the x-axis or r-axis, and whether the uv key and
the grid are visible.
4. Choose OK or press Return to accept the window settings.
All new windows use these settings.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
284
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window Menu
Use the Window commands to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open and close windows under the active project window.
Change the view in the active window.
Tile and cascade project windows and subwindows.
Rotate or shift the origin of the local coordinate system in a window, or realign the
local coordinate system with the global xy-axes (for cartesian models) or rz-axes (for
axisymmetric models).
Set grid spacing and grid visibility.
Select whether a rectangular or radial grid is used.
Display geometric objects as filled-in solids or wire frame outlines.
Select the active project window.
View a list of all open projects.
When you choose Window from the menu bar, the following menu appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
285
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window Commands
The function of each Window command is as follows:
New
Close
Tile
Creates a new subwindow in the active project window.
Closes the active subwindow in the active project window.
Moves and resizes (“tiles”) windows to display them all on the
screen at the same time.
Cascade
Stacks (“cascades”) windows, starting at the upper left corner
of the screen or active project window.
Change View
Allows you to expand or shrink the part of the problem region
that is displayed in the active subwindow.
Coordinate System Shifts or rotates the local coordinate system in the active subwindow.
Grid
Sets 2D grid parameters, such as grid visibility, grid spacing,
the type of grid (rectangular or radial), and whether a key (a
set of axes showing the u and v directions in the local coordinate system) is displayed.
Fill Solids
Displays the closed objects in the active window as filled-in
solids. (Toggles with Wire Frame.)
Wire Frame
Displays filled-in objects in the active window as wire frame
outlines. (Toggles with Fill Solids.)
Toolbar
Defines the location of the toolbar for the active window.
Projectname
Makes the selected project the active project.
In addition to the commands available on the Window menu, there is a list of all currently
open project windows. To switch to a project window, select its title from the menu.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
286
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Selecting the Active
Project Window
Moving and Resizing
Windows Using the
Mouse
Entering Points With the
Keyboard
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Windows
All open project windows are listed at the bottom of the Window menu. However, you can
only work in one project window at a time. The project window in which you can draw
objects and text is the active window. All other project windows are inactive.
Selecting the Active Project Window
The name of the active project window is marked by a check box on the Window menu.
To select the active project window, do one of the following:
•
•
Select that project name from the Window menu.
Click a mouse button anywhere on that window.
The window you selected is displayed on top of all the other project windows on the
screen. Depending on how you’ve set up your color preferences, the window may also
change color when it is selected. Most of the window commands operate on the active
window without affecting the other windows. The selected window remains the active window until a new one is chosen.
Moving and Resizing Windows Using the Mouse
Project windows and subwindows can be moved and resized using the mouse. These
commands at the same as those used in the Motif and the Microsoft Windows environments. Instructions for moving and resizing windows using their window frames are
included in the chapter describing the User Interface.
Entering Points With the Keyboard
Go Back
Contents
With some Window commands in the software, you are expected to select points from
the screen using the mouse. As an alternative to selecting points with the mouse, you can
enter points with the keyboard in the fields located in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen. Use keyboard entry to do the following:
•
•
Enter coordinates and angles with greater precision than can be achieved using the
mouse.
Select points that are between grid or mouse “snaps” without having to change the
mouse behavior.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
287
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Go Back
Window Menu
Window/New
Use the Window/New command to create a new window in the active project window.
> To create a new window:
• Choose Window/New.
A new window appears. It automatically becomes the active window.
You can create as many windows as you like in a project window. Each window’s coordinate system, grid, and viewing area are set independently.
Note:
Contents
Objects drawn in one window are displayed in the other windows that include
the item’s location in their field of view. You can also begin drawing an item in
one subwindow, and complete the item in another.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
288
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Close
Use the Window/Close command to close the active subwindow under the active project
window.
> To close a window:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active window.
2. Choose Window/Close. The subwindow disappears.
Note that the geometric model is not deleted if you close all windows under a project window. To display the model again, simply open a new window.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
289
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Tile/Subwindows
Window/Tile/Projects
Window/Tile/All
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Tile
Use the Window/Tile commands to move and resize subwindows, project windows, or
both so that the windows are visible on the screen at the same time. The following options
are available:
Subwindows Tiles the subwindows in the active project window.
Projects
Tiles all project windows.
All
Tiles all windows.
The Window/Tile commands are used to organize your subwindows and/or project windows so that you can see exactly what each window is displaying at any given time.
Window/Tile/Subwindows
Use the Window/Tile/Subwindows command to tile the subwindows in the active project
window.
> To tile subwindows in the active project window:
• Choose Window/Tile/Subwindows.
The subwindows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same time, similar
to the subwindows shown below. The active subwindow is located in the upper left corner
of the active project window.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
290
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Tile/Subwindows
Window/Tile/Projects
Window/Tile/All
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Tile/Projects
Use the Window/Tile/Projects command to tile all open project windows.
> To open a new project window:
• Choose Window/Tile/Projects.
All open project windows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same
time, similar to the project windows shown below. The active project window is located in
the upper left corner of the screen.
Window/Tile/All
Go Back
Contents
Use the Window/Tile/All command to tile all open subwindows and project windows
simultaneously.
> To tile all the windows:
• Choose Window/Tile/All.
All open windows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same time.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
291
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Cascade/Subwindows
Window/Cascade/Projects
Window/Cascade/All
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Cascade
Use the Window/Cascade commands to move and resize subwindows, project windows,
or both so that the windows are stacked on top of each other. The following options are
available:
Subwindows Cascades the subwindows in the active project window.
Projects
Cascades all project windows.
All
Cascades all windows.
The Window/Cascade commands are used to organize your subwindows and/or project
windows so that you can access any window simply by clicking a mouse button on it.
Window/Cascade/Subwindows
Use the Window/Cascade/Subwindows command to cascade the subwindows in the
active project window.
> To cascade the subwindows:
• Choose Window/Cascade/Subwindows.
All subwindows in the active project window are moved and resized to display in a stack,
similar to the subwindows shown below. The active subwindow will be located on top of
the other subwindows.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
292
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Cascade/Subwindows
Window/Cascade/
Projects
Window/Cascade/All
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Cascade/Projects
Use the Window/Cascade/Projects command to cascade all open project windows.
> To cascade the project windows:
• Choose Window/Cascade/Projects.
All open project windows are moved and resized to display in a stack on the screen, similar to the project windows shown below. The active project window will be located on top
of the other project windows.
Window/Cascade/All
Use the Window/Cascade/All command to cascade all open subwindows and project
windows simultaneously.
Go Back
Contents
> To cascade all the open windows:
• Choose Window/Cascade/All.
All open windows are displayed in a stack on the screen, with the active project window
on top of all other project windows.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
293
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Change View/
Zoom In
Window/Change View/
Zoom Out
Window/Change View/Fit
All
Window/Change View/Fit
Selection
Window/Change View/Fit
Drawing
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Go Back
Window Menu
Window/Change View
Use the Window/Change View commands to change the field of view in the active subwindow — that is, the part of the modeling region that appears in that window. The view
for each subwindow can be set independently.
The Window/Change View commands are:
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Fit All
Fit Selection
Fit Drawing
Zooms in on an area of the subwindow, magnifying the view.
Zooms out on an area of the subwindow, shrinking the view.
Changes the view to display all items in the active subwindow.
Items appear as large as possible without extending beyond the
window.
Changes the view to display all items that are selected. Depending
on where they are located, unselected items may or may not
appear in the window.
Displays the entire drawing space.
Window/Change View/Zoom In
Use the Window/Change View/Zoom In command to zoom in on a region of the active
subwindow, magnifying the view.
> To zoom in on the active subwindow:
1. Choose Window/Change View/Zoom In.
2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed in either of the
following ways:
• Click the left mouse button on the point.
• Enter coordinates of the point using the keyboard.
3. Select the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard.
The system then expands the selected region to fill the subwindow.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
294
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Change View/
Zoom In
Window/Change View/
Zoom Out
Window/Change View/
Fit All
Window/Change View/
Fit Selection
Window/Change View/Fit
Drawing
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Change View/Zoom Out
Use the Window/Change View/Zoom Out command to zoom out on the field of view in
the active subwindow, shrinking the view.
> To zoom out from the active field of view:
1. Choose Window/Change View/Zoom Out.
2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed in either of the
following ways:
• Click the left mouse button on the point.
• Enter the coordinates of the point using the keyboard.
3. Select the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard.
The system then redraws the screen, shrinking the current view to fit in the selected area.
Window/Change View/Fit All
Use the Window/Change View/Fit All command to display the entire model in the active
subwindow.
> To fit the entire model in the subwindow:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit All.
The view in the active subwindow expands to include all items in the model. The size of
the window does not change.
Window/Change View/Fit Selection
Use the Window/Change View/Fit Selection command to display all selected items in
the active subwindow. This command allows you to see all selected items at the same
time.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
> To fit the selected items in the active subwindow:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Selection.
The view in the active subwindow expands to include all items in the model that have
been selected by clicking or by one of the commands on the Edit/Select menu. Depending on their location, unselected items may also display in the window.
295
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Change View/
Zoom In
Window/Change View/
Zoom Out
Window/Change View/Fit
All
Window/Change View/Fit
Selection
Window/Change View/
Fit Drawing
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Change View/Fit Drawing
Use the command Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing
space in the active subwindow. The drawing space is the area in which objects may be
drawn and a field solution computed for a model.
> To fit the entire drawing space in the active subwindow:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing.
The field of view in the active subwindow changes to display the entire drawing space.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
296
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Coordinate System/Shift
Window/Coordinate System/Rotate
Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge
Window/Coordinate System/Reset
Things to Consider
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Coordinate System
Use the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift, rotate, or reset the coordinate
system in the active subwindow (the local coordinate system). The local coordinate system can be rotated, shifted, and reset independently in each subwindow.
The Window/Coordinate System commands are:
Shift
Shifts the origin of the local coordinate system.
Rotate
Rotates the local coordinate system.
Align to Edge Aligns the local coordinate system to the edge of an object.
Reset
Resets the local coordinate system, realigning it with the global axes
and moving the origin to its standard location.
Window/Coordinate System/Shift
Use the Window/Coordinate System/Shift command to change the location of the origin
of the local coordinate system in the active subwindow.
> To shift the origin of the coordinate system in a subwindow:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Shift.
3. Move the mouse to the new origin of the local coordinate system and click the left
mouse button. Alternatively, enter the point using the keyboard. The default
coordinates of this point are the coordinates of the point at the center of the
selected items.
The origin of the local coordinate system is moved to the new location.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
297
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Coordinate System/Shift
Window/Coordinate System/Rotate
Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge
Window/Coordinate System/Reset
Things to Consider
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Coordinate System/Rotate
Use the Window/Coordinate System/Rotate command to rotate the coordinate system
in the active subwindow. This command is useful when drawing parts of a structure’s
geometry that lie at an angle from the rest of the geometry.
> To rotate the local coordinate system:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Rotate.
3. Specify the angle of rotation in one of the following ways:
• Enter the angle in the Angle field in.
• Use an anchor point for the local coordinate system:
a. Move the mouse to the point about which the coordinate system is to be
rotated and click the left mouse button or enter the point from the keyboard.
b. Select the point marking the angle at which the coordinate system is to be
rotated.
The coordinate system rotates by the desired angle.
For example, if you picked points that produced a rotation angle of 45°, the coordinate
system in the active subwindow would look like the one shown below:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
The rotation angle is always taken from the global x-axis (for cartesian models) or the raxis (for axisymmetric models) — successive rotations are not cumulative. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset to return the coordinate system to its default orientation.
298
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Coordinate System/Shift
Window/Coordinate System/Rotate
Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge
Window/Coordinate System/Reset
Things to Consider
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge
Choose Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge to base the local coordinate system
on the specified edge of an object.
> To align the local coordinate system with the edge of an object:
1. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge. New fields appear below
the status bar.
2. Select the edge on which to base the new local coordinate system. The point at
which you select the edge is defined as the new origin.
The new local coordinate system is aligned to the selected edge.
Choose Windows/Coordinate System/Reset to revert to the default alignment and origin.
Window/Coordinate System/Reset
Use the Window/Coordinate System/Reset command to reset the local coordinate system in the active subwindow to its default alignment and origin. For cartesian models, the
default local coordinate system is aligned with the global x- and y-axes and is centered at
the origin (x=0, y=0). For axisymmetric models, the default local coordinate system is
aligned with the global r- and z-axes and centered at the origin (r=0, z=0).
In effect, this command returns the local uv or rθ coordinate system to its original alignment with the global coordinate system, canceling the effects of the Window/Coordinate
System/Rotate and Window/Coordinate System/Shift commands.
> To reset the local coordinate system:
• Choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset.
The coordinate system is then realigned with the global x- and y-axes (for cartesian models) or r- and z-axes (for axisymmetric models) and is centered at the origin.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
299
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Coordinate System/Shift
Window/Coordinate System/Rotate
Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge
Window/Coordinate System/Reset
Things to Consider
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Things to Consider
To modify the default orientation and origin of the coordinate system in new subwindows,
use the Model/Defaults/Window Settings command in conjunction with the Window/
Coordinate System commands to make the local coordinate system in the current subwindow the default.
> To modify the default orientation:
• Set up the desired local coordinate system in a subwindow.
• Use the Window/Coordinate System/Shift command to move the origin of the
local coordinate system.
• Use the Window/Coordinate System/Rotate command to rotate the local
coordinate system.
• Use the Window/Coordinate System/Reset command to reset the local
coordinate system with the default global coordinate system.
• Use the Model/Defaults/Window Settings command to make the local coordinate
system in the subwindow the default.
The local coordinate system in all new subwindows will use the origin and orientation of
the one in this subwindow.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
300
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Window Menu
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Default Grid Settings
Inappropriate Grid Spacing
Invisible Grid Points
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window/Grid
Use the Window/Grid command to do the following:
•
•
•
•
Specify whether a polar (radial) grid or a cartesian (rectangular) grid is displayed in the
active subwindow.
Set the number of polar or cartesian grid divisions.
Toggle between a visible and invisible grid.
Display a grid key — a set of axes identifying the direction of the local coordinate
system.
These parameters apply to the grid that is associated with the local coordinate system in
the active subwindow.
> To change the grid settings:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Grid. The following window appears:
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
301
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Window Menu
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Default Grid Settings
Inappropriate Grid Spacing
Invisible Grid Points
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
3. Select the type of grid:
Cartesian
Displays a cartesian grid in the active subwindow, similar to the
one shown on the left, below. The cartesian grid is centered at the
origin of the local coordinate system (u=0, v=0). Points on the grid
are divided by their local u- and v-coordinates (not their global xand y-coordinates).
Polar
Displays a polar grid in the active subwindow, similar to the one
shown in on the right, below. Like the cartesian grid, the polar grid
is centered at the origin of the local coordinate system (r=0, θ=0).
Points on the grid are defined by their r (radius from the local origin) and €€
θ (angle from the local r-axis) coordinates.
The grids are diagrammed below.
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
4. Enter the desired spacing beneath the grid you selected.
• If you selected Cartesian, enter the horizontal spacing under dU and the vertical
spacing under dV.
• If you selected Polar, enter the radial spacing under dR, and the angular spacing
(in degrees) under dTheta.
Grid spacing is entered in the model’s drawing units.
5. To reset the cartesian and radial grid spacings to their default values, choose
Suggested Spacing. When you select this option, the software calculates the dU
302
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Default Grid Settings
Inappropriate Grid Spacing
Invisible Grid Points
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
and dV (for cartesian grids) or dR and dTheta (for polar grids) that are appropriate
for the current view.
6. To toggle between a visible and invisible grid, select Grid Visible. The default is a
visible grid.
7. To toggle between a visible and invisible grid key, select display key. The key is a
set of axes showing the orientation of the local coordinate system’s u- and v-axes.
The default is a visible grid key. Note that the key can be displayed for both
cartesian and polar grids.
8. Choose OK or press Return.
The grid in the active subwindow redisplays with the desired grid settings.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
303
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Default Grid Settings
Inappropriate Grid Spacing
Invisible Grid Points
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Default Grid Settings
To change the default grid settings for new subwindows, use the Model/Defaults/Window Settings command in conjunction with the Window/Grid commands to make the
current subwindow grid the default.
> To change the default grid settings:
1. Set up the desired grid settings in a subwindow using the Window/Grid command
(described in the previous section).
2. Use the Model/Default/Window Settings command to make the grid in the
subwindow the default.
All new subwindows will use the grid settings from this subwindow.
Inappropriate Grid Spacing
If you select a grid spacing that is too small for individual grid points to be displayed, the
following message appears:
Grid spacing is too small
> To modify the grid spacing:
1. Choose OK. Before you can continue, you must reset the grid spacing.
2. Do one of the following:
• Choose Suggested Spacing so that the software can calculate the values of
values of dU and dV or dR and dTheta that are appropriate for the current view.
• Enter larger values for dU and dV or dR and dTheta so that you can continue.
Invisible Grid Points
Occasionally, when you zoom out of the drawing, the software is unable to display grid
points using the current grid spacing. Choose Suggested spacing to change the grid
spacing so that the grid can be viewed again.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
304
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Go Back
Contents
Window Menu
Window/Fill Solids
Use the Window/Fill Solids command to display all closed objects in the active subwindow as filled-in solids instead of wire frame outlines. This is usually done to make the
visual relationships between objects easier to see, especially for complicated models.
This command can only be accessed if the objects are currently displayed as the wire
frame outlines.
> To display closed objects as filled-in solids:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Fill Solids.
All closed objects in the active subwindow display as solids, similar to the objects shown
below.
Note:
While the objects are displayed as filled solids, the Window/Fill Solids command toggles to the Window/Wire Frame command. To display the filled-in
objects as wire frame outlines, choose Window/Wire Frame.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
305
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows
Window/New
Window/Close
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Change View
Window/Coordinate System
Window/Grid
Window/Fill Solids
Window/Wire Frame
Window/Project Name
Window Menu
Window/Wire Frame
Use the Window/Wire Frame command to display all closed objects in the active subwindow as wire frame outlines instead of filled-in solids.
This command can only be accessed if the objects are currently displayed as filled solids.
> To display objects as wire frame outlines:
1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.
2. Choose Window/Wire Frame.
All closed objects in the active subwindow display as wire frame outlines.
Note:
While the objects are displayed as wire frame outlines, the Window/Wire
Frame command toggles to the Window/Fill Solids command. To display
the objects as filled-in solids, choose Window/Fill Solids.
Window/Toolbar
Use the Window/Toolbar commands to adjust the position of the toolbar based on the
following locations:
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Hide
Show
Moves the toolbar to a vertical column to the left of the window.
Moves the toolbar to a vertical column to the right of the window.
Moves the toolbar to the top of the window. This is the default setting.
Moves the toolbar to the bottom of the window.
Removes the toolbar from the active window.
Displays any hidden toolbar.
Window/Project Name
Go Back
Contents
Choose this command to access the window of the project you select.
> To access the window:
• Choose Window/Projectname from the menu bar.
The window you selected appears.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
306
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Help Menu
Help Commands
Help/About Help
Help/On Context
Help/On Module
Help/On Control Panel
Help/Contents
Help/Index
Help/Shortcuts
Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys
Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar
The Help Menu
Help Menu
Use the commands on the Help menu to:
•
•
•
•
•
Access information on the commands of the current module.
Access information on the current module you are in.
Access information on the online help system and documentation.
Access the table of contents and index of the online documentation.
Learn about the hotkeys.
Each Help menu is specific to a particular module and varies accordingly. For example,
when you choose Help from the menu bar in the 2D Modeler, a menu similar to the following one appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
307
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Help Menu
Help Commands
Help/About Help
Help/On Context
Help/On Module
Help/On Control Panel
Help/Contents
Help/Index
Help/Shortcuts
Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys
Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar
The Help Menu
Help Commands
The commands in the Help menu are:
About Help
On Context
On Module
On Control
Panel
Contents
Index
Shortcuts
Provides help on the online help system.
Provides help on the commands of the Maxwell 2D Modeler.
Accesses the online documentation on the features of the current module.
Accesses the online documentation for the Maxwell Control Panel.
Lists the table of contents for the online documentation.
Lists the index for the online help system.
Provides a list of hotkeys and the uses of tool bars.
Not all of these commands are present in all modules.
Help/About Help
Use this command to learn about how to use the features of the online documentation,
such as the scroll buttons, the menu commands, and the hyperlinked commands.
> To find out information on how to use the online documentation:
• Choose Help/About Help.
The information on how to use the online documentation appears.
Help/On Context
Use this command to access help on the command you have chosen.
Go Back
> To access help on a particular command or user-interface item:
1. Choose Help/On Context. A cursor with a question mark appears.
2. Click on the menu item, icon, or portion of the screen on which you wish to access
the online documentation.
Contents
A help screen appears, displaying pertinent information on the item you have chosen.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
308
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Help Menu
Help Commands
Help/About Help
Help/On Context
Help/On Module
Help/On Control Panel
Help/Contents
Help/Index
Help/Shortcuts
Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys
Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar
The Help Menu
Help/On Module
Use this command to get a description of the current module, its features, functions, and
uses. This command takes you to the first page of the online documentation on the current module.
> To access the online documentation:
• Choose Help/On Module.
The first page of the online documentation on the current module appears.
Help/On Control Panel
Use this command to access the online documentation on the Maxwell Control Panel.
> To access the Maxwell Control Panel online documentation:
• Choose Help/On Control Panel from the menu bar.
Help/Contents
Use this command to read the information on the table of contents. The table of contents
is organized by module in the sequence in which you are expected to use the modules.
> To access the table of contents:
• Choose Help/Contents from the menu bar or Contents from the side window in the
online documentation.
The table of contents appears.
Help/Index
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Use this command to access the index. The index lists all headings, commands, and topics covered in the online documentation.
> To access the index:
• Choose Help/Index from the menu bar or Index from the side window in the online
documentation.
The index appears.
309
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Help Menu
Help Commands
Help/About Help
Help/On Context
Help/On Module
Help/On Control Panel
Help/Contents
Help/Index
Help/Shortcuts
Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys
Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar
The Help Menu
Help/Shortcuts
Use this command to get a list of hotkeys or uses of the tool bars. These allow you to execute commands much faster than by using the commands in the menu bar.
Hotkeys
Tool Bar
Lists and explains the hotkeys.
Explains the uses of tool bars.
Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys
Hotkeys are keystrokes designed to execute commonly used viewing and exiting commands. These appear beside their respective commands in the pull-down menus.
Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar
Tool bars are a list of icons that allow you to execute commonly used commands without
the need to pull down the menus. Each module has a different tool bar.
To execute a tool bar command, click on the icon of that command. To see an explanation
of the icon command, click on the icon and hold down the left mouse button.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
310
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData
PlotData Commands
PlotData Tool Bar
PlotData Overview
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
PlotData and the 2D Modeler
Creating a Plot Using a Parametric Equation
Opening a Plot From a Data
File
Opening a Plot Created in
Maxwell Software
PlotData
PlotData
Choose PlotData to do the following:
•
•
•
•
Create and save plots of parametric equations. Saved plots can be reloaded into
PlotData.
Plot data files that contain lists of coordinates to be plotted.
Save plots to files that can be read into the 2D Modeler. Plotted curves are saved as
2D objects, allowing you to create shapes that cannot be drawn in the 2D Modeler.
Load the following types of plots from other Maxwell software packages:
• Voltage and current plots from Maxwell Spicelink or Maxwell Strata.
• Radiation plots from Maxwell Eminence or Ansoft HFSS.
When you choose PlotData, the PlotData window appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
311
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData
PlotData Commands
PlotData Tool Bar
PlotData Overview
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
PlotData and the 2D Modeler
Creating a Plot Using a Parametric Equation
Opening a Plot From a Data
File
Opening a Plot Created in
Maxwell Software
PlotData
PlotData Commands
The following menus are available in PlotData:
File
View
Plot
Tools
Window
Open plots, save plots to disk files, export plots to 2D Modeler file format, and exit PlotData.
Specifies location of tool bar, changes display of window, accesses command prompt.
Display coordinates, specify plot type and scale, modify the appearance
of the plot axes and the plotted graphs, plot parametric equations, and
clear plots from the window.
Accesses the signal calculator; shows coordinates in the window.
Zoom into or out of an area of a plot, fit the plot to the window, and display the plot in a perfect square.
PlotData Tool Bar
There is a tool bar along the side of the PlotData window. Each button in the tool bar represents a different PlotData command and serves as a short cut for executing the command.
Click on the icon below for an explanation of the command it represents.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
312
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData
PlotData Commands
PlotData Tool Bar
PlotData Overview
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
PlotData and the 2D Modeler
Creating a Plot Using a Parametric Equation
Opening a Plot From a Data
File
Opening a Plot Created in
Maxwell Software
PlotData
PlotData Overview
PlotData is a stand-alone plotting utility that allows you to create plots and then save, display, and modify those plots. It can also be used to view and modify plots created in Maxwell Spicelink and Maxwell Eminence. Plots can be created in two ways:
•
•
By plotting parametric equations, which allows you to view complex curves and solve
simultaneous equations. Other plotting information — such as starting and ending
values for plotted parameters and the maximum number of points on a plot — can
also be specified.
By reading in a plot from a data file containing a list of coordinates. This data file can
be created using any text editor, and can contain experimental results, program
output, or any other type of data that needs to be plotted. Data files can also contain
plot titles, x- and y-axis labels, and plot legends. The format for these files is described
in Using Data Files under the Things to Consider section at the end of this chapter.
Before creating a plot, specify the plot type (cartesian or polar), the scale of the plot,
whether degrees or radians are used, and so forth. The specific information you enter
depends on the type of plot you selected.
After creating a plot, you can modify its appearance by changing such things as the axis
scales, labels, line types, and line color.
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
As an alternative to accessing the Maxwell Spicelink, Ansoft HFSS, or other Maxwell post
processors, use PlotData to read in and view plots, change the way they are displayed,
and save them to files. This lets you quickly view and analyze plots of current or voltage
signals and radiation plots without having to open a project and run the full version of
Maxwell software.
Go Back
Since PlotData files have the same file format as plot files created and saved in the
Spicelink and Ansoft HFSS Post Processors, PlotData plots can also be viewed in Maxwell Spicelink and Ansoft HFSS.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
313
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData
PlotData Commands
PlotData Tool Bar
PlotData Overview
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
PlotData and the 2D
Modeler
Creating a Plot Using a Parametric Equation
Opening a Plot From a Data
File
Opening a Plot Created in
Maxwell Software
PlotData
PlotData and the 2D Modeler
Plots can be exported to files that can be read into the 2D Modeler, which is accessed
through the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Utilities panel
Maxwell 2D Field Simulator (version 6.1 or later)
Maxwell 2D Extractor
Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor
Maxwell Ensemble
The curves in the plot are saved as 2D geometric objects in the exported file. This
enables you to create spirals or other complicated objects that cannot be drawn in the 2D
Modeler, but may be needed for a geometric model of a structure.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
314
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData
PlotData Commands
PlotData Tool Bar
PlotData Overview
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
PlotData and the 2D Modeler
Creating a Plot Using a
Parametric Equation
Opening a Plot From a Data
File
Opening a Plot Created in
Maxwell Software
PlotData
Creating a Plot Using a Parametric Equation
By plotting parametric equations, you can visualize complex curves and solve simultaneous equations graphically.
> To create a plot using parametric equations:
1. Choose Tools/Calculator to access the signal calculator.
2. Choose Equations to create the signal equation.
3. Load the signal into the loaded signals list and exit the calculator.
4. Choose Plot/New to plot the equation.
An example of a plot created using the parametric equations
theta(t) = t
r(t) = cos(3*t) + sin (3*t)
is shown below. After creating the plot, use the Plot/Format Axes or Plot/Format
Graphs commands to modify its appearance.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
315
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData
PlotData Commands
PlotData Tool Bar
PlotData Overview
PlotData and Other Maxwell Software Products
PlotData and the 2D Modeler
Creating a Plot Using a Parametric Equation
Opening a Plot From a
Data File
Opening a Plot Created in
Maxwell Software
PlotData
Opening a Plot From a Data File
You can plot the information in a file that contains user-defined data or output from other
programs. The data file formats that can be read into PlotData are explained in more
detail in Using Data Files.
> To plot a data file in PlotData:
1. Use the Plot/Options command to set the plot type, axis scales, and so forth. Be
aware that the type of plot (cartesian or polar) cannot be specified in a data file.
You must select it before reading in the data file.
2. Choose Plot/Open to open the data file. A file browser appears.
3. Select the plot you wish to open.
4. Choose OK.
The data is then plotted. Use the Plot/Format Axes or Plot/Format Graphs commands
to reformat the plot.
Note:
Only one file can be open at a time. Using this command erases all existing
plots from the PlotData window.
Opening a Plot Created in Maxwell Software
> To open a plot created in the Maxwell Software Post Processors:
1. Choose Plot/Open. A file browser appears.
2. Select the plot you wish to open.
3. Choose OK.
Go Back
If you wish, you can modify the plot and save it to a new file. Use the Plot/Format Axes
and Plot/Format Graphs commands to edit the plot as explained in the Plot/Format
Axes and Plot/Format Graphs sections. Use the Plot/Save As command to save the
plot to a file as explained in the Plot/Save As section.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
316
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData File Menu
File/Import Signals
File/Print
File/Printer Setup
File/Exit
PlotData
PlotData File Menu
Use the File commands to access an existing plot and exit PlotData.
Import Signals
Print
Printer Setup
Exit
Imports saved equations.
Prints the active window, subwndow, or area in a selected region.
Specifies the printing options.
Exits PlotData.
File/Import Signals
Use the File/Import Signals command to import a saved signal into the plot.
> To import an equation:
1. Choose Import. The Load Signals window appears.
2. Select any existing signal you wish to import.
3. Choose Add to add the signal to the Loaded Signals list. If you accidentally load
an unwanted signal, select the unwanted signal and choose Delete.
4. If the signal you wish to import is not present, choose More. The File Open
window appears, asking you to select a file to import.
5. Select the name of the file you wish to import.
6. Choose OK to import the file into the Load Signals window.
7. Repeat step 3 until you have loaded in all the signals you need.
8. Choose Done.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
317
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData File Menu
File/Import Signals
File/Print
File/Printer Setup
File/Exit
PlotData
File/Print
Choose File/Print to print the entire active window, the active subwindow, or a selected
rectangle in the active subwindow to a printer you have previously defined.
> To print the entire window:
• Choose File/Print/Entire Window.
The image in the window prints to a hardcopy.
> To print the active subwindow:
1. Choose File/Print/Subwindow. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
2. Select the subwindow you wish to print.
The image in the active subwindow prints to a hardcopy.
> To print the selected rectangle:
1. Choose File/Print/Rectangle. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
2. Select a point to represent the upper left corner of the region you wish to print.
3. Select a point to represent the lower right corner of the region you wish to print.
The region you defined is printed to a hardcopy.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
318
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData File Menu
File/Import Signals
File/Print
File/Printer Setup
File/Exit
PlotData
File/Printer Setup
Choose File/Printer Setup to specify the printing options.
> To define the printer options:
1. Choose File/Printer Setup from the menu bar. A pop-up window appears.
2. Specify the printer on which you wish to send the output.
3. Define the Form of the paper you wish to print the output on.
4. Specify the Orientation of the printed output.
5. If necessary, define whether you wish the output to be one or two-sided.
6. Specify any appropriate Maxwell Printing Options such as the color or the
background or whether you wish the output to be black and white only.
7. Specify the Margins of the printed output.
8. Choose OK to accept the printer options.
File/Exit
Choose File/Exit to exit PlotData.
> To exit PlotData:
1. Choose File/Exit. The following message appears:
Are you sure you want to exit?
2. Choose Yes.
You then exit PlotData.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
319
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Make Square
View/Tool Bar
View/Command Prompt
View/Status Bar
PlotData
PlotData View Menu
Use the View commands to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zoom in towards and away from the active view.
Fit the entire plot in the active view.
Fit the plot in a perfect square.
Change the location of the tool bar.
Access the command prompt window.
Toggle the status bar on and off.
The View commands perform the following functions:
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Fit All
Make Square
Tool Bar
Command
Prompt
Status Bar
Zooms in to an area of the plot, magnifying the view.
Zooms out of an area of the plot, shrinking the view.
Fits all curves so that they do not extend beyond the window.
Displays the plot in a perfect square.
Changes the location of the tool bar.
Accesses the command prompt window, allowing you to enter script
commands to execute actions.
Toggles the display of the status bar.
View/Zoom In
Use this command to zoom in on a region of the active window, magnifying the view.
Go Back
Contents
> To zoom in on the active region:
1. Choose View/Zoom In.
2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed in one of the
following ways:
• Click the left mouse button on the point.
• Enter coordinates of the point in the coordinates fields.
3. Select the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard.
The system then expands the selected region to fill the window.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
320
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Make Square
View/Tool Bar
View/Command Prompt
View/Status Bar
PlotData
View/Zoom Out
Use this command to zoom out on the field of view in the active view window, shrinking
the view.
> To zoom away from the field of view:
1. Choose View/Zoom Out.
2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed out in one of the
following ways:
• Click the left mouse button on the point.
• Enter coordinates of the point in the coordinates fields.
3. Choose the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard.
The system then redraws the screen, changing the current view to fit in the selected area.
View/Fit All
Use this command to display the entire plot in the active plot window.
> To display the entire plot in the active window:
1. Select a window as the active one.
2. Choose View/Fit All.
The plot in the active window expands to include all items in the model. The size of the
window does not change.
View/Make Square
Use the View/Make Square command to rescale the plot and resize the PlotData window so that the plot displays in a perfect square.
Go Back
> To display the plot as a perfect square:
• Choose View/Make Square.
The plot is then rescaled to a perfect square, setting its aspect ratio to one.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
321
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Make Square
View/Tool Bar
View/Command Prompt
View/Status Bar
PlotData
View/Tool Bar
Use these commands to display or hide the tool bar and change its location.
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Show
Hide
Moves the tool bar to the left side of the window.
Moves the tool bar to the right side of the window.
Moves the tool bar to the top of the window (the default).
Moves the tool bar to the bottom of the window.
Displays the tool bar (the default). Toggles with View/Toolbar/Hide.
Hides the tool bar. Toggles with View/Toolbar/Show.
The tool bar is not available in some modules.
> To move the tool bar to a new location, follow these general steps:
1. Choose View/Toolbar.
2. Select one of the six positions to place the tool bar in its new location.
View/Command Prompt
The command prompt window appears below the plot window. This window is where you
can perform operations in the current module by entering Maxwell commands through the
keyboard, instead of accessing them via hotkeys, menus, or the tool bar icons.
Use this command to display or hide the command prompt window.
> To display or hide the command prompt:
• Choose View/Command Prompt.
> To complete the command name in the command prompt window:
• Press Escape.
> To repeat your previous command in the command prompt window:
• Press Ctrl-P.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
322
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Make Square
View/Tool Bar
View/Command Prompt
View/Status Bar
PlotData
View/Status Bar
Use this command to display or hide the status bar at the bottom of the current plot window. The status bar displays information about the command that’s currently being executed.
> To display or hide the status bar:
• Choose View/Status Bar.
A check box appears next to this command if the status bar is visible.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
323
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
PlotData Plot Menu
Use the commands in the PlotData Plot menu to:
•
•
•
•
Create or open new signal plots.
Save or export existing signal plots.
Close an open signal plot.
Specify the plot type, the axes of the plot, and any settings.
The following commands are available on the Plot menu:
New
Open
Save
Save As
Close
Edit Plot
Export .sm2
Equation
Format Axes
Format Graphs
Opens a new signal plot.
Opens a saved signal plot.
Saves the current signal plot.
Saves the current signal plot under a new file name.
Closes the current signal plot.
Edits a signal plot.
Exports the current signal plot as an .sm2 file.
Plots and calculates parametric equations.
Specifies plot labels and headings. Also determines the major and
minor tick marks and grid settings for the axes.
Specifies information displayed in the legend, including markers,
line and line color, and the names of the plotted curves.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
324
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Plot/New
Choose Plot/New to create a new signal plot. You must have previously used the File/
Import Signals or the Tools/Calculator command to create data to plot.
> To create a new signalplot:
1. Choose Plot/New. The Edit Plot window appears.
2. Select the data set you wish to plot.
3. Select whether you want a Cartesian, Polar, or Smith Chart plot.
4. If you selected Cartesian, toggle on Separate Y Scales to separate the y scales.
These scales are color coded. This setting is not saved in the .dat file.
5. If you selected Polar, toggle on Far-Field pattern to display a far-field pattern in
the plot.
6. If you selected Smith Chart, skip to step 9.
7. Select whether you want the X Scale to be linear or logarithmic.
8. Select whether you want the Y Scale to be linear or logarithmic.
9. Choose OK to plot the data or choose Cancel to cancel the action.
Plot/Open
Choose Plot/Open to open and plot a signal file. You can open the following types of files:
•
Plot files created in PlotData, the Maxwell Spicelink Post Processor, the Maxwell
Strata Post Processor, or the Maxwell Eminence PlotData window.
• Data files that contain coordinates to be plotted.
> To open and plot a file:
1. Choose Plot/Open.
2. Search for and open the plot file (with extension *.dat) you wish to view
3. Choose OK to open the plot.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
325
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Plot/Save
Choose Plot/Save to save the current signal plot. If you have not previously defined a
name for the current plot, you will be prompted to enter a name and directory for the plot,
as described in Plot/Save As.
> To save a previously named signal plot:
• Choose Plot/Save.
The signal plot is saved.
Plot/Save As
Choose Plot/Save As to save a signal plot to a file. This file can later be loaded back into
PlotData.
> To save a signal plot:
1. Choose Plot/Save As.
• If you are running the software on the workstation, a file browser window appears.
• If you are running the software on the PC, the Save As window appears.
2. Move to the directory where you want to save the file.
3. Enter the name of the file in the Select plot datafile field. The software
automatically appends a .dat extension to the name you enter.
4. Choose OK.
5. If the file already exists, a prompt appears asking if you want to overwrite it. Do one
of the following:
• Choose Yes to overwrite the file and return to the PlotData window.
• Choose No if you do not want to overwrite the file. You return to the pop-up
window, where you can specify another name for the file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
326
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Plot/Close
Choose Plot/Close to close the current signal plot.
> To close the current signal plot:
• Choose Plot/Close.
The signal plot closes.
Plot/Edit Plot
Choose Plot/Edit Plot to change the attributes of the current signal plot.
Edit Plot
> To modify the plot:
1. Choose Plot/Edit Plot. The Edit Plot window appears, listing all the loaded
signals.
2. Select the Loaded Signal you wish to edit.
3. Select the signal plot type:
Cartesian
Creates a cartesian (XY) plot.
Polar
Creates a polar (Rθ) plot.
Smith Chart Creates a smith chart.
Go Back
Contents
4. If you selected Cartesian:
• Select whether you want the X Scale to be linear or logarithmic.
• Select whether you want the Y Scale to be linear or logarithmic
• Toggle on Separate Y Scales to separate the y scales. These scales are color
coded. This setting is not saved in the .dat file.
5. If you selected Polar, select the Angle Units and define the Far-field pattern:
• Leave Far-field pattern unselected to display the polar coordinates such that the
theta coordinate is rotated counter-clockwise from the positive x-axis.
• Select Far-field pattern to display the polar coordinates such that the theta
coordinates are rotated clockwise from the positive y-axis. This is the preferred
mode for plotting radiation.
6. Choose OK to plot the data or choose Cancel to cancel the action.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
327
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Plot/Export .sm2
Choose Plot/Export .sm2 to save a signal plot in the 2D Modeler’s file format (.sm2
extension). The curves on the plot are saved as 2D objects in the exported file. Legends,
axes, labels, markers and so forth are not exported to the .sm2 file.
Saving a plot file in this format allows you to include complex objects such as spirals in
your 2D models. These types of objects cannot be created in the 2D Modeler, but can
easily be plotted in PlotData.
> To save a signal plot in 2D Modeler format, do the following:
1. Choose Plot/Export .sm2
2. Move to the directory where you want to save the file, following the procedure
described in the general Plot/Save As documentation.
3. Enter the name of the file in the Select model file field. The software automatically
appends a .sm2 extension to the name you enter.
4. Choose OK.
5. If the file already exists, a prompt appears asking if you want to overwrite it. Do one
of the following:
• Choose Yes to overwrite the file and return to the PlotData window.
• Choose No if you do not want to overwrite the file. You return to the pop-up
window, where you can specify another name for the file.
Due to scale differences, exported plot files loaded into the 2D Modeler may not appear
exactly as they do in PlotData. However, the dimensions of the objects (the plotted
curves) remain. Each line on a plot read into the 2D Modeler is automatically assigned an
object name — objectn if it is a closed curve; openobjn if it is an open curve.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
328
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Entering a Parametric
Equation
Example of a Plotted
Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
Go Back
PlotData
Plot/Equation
Choose Plot/Equation to enter and plot a parametric equation. This enables you to view
complex curves of the signal or to solve simultaneous equations. The following window
appears.
> To plot or enter a parametric equation:
1. Choose Plot/Equations. The Plot Parametric Equation window appears.
2. Enter x(t) and y(t) to specify the desired functions of t to be plotted on each axis.
3. Enter t_min and t_max to specify the range of t values.
4. Enter the number of sample points you wish to appear in the plot.
5. Optionally, choose Variables to create new variables for the parametric equation.
Details for doing this are given in Entering a Parametric Equation.
6. Optionally, select Overlay to overlay the plot onto a different plot.
7. Choose OK or press Return.
The equation is then plotted.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
329
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Entering a Parametric
Equation
Example of a Plotted
Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Entering a Parametric Equation
> To set up a parametric equation for plotting, enter the following information:
x(t)
(Cartesian plots only.) The continuous function for the independent
variable defined along the x-axis, used for the parameter t in the parametric equation. For example, enter sqrt(t) in this field to use the
square root of t as the x value for the plot.
y(t)
(Cartesian plots only.) The continuous function for the dependent
variable defined along the y-axis, used for the parameter t in the parametric equation. For example, enter sin(t) in this field to plot a sine
wave as the y value for the plot.
theta(t)
(Polar plots only.) The continuous function for the independent variable defined along θ, used for the parameter t in the parametric equation.
r (t)
(Polar plots only.) The continuous function for the dependent variable
defined along r, used for the parameter t in the parametric equation.
t_min
Starting point of the plot (the minimum value of t to be plotted).
t_max
Ending point of the plot (the maximum value of t to be plotted).
#samples
Number of points per graph.
Variables
Allows you to define mathematical functions for the parametric equation. This window is the same as the Evaluator window.
Overlay
Superimposes the new curve over the existing plot in PlotData. If you
do not choose this option, the existing plot is deleted.
Help
Lists information for creating functions. For a more detailed explanation, refer to the documentation for the Evaluator window.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
330
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Entering a Parametric
Equation
Example of a Plotted
Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Example of a Plotted Equation
An example of a plotted parametric equation is shown below. This spiral plot was created
using the following values:
theta(t)
r(t)
t_min
t_max
#samples
10*t
sqrt(t)
0
180
100
The Plot/Format Graphs command was then used to display markers on the sample
points, showing how the graph is interpolated between them.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
331
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot Axis Settings
Heading
X Label and Y Label
Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and
Ymax
Rmin and Rmax
Major Ticks and Major
Grids
Minor Ticks and Minor
Grids
Show Legends
Show Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
Go Back
Contents
PlotData
Plot/Format Axes
Use the Plot/Format Axes command to change:
•
•
•
•
•
The plot heading and axis labels.
The maximum and minimum coordinates displayed on the plot.
The number and type of tick marks to be drawn on the axes, and whether tick marks
are to be displayed.
Whether a grid is drawn on the major tick marks, minor tick marks, or both.
Whether a legend and plot axes are displayed.
When this command is selected, the following window appears. It also appears when you
double-click the left mouse button in a plot already displayed in the PlotData window.
> To change the plot’s axis settings:
1. Choose Plot/Format Axes.
2. Change the desired axis settings, as listed and explained below.
3. Choose OK or press Return.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
332
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot Axis Settings
Heading
X Label and Y Label
Xmin, Xmax, Ymin,
and Ymax
Rmin and Rmax
Major Ticks and Major
Grids
Minor Ticks and Minor
Grids
Show Legends
Show Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Plot Axis Settings
Heading
The title of the plot (the plot heading).
X Label and Y Label
Labels which identify the quantities that are plotted on the x- and y-axes can be entered in
the following fields:
X Label
Y Label
The label on the x-axis.
The label on the y-axis.
Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax
(Cartesian plots only.)
The minimum and maximum values that can be displayed on the x- and y-axes are controlled by the following fields:
Xmin
Ymin
Xmax
Ymax
The minimum value plotted on the x-axis.
The minimum value plotted on the y-axis.
The maximum value plotted on the x-axis.
The maximum value plotted on the y-axis.
Rmin and Rmax
(Polar plots only.)
For polar plots, the following fields appear:
Rmin
Rmax
The minimum radius that can be plotted.
The maximum radius that can be plotted.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
333
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot Axis Settings
Heading
X Label and Y Label
Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and
Ymax
Rmin and Rmax
Major Ticks and Major
Grids
Minor Ticks and Minor
Grids
Show Legends
Show Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Major Ticks and Major Grids
Displays the major tick marks and major grids using the following fields:
Major Ticks
Major Grids
Displays major tick marks on axes — that is, large axis divisions. By
default, major tick marks are shown on the plot’s axes.
Displays a grid on the major tick marks.
The following fields appear when you format cartesian plots:
X
Y
Sets major grids or ticks for the x-axis.
Sets major grids or ticks for the y-axis.
The following fields appear when you format polar plots:
Theta
R
Sets the major grid or tick marks for the θ-axis.
Sets the major grid or tick marks for the r-axis.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
334
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot Axis Settings
Heading
X Label and Y Label
Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and
Ymax
Rmin and Rmax
Major Ticks and Major
Grids
Minor Ticks and
Minor Grids
Show Legends
Show Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
PlotData
Minor Ticks and Minor Grids
These display minor tick marks and grids with the following fields:
Minor Ticks
Minor Grids
Displays minor tick marks — that is, the smaller divisions between the
large axis divisions. By default, minor tick marks are shown on the
plot’s axes. There are ten minor tick marks between two major marks.
Displays a grid on the minor tick marks.
The following fields appear when you format cartesian plots:
X
Y
Displays minor grid or tick marks for the x-axis.
Displays minor grid or tick marks for the y-axis.
The following fields appear when you format polar plots:
Sets the grid marks for the θ-axis.
Sets the tick marks for the r-axis.
Theta
R
Note:
The default values for the X and Y, or R and Theta fields depend on the range
of values that are plotted and whether you’ve changed the plot’s viewing area
via the Window/Zoom In, Window/Zoom Out, or Window/Fit All commands.
Show Legends
This displays a legend in the plot which labels each plotted curve and shows its color and
line style. You can specify the text that appears in these legends in the Plot/Format
Graphs command.
Show Axes
This displays the plot axes. This option is chosen by default.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
335
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
Line Formats
Color
Show Markers
Marker
Width
Style
Show Line
Go Back
PlotData
Plot/Format Graphs
Use the command Plot/Format Graphs to:
•
Change how the lines are drawn on the plot. The following attributes may be changed:
Line color, width, and style.
Whether markers are used to indicate data points and the type of symbol that
marks data points.
• Whether the line is visible on the plot.
•
•
When you choose Plot/Format Graphs, the Graph Settings window appears:
> To change the format of plotted lines:
1. Choose Plot/Format Graphs.
2. Select the desired plot in the list box at the top of the pop-up window. Its name
then appears in the field below the list box.
3. If desired, change the format of the line. Details for doing this are given under the
Line Formats section. As you change each attribute, the line is redrawn on the plot.
4. Repeat step 3 to change formats and display polynomials for other curves.
5. Choose OK to change the format of the graph or Cancel to cancel the command.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
336
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
Line Formats
Color
Show Markers
Marker
Width
Style
Show Line
PlotData
Line Formats
The format of a plotted line can be modified using the following fields.
Color
The color of the plotted line.
> To change the color:
1. Choose Color. A palette of colors appears.
2. Select the desired color.
The curve is redrawn in the selected color.
Show Markers
Determines whether markers are displayed on plot sample points.
> To toggle between visible and invisible markers:
• Select Show Markers.
By default, no markers appear.
Marker
The style of markers that are drawn on the sample points. If Show Markers is selected,
the X marker appears by default.
> Follow the steps below to change the marker style:
1. Choose Show Markers.
2. Select Marker. A palette of markers appears.
3. Select the desired marker. The line redraws using the selected marker on each
data point.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
337
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Plot Menu
Plot/New
Plot/Open
Plot/Save
Plot/Save As
Plot/Close
Plot/Edit Plot
Plot/Export .sm2
Plot/Equation
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
Line Formats
Color
Show Markers
Marker
Width
Style
Show Line
PlotData
Width
The width of the line on the plot.
> To change the line width:
1. Select Width. A menu of line widths appears.
2. Select the desired line width. The line redraws with the selected line width.
Style
The type of line that can be drawn (continuous, dashed and so forth).
> To change the line style:
1. Select Style field. A menu of line styles appears.
2. Select the desired line style. The line redraws using the selected line style.
Show Line
Determines whether the curve is displayed on the plot.
•
•
If Show Line is selected (the default), the line appears on the plot.
If Show Line is not selected, the line is not visible on the plot. Also, you cannot
change the Color, Width, and Style fields.
If Show Markers is selected and Show Line is not, the curve’s data point markers will still
be visible on the plot. However, if neither Show Markers nor Show Line are selected, the
selected curve will not be visible.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
338
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
PlotData
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData Tools Menu
Use the Tools commands to:
•
•
•
•
Create and load a signal to plot.
Preview a plot after performing calculations on it.
Import an existing signal you wish to plot.
Show the coordinates of the plotted points.
The commands in the tools menu are:
Calculator
Accesses the Signal Calculator, allowing you to create and import signals to plot.
Show
Displays either the x-and y-coordinates of a point in a cartesian plot, or
Coordinates the θ- and r-coordinates of a point in a polar plot.
Tools/Calculator
Use this command to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create a signal to plot from an equation.
Perform numerical operations on signals.
Import or delete existing signals.
Preview a signal you wish to plot.
Copy a signal into the calculator stack.
Specify the order of the polynomial equation and fit it to a signal.
Take a sample of the data.
Execute a Fast Fourier Transform on the signal.
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
339
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData
When you choose Tools/Calculator from the menu bar, the Signal Calculator appears:
The loaded signals appear in the upper left corner of the Signal Calculator. This is the
region where the signals may be plotted from. You must load any signals you wish to plot
into the Loaded Signals field prior to plotting them. Any data existing in the stack after
exiting the window will be lost.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
340
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData
Tools/Show Coordinates
Use the Tools/Show Coordinates command to display the coordinates of selected
points. Either cartesian or polar coordinates may be displayed.
> To view a point’s coordinates:
1. Display the desired plot.
2. Choose Tools/Show Coordinates. The cursor appears as crosshairs.
3. Move the mouse to the desired point on the plot.
4. Click the left mouse button. The point you chose is marked with a cross, and a
pop-up window appears in the upper right corner, displaying the coordinates of the
selected point.
5. To view the coordinates of additional points, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. Click the right mouse button to exit the Tools/Show Coordinates command.
Use this commands to show the exact coordinates of the specified points of the plot.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
341
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack Commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData
Signal Calculator
Access the signal calculator with the Tools/Calculator command.
Stack Commands
Stack commands allow you to manipulate the values in the registers of the stack.
Push
This reloads the quantity in the top register onto the top of the stack, creating a new register. The contents of the top two registers are identical.
Pop
This deletes the top register from the stack.
RlDn
This rolls the bottom register to the top of the stack, moving the other registers down the
stack.
RlUp
This rolls the top register to the bottom of the stack, moving the other registers up the
stack.
Exch
This exchanges the top two registers in the stack.
Clear
This clears the contents of the stack.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
342
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack Commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData
Name/Constant
Use this command to change the name of the quantity in the top register of the calculator
stack.
> To change the name of the quantity in the top register:
1. Enter the new name in the Name field. This name cannot begin with a number, a
plus sign (+), or a minus sign (-).
2. Choose Enter.
The quantity takes on the newly defined name.
> To enter a constant in the top register:
1. Use the keyboard or number buttons to enter a value in the Constant field.
2. Choose Enter.
The number appears in the top register.
Deg (Degrees)
Select this to enter and display angles in degrees.
Rad (Radians)
Select this to enter and display angles in radians.
Arc
Select this to perform inverse trigonometric functions as opposed to standard operations.
For example, to take the ARCSINE of a value in the calculator stack, toggle this button on
then choose SIN from the Signal Calculator.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
343
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
PlotData
Calculator Buttons
The calculator buttons have the following functions on the top register of the stack:
neg
sin
cos
tan
∫
abs
sinh
cosh
tanh
d/dx
1/x
exp
yx
P->R
R->P
ln
log
x(y)
min
max
sort
splt
REC
Sum
n
Flp
dB
PLY
Takes the negative value.
Takes the sine value.
Takes the cosine value.
Takes the tangent value.
Calculates the integral.
Takes the absolute value.
Takes the hyperbolic sine value.
Takes the hyperbolic cosine value.
Takes the hyperbolic tangent value.
Takes the derivative.
Takes the inverse value.
Takes the exponential value.
Computes y to the x (yx).
Converts polar to rectangular values.
Converts rectangular to polar values.
Calculates the square root.
Calculates the natural log.
Takes the logarithmic value.
Maps the signal in the top register against the signal in the second one.
Finds a minimum Y value of the signal and the X value at which it occurred.
Finds a maximum Y value of the signal and the X value at which it occurred.
Sorts Y values of the signal in ascending order.
Splits the signal in the top register of the calculator stack into segments.
Begins recording a macro file.
Takes the summation.
Computes the total number of points in the signal.
Exchanges the top two values in the top register of the stack.
Converts the signal to decibels (20 log10).
Plays back a macro file.
344
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData
Numeric Functions
The following functions affect the Name/Constant field. This field is where the numbers
you enter into the signal appear.
+
*
/
CHS
EEX
CLE
[Pi]
Adds the top two registers in the stack.
Subtracts the top two registers in the stack.
Multiples the top two registers in the stack.
Divides the top two registers in the stack.
Changes the sign of the Name/Constant field.
Adds an exponent to the number in the Name/Constant field.
Clears the Name/Constant field.
Enters pi (3.14159) into the Name/Constant field.
Other Functions
The following buttons do not directly affect the calculator stack, but are necessary in defining and analyzing parts of the signals.
Eqn...
Fit...
Sample...
FFT...
Copy
Load
Preview
Creates a signal from an expression.
Defines how many orders of the polynomial you want in your signal
equation and the number of points you wish to plot. Generates an
expression to approximate the signal in the top register.
Takes a data sample of the current signal.
Executes a Fast Fourier Transform of the current signal.
Copies an existing signal to the calculator stack.
Loads the current signal to be plotted from the calculator.
Previews the current signal as a plot.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
345
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
Go Back
PlotData
Signal Equation
You may create a signal equation to plot from an equation.
> To create the signal equation:
1. Choose Eqn. The Signal Equation window appears.
2. Enter the name of the equation in the Name field.
3. Enter the value for x(t).
4. Enter the value for y(t).
5. Enter a value for t_min. This is the minimum value for time.
6. Enter a value for t_max. The is the maximum value for time.
7. Enter the number of samples for the plot.
8. If necessary, choose Variables to define any Equation Variables and choose
Done when you are finished.
9. Choose OK to accept the equation or choose Cancel to cancel the equation.
Load Signals
Use this commands to import signals from plot files (.dat), variable tables (.ptd), or circuit
simulations.
> To import a signal to the Signal Calculator:
1. Choose Import. The Load Signals window appears.
2. Select any existing signal you wish to import.
3. Choose Add to add the selected signal to the Loaded Signals list. If you
accidentally load an unwanted signal, select the unwanted signal and choose
Delete.
4. If the signal you wish to import is not present, choose More. The File Open
window appears, asking you to select a file to import.
5. Select the name of the file you wish to import.
6. Choose OK to import the file into the Load Signals window.
7. Repeat step 3 until you have loaded in all the signals you need.
8. Choose Done.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
346
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
PlotData
Previewing a Signal
Previewing a plot allows you to see the intermediate results of the calculator operations.
> To preview a plot:
1. Select an existing signal from the calculator stack.
2. Choose Preview.
If you are satisfied with the plot, choose Load to load the signal into the Loaded Signals
field. Only loaded signals may be plotted.
Copying a Signal to the Calculator Stack
You may need to copy a signal from the Loaded Signals list to the calculator stack in
order to perform further analyses on it.
> To copy an existing signal to the calculator stack:
1. Select the signal you wish to load back into the calculator stack from the Loaded
Signals list.
2. Choose Copy. The signal is loaded into the top register of the stack.
Polynomial Interpolation
You may specify the interpolation order of polynomials to generate a polynomial approximation of the signal.
> To define the polynomial Interpolation:
1. Choose Fit. The Polynomial Interpolation window appears.
2. Enter the Interpolation Order for the equation.
3. Enter the Number of Points to plot for the fitted signal.
4. Choose OK to accept the interpolation settings or choose Cancel to cancel the
action.
The polynomial approximation is generated and appears in the top register of the stack.
Go Back
Deleting a Signal
Contents
> To delete a signal from the Loaded Signals list:
1. Select the names of the signals you wish to delete.
2. Choose Delete.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
The signal vanishes from the list.
347
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Tools Menu
Tools/Calculator
Tools/Show Coordinates
Signal Calculator
Stack commands
Calculator Buttons
Numeric Functions
Other Functions
Signal Equation
Load Signals
Previewing a Signal
Copying a Signal to the
Calculator Stack
Polynomial Interpolation
Deleting a Signal
Data Sampling
Fast Fourier Transform
Go Back
PlotData
Data Sampling
You may wish to analyze a small sample of that data in a limited range or filter out data
from the sample.
> To take a sample of the data:
1. Choose Sample. The Data Sampling window appears.
2. Select whether you want to define the sample in terms of Time or Points.
3. Select whether you want to specify the sample in terms of Spacing or Size.
4. Enter the Start value. The value indicates the initial time value of the sample.
5. Enter the Stop value. This value indicates the final time value of the sample.
6. Enter the Spacing of the time intervals.
7. Choose OK to accept the sample settings or choose Cancel to cancel the action.
Fast Fourier Transform
You can create a Fast Fourier Transform of the signal in the top register of the stack.
> To create a Fast Fourier Transform:
1. Load a signal into the top register of the calculator stack.
2. Choose FFT. The Fast Fourier Transform window appears.
3. Specify whether you want the data window to display Rectangular, Parzen,
Welch, or Hanning functions. These are functions used to weight the data before
executing the FFT and provide a method in which to make an infinitely long
impulse response finite before passing it through the FFT. When provided with real
data, the FFT produces complex-valued results yielding the magnitude (Mag) and
phase (Phs) components.
4. Select the Up and Down buttons to specify the number of points used in the
transform. The Zero Pad value changes accordingly to maintain the difference
between the Points Used and the Zero Pad equal to the Total Points.
5. Choose OK to accept the transform or choose Cancel to cancel the action.
You return to the Signal Calculator which now displays the magnitude (Mag) and phase
(Phs) components of the selected signal. These complex-valued components may now
be plotted separately from the signal.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
348
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Window Menu
Window/Tile
Window/Cascade
Window/Close
PlotData Help
Using Data Files
Accessing PlotData Outside
of the Utilities Panel
Accessing PlotData from
the UNIX Prompt on the
Workstation
Accessing PlotData from
the Command Line on the
PC
Options
PlotData
PlotData Window Menu
After you have created a plot, use the Window commands to:
Tile
Cascade
Close
Tiles the plots, displaying them beside each other.
Cascades the plots, stacking them on top of each other.
Closes the active plot window.
Window/Tile
Use this command to display the plot windows beside each other.
> To display the plots in a tiled format:
• Choose Window/Tile.
The plots appear beside each other.
Window/Cascade
Use this command to stack the plot windows on top of each other.
> To display the plots in a cascaded format:
• Choose Window/Cascade.
The plots are cascaded. The active plot window appears on top of the others.
Window/Close
Use this command to close the active plot window.
> To close the active plot window:
• Choose Window/Close.
Go Back
The active plot window vanishes.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
349
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Window Menu
PlotData Help
Using Data Files
Accessing PlotData Outside
of the Utilities Panel
Accessing PlotData from
the UNIX Prompt on the
Workstation
Accessing PlotData from
the Command Line on the
PC
Options
PlotData
PlotData Help
The online help for PlotData is accessed through icons.
> To access help for the PlotData window:
• Click the left mouse button on the icon in the tool bar with a ?.
Use the scroll bar to scroll through the different types of information:
•
•
•
•
Overview and purpose of PlotData.
Commands and options for accessing PlotData outside of the Utilities panel.
Requirements for the contents of a data file.
Procedure for reading in a data file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
350
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Window Menu
PlotData Help
Using Data Files
Accessing PlotData Outside
of the Utilities Panel
Accessing PlotData from
the UNIX Prompt on the
Workstation
Accessing PlotData from
the Command Line on the
PC
Options
PlotData
Using Data Files
Any file with a .dat extension that contains pairs of x and y or θ and r coordinates can be
read into PlotData. The general format for these files, which can also include axis labels,
a plot title, and a legend, is given below.
Plot Heading
X Axis Label
Y Axis Label
coordinates
. .
. .
. .
Graph legend
Multiple data sets can be included in a file. They must be separated by a line of dashes or
by a legend for the graph.
> Do the following to create a data file:
1. To create the data file, use any ASCII text editor.
2. Specify the type of plot, grid settings, whether or not additional plots are
superimposed, and other formatting characteristics. Be aware that the type of plot
(cartesian or polar) cannot be specified in a data file. You must select it before
reading in the data file.
3. To load and plot the data, follow the procedure in the Opening a Plot From a Data
File section.
For example, the following file contains data for three graphs to be plotted.
Before reading in this data, define it as a cartesian plot with a linear scale of the x- and y-
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
351
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Window Menu
PlotData Help
Using Data Files
Accessing PlotData Outside
of the Utilities Panel
Accessing PlotData from
the UNIX Prompt on the
Workstation
Accessing PlotData from
the Command Line on the
PC
Options
PlotData
axes. Then, load the data file using the Plot/Open command. The following plot appears:
Sample Plot 2
X Axis
Y Axis
1
1
2
4
3
9
4
16
5
25
Graph A
2
4
4
8
6
12
8
16
10
20
- - - - - - 1
1
2
8
3
27
4
64
5
125
•
•
•
The specified title, Sample Plot 2, appears at the top of the plot. If you do not specify
a title in the data file, it is not displayed.
The specified legend, Graph A, is displayed for the first graph. The second and third
graphs, which do not have specified legends, have graph2 and graph3 displayed by
default.
The labels X Axis and Y Axis are displayed on the plot’s x- and y-axes. If you do not
specify axis labels in the data file, none appear.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
352
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Window Menu
PlotData Help
Using Data Files
Accessing PlotData Outside of the Utilities Panel
Accessing PlotData from
the UNIX Prompt on the
Workstation
Accessing PlotData from
the Command Line on
the PC
Options
PlotData
Accessing PlotData Outside of the Utilities Panel
PlotData can be accessed outside of the Utilities panel in several different ways.
Accessing PlotData from the UNIX Prompt on the Workstation
As an alternative to accessing PlotData from the Utilities panel, access it from the UNIX
prompt with the following command:
plotdata -tplot_type -sscale -uangle_unit -f -nmaxpoints -iorder -a
datafile
The available options are listed in the Options section.
Accessing PlotData from the Command Line on the PC
You can also access PlotData from the command line in Microsoft Windows.
Go Back
Contents
> Do one of the following:
• Access PlotData from the Run window:
1. Choose Start/Run. The Run window appears.
2. Enter the following in the Open field:
drive:path/plotdata.exe option
where drive and path are the drive and path in which the plotdat.exe file exists.
The option is one of those specified under the Options section.
• Access PlotData from the Command Prompt window:
1. Access the Command Prompt window, which functions in the same way as
MS-DOS. Use the options specified under the Options section. For more
information on how to use this window, refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s
Guide.
2. Enter the following at the command prompt:
drive:path/plotdata.exe option
where drive and path are the drive and path in which the plotdat.exe file exists.
The option is one of those specified under the Options section.
PlotData then appears and displays the graph you specified.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
353
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
PlotData Window Menu
PlotData Help
Using Data Files
Accessing PlotData Outside of the Utilities Panel
Accessing PlotData from
the UNIX Prompt on the
Workstation
Accessing PlotData from
the Command Line on the
PC
Options
PlotData
Options
The following options are available for accessing PlotData outside of the Utilities panel:
-t
The type of plot, where plot_type is:
CARTESIAN A cartesian plot (the default).
POLAR
A polar plot.
-s
The x- and y-axis scales for cartesian plots, where scale is:
LINLIN
Linear scale for x- and y-axes (the default).
LINLOG
Linear scale for x-axis and logarithmic scale for y-axis.
LOGLIN
Log scale for x-axis and linear scale for y-axis.
LOGLOG
Logarithmic scale for x- and y-axes.
-u
The unit of angular measurement for polar plots, where angle_unit is:
DEGREES
Angles are given in degrees.
RADIANS
Angles are given in radians.
-f
Allows far-field pattern display mode for polar plots in Ansoft HFSS.
-n
maxpoints
Maximum number of points in the graph (default is 1000).
-i
order
The order of least-square interpolation for curve smoothing (must be from -1 through 12).
-a
Turns off the automatic assignment of different colors and linestyles for
superimposed graphs.
datafile (Optional.) The name of the data file to be read into PlotData.
Note:
If you access PlotData via the command line and read in an existing plot,
the command line options will be overwritten by the plot’s options.
Because UNIX is case-sensitive, enter the options listed in the table
exactly as they appear on the workstation version of the software.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
354
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator
Commands
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
Go Back
Contents
The Expression Evaluator
Evaluator
Use the Expression Evaluator to do the following:
•
•
•
Calculate values for mathematical expressions.
Update values of variables already assigned mathematical expressions.
Maintain a listing of commonly used functions and expressions.
When you choose Evaluator from the Utilities panel, the Expression Evaluator window
appears:
Expression Evaluator Commands
The commands in the Expression Evaluator window are:
Update
Add
Delete
Done
Dataset
Help
Modifies a variable or an expression already added to the Evaluator.
Adds a variable name and expression.
Deletes the variable name, its expression and value from the listing.
Exits the Expression Evaluator.
Accesses the Edit Data Set window for creating datasets.
Displays information on the procedure for entering and changing a
variable name and an expression, the available operators, and intrinsic functions.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
355
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator
Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
The Expression Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Overview
The Expression Evaluator acts as a calculator for evaluating algebraic expressions. It can
be used to compute closed formulas and compare analytical results with experimental
results for any of the Maxwell software products.
There are two ways you can use the Expression Evaluator:
•
•
By entering the independent variables of a function, assigning values to these
variables, and then entering the dependent variable and corresponding function.
By reading in the commonly used functions and the independent variables assigned to
values from an expressions file. This is described in more detail in the Expressions
File section, which appears later in this chapter.
When the values of the independent variables change, the current values of the corresponding functions can be updated and the new values displayed.
For example, the standard formula for measuring the voltage across a circuit component,
given the current and resistance, is V=IR. When the independent variables I or R change,
their values can be entered in the Expression Evaluator and then the value for V can be
updated.
Help
The Help button in the Expression Evaluator provides addition hints on entering data in
the window without accessing the online documentation for it.
> To access more information on the Expression Evaluator without starting up the online
help system:
• Choose Help.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
356
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
The Expression Evaluator
Adding an Expression
> To enter a function:
1. Enter the variable name in the field to the left of the equal sign above the Update
button.
2. Enter the numeric value or mathematical expression for the function in the field to
the right of the equal sign (above the Add button).
Note:
For more information on defining functions — including a list of valid operators, pre-defined constants and intrinsic functions — choose Help. Functions, constants, and operators are also described in Defining Expressions.
3. Choose Add or press Return.
The function is then listed in the following fields:
Name
Value
Expression
Displays the name of the variable.
Displays the numeric value of the expression.
Displays the expression.
When you have defined more functions than can fit in the window, a vertical scroll bar
appears. Use it to view functions that are not displayed.
Updating an Expression
> To modify an existing function:
1. Select the function by clicking the left mouse button on it in the list box.
2. Change the name or expression.
3. Choose Update or press Return.
The updated function is displayed.
Go Back
Contents
Deleting an Expression
> To delete a function:
1. Select the desired function.
2. Choose Delete.
The selected function is deleted.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
357
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
The Expression Evaluator
Defining Expressions
Define the expressions using the following names and operators.
Variable Names
Variable names must start with a letter, and may include alphanumeric characters and
underscores (_).
Note:
The names of intrinsic functions and pre-defined constants cannot be used
as variable names.
Valid Operators
The operators that can be used to define a function have a sequence in which they will be
performed within the function.
The following list shows both the valid operators and the sequence in which they are
accepted (listed in decreasing precedence):
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
!
**
*
/
%
+
<<
>>
==
!=
>
<
>=
factorial
unary minus
exponentiation
multiplication
division
modulus
addition
subtraction
left shift
right shift
equals
not equals
greater than
less than
greater than equals
358
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Expression Evaluator
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
16
17
18
19
20
<=
&
|
^
~
less than equals
bitwise and
bitwise or
bitwise xor
1’s complement
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
359
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Expression Evaluator
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Intrinsic Functions and Variables
The following intrinsic functions may be used to define expressions:
Function
abs
Description
Absolute value
abs(x)
sin
Sine
sin(x)
cos
Cosine
cos(x)
tan
Tangent
tan(x)
asin
Arcsine
asin(x)
acos
Arccosine
acos(x)
atan
Arctangent (in range
of -90 to 90 degrees)
atan(x)
atan2
Arctangent (in range
of -180 to 180 degrees)
atan2(y,x)
pow
Raise to power (xy)
pow(x,y)=xy
sinh
Hyperbolic Sine
sinh(x)
cosh
Hyperbolic Cosine
cosh(x)
tanh
Hyperbolic Tangent
tanh(x)
if
If
if(cond_exp,true_exp, false_exp)
pwlx
Piecewise Linear x
pwlx(variable, form_exp, dataset_exp)
pwly
Piecewise Linear y
pwly(variable, form_exp, dataset_exp)
dset
Dataset Definition
dset((x0, y0), (x1, y1), ... (xn, yn))
sqrt
Square Root
sqrt(x)
exp
Exponential
exp (x)=ex
ln
Natural Log
ln(x)
lg
Log to base 2
lg(x)
360
Syntax
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
The Expression Evaluator
Function
log
Description
Log to base 10
Syntax
round
Round (round to
nearest)
round(x)
floor
Floor (round down)
floor(x)
ceil
Ceiling (round up)
ceil(x)
deg
Degrees (convert from
radians)
deg(x)
rad
Radians (convert from
degrees)
rad(x)
sign
Sign
sign(x)
rand
Random Number
(between zero and 1)
rand()
log(x)
All trigonometric functions expect their arguments to be in degrees. Likewise, inverse trigonometric functions’ return values are in given in degrees.
Intrinsic function names are reserved, and may not be used as variables.
Variable Names
Variable names must start with an alphabetic character, and may include alphanumeric
characters and the underscore character.
Pre-defined Constants
The symbol, pi (π), is the only available pre-defined constant. It may not be reassigned a
new value.
Go Back
Contents
Numerical Values
Numerical values may be entered in Ansoft’s shorthand for scientific notation. For example, 5x107 could be entered as 5e07.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
361
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
Go Back
The Expression Evaluator
Piecewise Linear Functions
The following piecewise linear intrinsic functions are accepted in expressions:
pwlx (variable, form_expression, dataset_expression)
pwly (variable, form_expression, dataset_expression)
Form Expressions
Piecewise linear functions accept a form expression as their second parameter, which is
either bounded, constant, periodic, linear, or an expression that evaluates to a number
based on the following table:
1
2
3
4
bounded
constant
periodic
linear
The pwlx function interpolates along the x axis and returns a corresponding y value. The
pwly function interpolates along the y axis and returns a corresponding x value.
Dataset Expressions
Dataset expressions take the form:
dset((x0,y0), ..., (xn,yn))
These expressions may be used as the third parameter to piecewise linear (pwlx and
pwly) functions, and may also be assigned to variables, in which case the variable may
be used as the third parameter to pwlx and pwly functions.
Dataset expressions are derived from a series of points in a plot created in the Edit
Dataset window. Each plot consists of straight line segments whose vertices represent
their end points. A curve is fitted to the segments of the plot and an expression is derived
from the curve that best fits the segmented plot. The created expression is then used in
the piecewise linear intrinsic functions.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
362
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
Expressions File Format
The Expression Evaluator
Expressions File
A set of often-used variables may be automatically loaded by inserting the “ExpressionsFile” directive in the maxwellrc file.
> To automatically load commonly used variables and functions into the Expression
Evaluator:
• If you are running the software on a workstation, add the following line to your
maxwellrc file:
ExpressionsFile
exp_file
where exp_file is the full pathname of the file that contains the expressions. You
must exit and re-start the Maxwell Control Panel for this change to take effect.
• If you are running the software on a PC, add the same line as indicated for the
maxwellrc file (shown in the previous step) to your maxwell.ini file.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
363
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Evaluator
Expression Evaluator Cmnds
Expression Evaluator Overview
Help
Adding an Expression
Updating an Expression
Deleting an Expression
Defining Expressions
Variable Names
Valid Operators
Intrinsic Functions and
Variables
Variable Names
Pre-defined Constants
Numerical Values
Piecewise Linear Functions
Form Expressions
Dataset Expressions
Expressions File
Exiting the Expression
Evaluator
Expressions File Format
The Expression Evaluator
Exiting the Expression Evaluator
> To exit the Evaluator:
• Choose Done.
The window closes, returning you to the main window.
Expressions File Format
Use any text editor to create the expressions file, which must have the following format:
B_SYMTAB variable name = numerical value variable name = mathematical
expressionE_SYMTAB
where:
•
•
•
B_SYMTAB appears at the beginning of the file, marking the start of the list.
The formats for variable name, numerical value, and mathematical expression are
described under the Defining Expressions section.
E_SYMTAB appears at the end of the file, marking the end of the expression list.
For example, the following expressions file could be used to load the formula for computing the skin depth of induced currents in a conductor due to oscillating magnetic fields:
B_SYMTAB sigma = 5.8e7 omega = 1e6*pi mu = 4e-7*pi D =
omega*sigma*mu skin = sqrt(2/D)E_SYMTAB
These variables and their values automatically appear when you access the Expression
Evaluator if you specified the file name and directory path of the expressions file in your
maxwellrc file (on the workstation) or maxwell.ini file (on the PC). New functions could
then include these variables.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
364
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
Datasets
The Datasets module is accessed through the Expression Evaluator and allows you to:
•
•
•
•
Create, open, or input existing datasets.
Insert or delete coordinates in the dataset.
Modify the display of the dataset.
Move or rescale the dataset.
When you choose Dataset from the Expression Evaluator, the following window appears:
Dataset Editor
The Edit Dataset window is divided into a data entry area and a plot window.
Go Back
The data entry area houses the data entry fields in which you will enter the coordinates of
each point on the plot. The plot window rests on the right side of the Edit Dataset window
and displays the plot once the first two points have been defined. The plot is automatically
updated with each newly entered or modified point.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-1
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Creating Datasets
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
Datasets Menu Commands
The following menu commands appear in the Edit Dataset window:
File
Edit
View
Arrange
Help
Creates, opens, saves, and imports datasets.
Inserts or deletes coordinates for the dataset.
Modifies the display of the view window.
Moves or rescales the coordinates of the dataset.
Accesses the online documentation.
Creating Datasets
Datasets are collections of plotted data points that can be extrapolated into an equation
based on the piecewise linear makeup of the plot. Each plot consists of straight line segments whose vertices represent their end points. A curve is fitted to the segments of the
plot and an expression is derived from the curve that best fits the segmented plot. The
created expression is then used in the piecewise linear intrinsic functions
> To create a new dataset:
1. Choose Dataset from the Expression Evaluator. The Edit Dataset window
appears.
2. Choose File/New. New blank dataset fields appear in the data entry area.
3. Enter the x- and y-coordinates for the dataset in the blank fields. Once you have
entered the coordinates and move to the next field, the plot window begins to add
the points to the plot, adjusting the view with each newly entered point.
4. When you have finished entering the coordinates, choose File/Save As and enter
a name for the dataset. Datasets are saved in the expressions file.
5. Choose OK.
The dataset plot is extrapolated into an equation that appears in the Expression Evaluator. The equation may now be used in parametric analyses.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-2
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
File/New
File/Open
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Import Text File
File/Exit
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
Dataset File Menu
Use the File commands to do the following:
New
Open
Close
Save
Save As
Import
Exit
Creates a new dataset.
Opens an existing dataset.
Closes an active dataset, leaving the data entry area blank.
Saves the active dataset.
Saves the active dataset under a new name.
Imports a dataset into the data entry area.
Exits the Edit Dataset window.
File/New
Choose this command to create a new dataset.
> To create a new dataset:
• Choose File/New. New blank data fields appear in the data entry area. Note that when
you first access the Edit Dataset window, blank fields appear by default, ready to
receive data.
Now you may enter the new data in the blank data fields. When you have finished entering
the data, choose File/Save to save the entered values.
File/Open
Choose this command to open an existing dataset file.
Go Back
Contents
> To open an existing datasets file:
1. Choose File/Open. The Open Dataset window appears, listing all the available
datasets in the problem.
2. Select the dataset to open from the Datasets list.
3. Choose OK to open the dataset or Cancel to cancel the action. The Open Dataset
window vanishes.
The dataset is loaded into the data entry area and its respective plot appears in the plot
window.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-3
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
File/New
File/Open
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Import Text File
File/Exit
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
File/Close
Choose this command to close the active dataset and render the data entry area blank.
If you choose this command prior to saving any changes made, a window appears, asking
you to save the changes before closing. In such a case, do one of the following:
•
•
•
Choose Yes to save the changes and exit the dataset fields.
Choose No to ignore any changes and exit the dataset fields.
Choose Cancel to continue entering coordinates in the dataset fields.
File/Save
Choose this command to save the existing dataset. Datasets are stored within the expressions file.
If this is the first time you have saved the dataset file, this command functions identically
to the File/Save As command.
File/Save As
Choose this command to save the active dataset in the data entry area under a new
name.
> To save the dataset under a new name:
1. Choose File/Save As. The Save As window appears, listing the names and
expressions assigned to existing datasets.
2. Enter a new name for the dataset in the Select Name field.
3. Choose OK to accept the new name and save the dataset or Cancel to cancel the
save.
The dataset is saved and the Save As window closes.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-4
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
File/New
File/Open
File/Close
File/Save
File/Save As
File/Import Text File
File/Exit
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
File/Import Text File
Choose this command to import a text file into the datasets window. Note that if a dataset
is already active in the data entry area, you will be prompted to save the changes to the
dataset and exit it as though you had executed the File/Close command.
> To import a text file:
1. Choose File/Import/Text File. The Import Text File browser appears.
2. Select the file to import or enter the filename in the Select Text File field.
3. Choose OK to import the text file or Cancel to cancel the import.
File/Exit
Choose this command to exit the Edit Dataset window. If any changes have not yet been
saved, a window appears, prompting you to save the changes. Do one of the following:
•
•
•
Choose Yes to save the changes and exit the dataset fields.
Choose No to ignore any changes and exit the dataset fields.
Choose Cancel to continue entering coordinates in the dataset fields.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-5
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Edit/Insert Coords/
Before
Edit/Insert Coords/
After
Edit/Delete Coords
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
Dataset Edit Menu
Use the Edit commands to do the following:
Insert Coords Inserts a blank set of coordinates into the data entry table.
Before
Inserts new coordinate fields before a selected point.
After
Inserts new coordinate fields after a selected point.
Delete Coords Removes a data point from the data entry table.
Edit/Insert Coords/Before
Choose this command to insert a blank set of coordinates fields before the active point.
> To insert a new point before an existing point:
1. Select the point before which you will insert a new data point.
2. Choose Edit/Insert Coords/Before.
A new set of blank coordinates fields appears, displacing each subsequent point by one
place. Once you specify the coordinates of the new point, the plot is redrawn.
Edit/Insert Coords/After
Choose this command to insert a blank set of coordinates fields after the active point.
> To insert a new point after an existing point:
1. Select the point after which you will insert a new data point.
2. Choose Edit/Insert Coords/After.
A new set of blank coordinates fields appears, displacing each subsequent point by one
place. Once you specify the coordinates in the blank fields, the plot is redrawn.
Edit/Delete Coords
Choose this command to delete the selected point.
Go Back
Contents
> To delete the selected point:
1. Select the x- or y-coordinates field for the point to delete.
2. Choose Edit/Delete Coords.
The selected point is deleted. The plot is redrawn in the plot window, eliminating the
deleted point.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-6
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Show Coordinates
View/Plot Settings
View/Graph Settings
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
Dataset View Menu
Choose the View commands to change the view of the display in the Edit Dataset window.
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Fit All
Show
Coordinates
Plot Settings
Graph
Settings
Zooms in on the plot, expanding the view of the selected area.
Zooms away from the plot, shrinking the view of the selected area.
Fits the entire plot in the plot window.
Displays the coordinates of the selected point.
Specifies the axes labels and grid marks in the plot.
Specifies the color, width, and style of the plotted lines.
View/Zoom In
Choose this command to zoom in on a region of the active plot window, magnifying the
view.
> To zoom in on the plot window:
1. Choose View/Zoom In.
2. Click the left mouse button on the point of the region that is to be zoomed in upon.
3. Choose the point in the diagonal corner, again using the mouse.
The system then expands the selected region to fill the window and adjusts the axes settings accordingly.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-7
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Show Coordinates
View/Plot Settings
View/Graph Settings
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
View/Zoom Out
Choose this command to zoom out on the field of view in the active plot window, shrinking
the view.
> To zoom out and shrink the plot:
1. Choose View/Zoom Out.
2. Click the left mouse button on the point of the region that is to be zoomed out.
3. Choose the point in the diagonal corner, again using the mouse.
The system then redraws the selected region to fill the window and adjusts the axes settings accordingly.
View/Fit All
Choose this command to display the entire plot in the active plot window.
> To fit the plot completely in the plot window:
• Choose View/Fit All.
The view in the plot window expands to include the entire plot. The size of the window
itself does not change.
View/Show Coordinates
Choose this command to display the coordinates of points on the plot.
Go Back
> To view the x- and y-coordinates of points on the plot:
1. Plot the desired data. To get a closer view of a graph to more accurately determine
its coordinates, use the View/Zoom In command to zoom into that part of the plot.
2. Choose View/Show Coordinates.
3. Move the mouse to the desired point on the plot.
4. Click the left mouse button. A window appears showing the coordinates of the
selected point. The point is marked with a cross.
5. To view the coordinates of additional points, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. To exit the View/Show Coordinates command, click the right mouse button.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-8
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Show Coordinates
View/Plot Settings
View/Graph Settings
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
View/Plot Settings
Choose this command to change the following information associated with a plot:
•
•
•
•
•
The scale of the x- and y-axes.
The number and type of tick marks (if any) to be drawn on the x- and y-axes.
Whether a grid is drawn on the major tick marks, minor tick marks, or both.
The minimum and maximum data values that are displayed on the axes.
The plot heading and labels on the x- and y-axes.
The following window appears when this command is selected. This command is identical
to the Plot/Format Axes command in the PlotData utility:
Note:
Go Back
As an alternative to executing View/Plot Settings, you can double-click the
right mouse button in the window containing your plot.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-9
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
View/Zoom In
View/Zoom Out
View/Fit All
View/Show Coordinates
View/Plot Settings
View/Graph Settings
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Datasets
View/Graph Settings
Choose this command to change how graphs are drawn on a plot. The following attributes
may be changed:
•
•
•
•
Line color, width, and style.
Whether markers are used to indicate data points.
The type of symbol that marks data points.
Whether the graph is visible on the plot.
This command is identical to Plot/Format Graphs in the PlotData utility.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-10
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Arrange/Move
Arrange/Scale
Dataset Help Menu
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets
Dataset Arrange Menu
Choose the Arrange commands to do the following.
Move
Scale
Moves the selected points to a new location.
Scales the x- and y-coordinates of the points in the plot.
Arrange/Move
Choose this command to move a selected number of points along the x- and y-axes. Note
that this command is inactive if no points have been defined on the plot.
> To move the points:
1. Choose Arrange/Move. The Move Coordinates window appears:
2. Enter the number of the first coordinate to move in the First Coord Number field.
3. Enter the number of the final coordinate to move in the Last Coord Number field.
All points within the defined range will be moved by the offset distance. By default,
all points in the plot are selected.
4. Enter the X Offset. This defines the distance by which the selected range of
coordinates will be moved along the x-axis. This value can be negative.
5. Enter the Y Offset. This defines the distance by which the selected range of
coordinates will be moved along the y-axis. This value can be negative.
6. Choose OK to accept the points to move and their offsets, or Cancel to cancel the
action.
The plot is redrawn, moving the selected points by their specified offset distances.
Datasets-11
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Arrange/Move
Arrange/Scale
Dataset Help Menu
Go Back
Contents
Datasets
Arrange/Scale
Choose this command to modify the scale of the point coordinates in the plot.
The scale refers to the coordinates of a point in relation to its initial location. For example,
if you specify 2 as a scale factor for the x-coordinates, the points are moved so that the x
distance between the initial point and the new point is doubled, so that points located at
(1,4) and (2,5) would be moved to (2, 4) and (4,5) respectively. Similarly, if you specify 0.5
as the scale factor for these same points, the points move to (0.5, 4) and (1,5).
> To scale the points:
1. Choose Arrange/Scale. The Scale Coordinates window appears:
2. Enter the number of the first coordinate to scale in the First Coord Number field.
3. Enter the number of the final coordinate to scale in the Last Coord Number field.
All points within the defined range will be modified by the scaling factor. By default,
all points in the plot are selected to be scaled.
4. Enter the X Scale Factor. This multiplies the x-coordinates of each selected point.
Note that a scale factor of 0 will shift all x-coordinates to the x-axis.
5. Enter the Y Scale Factor. This multiplies the y-coordinates of each selected point.
Note that a scale factor of 0 will shift all y-coordinates to the y-axis.
6. Choose OK to accept the points and the scaling factors, or Cancel to cancel the
action.
The plot is redrawn using the new coordinates.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-12
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Datasets
Dataset Editor
Datasets Menu Commands
Dataset File Menu
Dataset Edit Menu
Dataset View Menu
Dataset Arrange Menu
Dataset Help Menu
Help/About Help
Help On Context
Help/On Dataset Editor
Datasets
Dataset Help Menu
Choose the Help commands to do the following.
About Help
Moves the selected points to a new location.
On Context
Scales the x- and y-coordinates of the points in the plot.
On Dataset Editor Accesses the online documentation on the Dataset Editor.
Help/About Help
Choose this command to access information on the online documentation, its format, and
navigation.
Help On Context
Choose this command to access the online documentation for a selected area of the window.
> To access the online documentation:
1. Choose Help/On Context. The cursor changes to a question mark icon.
2. Click on the menu item or area of the screen on which you require more
information.
The online documentation for the selected topic appears.
Help/On Dataset Editor
Choose this command to access the online documentation on the Dataset Editor.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Datasets-13
Copyright © 1999-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Material Manager
The Material Manager allows you to derive new materials from the existing materials
database or create new materials altogether.
When you choose Materials from the Utilities Panel, the following window appears:
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
377
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Any material property that can be specified by entering a constant can also be specified
using a mathematical function. Functional material properties can be used to:
•
Define material properties that vary in magnitude according to their position inside an
object.
• Define material properties whose value is given by a mathematical relationship — for
instance, one relating it to another property’s value.
> In general, to define a functional material property:
1. Add or derive a material as described in the Adding a New Material section.
2. Choose Options to specify which material properties are constant and which are
functional.
3. Choose Functions to define math functions that describe the material property’s
behavior.
4. Enter the appropriate function name as the value for the material property.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
378
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Options
Choose Options to:
•
•
Identify which material properties vary as functions and which remain constant.
Select which two material properties may be entered, and which two are computed
from them.
For each material property, select one of the following:
•
•
•
Constant. The material property’s value is constant throughout an object (the default).
Functional. The material property’s value is a function.
• For scalar material properties such as relative permittivity, relative permeability,
and conductivity, the function defines the value of the material property at all
points.
• For vector material properties such as polarization and magnetization, the function
defines the magnitude of the vector at all points. Its direction is constant and is
defined when you assign the material to an object.
Vector Function. If a material property (such as magnetization) is a vector, specify
whether its direction and magnitude are constant or are a function of position. This
option also allows you to define radial and tangential vector material properties such
as tangential magnetization in a material.
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material Properties
When defining a new material, only two of the four available material properties need to
be specified. The values of the other two properties are dependent on these properties,
and can be computed from the two you enter. This prevents you from over-specifying a
material’s properties.
Choose Options to pick the properties you would like to enter for a material. To select an
editable property, click on the select button next to the property.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
379
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Magnetostatic Properties
Select two of the following magnetostatic properties:
Mu
Hc
Br
Mp
The relative permeability, µr.
The magnetic coercivity, Hc.
The magnetic retentivity, Br.
The permanent dipole magnetization, Mp.
These properties are related by:
B = µ o ( ( 1 + χ m )H + M p ) = µ o ( µ r H + M p )
B = µo µr ( H + H c )
where:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
B is the magnetic flux density.
H is the magnetic field.
µ0 is the permeability of free space, 4π×10-7 webers/ampere-meter.
µr is the relative permeability.
Hc is the magnetic coercivity.
Mp is the permanent dipole magnetization.
χm is the magnetic susceptibility.
The magnetic retentivity, Br, represents the value of B in a material when H goes to zero.
These relationships then reduce to:
Br = µo M p = µo µr H c
Thus, only two quantities are needed to specify the magnetic properties of the material.
The other two can be obtained using this relationship.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
380
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Electrostatic Properties
Select two of the following electrostatic properties:
Er
Ec
Dr
Pp
The relative permittivity, εr.
The electric coercivity, Ec.
The electric retentivity, Dr.
The permanent polarization, Pp.
These properties are related by:
D = ε o ( 1 + χ )E + P p ε o ε r E + P p
D = εr ( εo E + Ec )
where:
•
•
•
•
•
•
E is the electric field intensity.
D is the electric flux density.
ε0 is the permittivity of free space, 8.854×10-12 C2/Nm2.
εr is the relative permittivity.
Ec is the electric coercivity.
χ is the electric susceptibility.
The electric retentivity, Dr, is the magnitude of D in a material when E equals zero. The
relationships above then become:
Dr = P p = εr Ec
Again, only two of these quantities are needed; the value of the other two can be found
using this relationship.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
381
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Functions
Choose Functions to define mathematical functions that give a material property’s value.
The following window appears:
> In general, to define a function:
1. Enter the function name in the field to the left of the equals sign.
2. Enter the expression for the function in the field to the right of the equals sign.
Note:
The predefined variables X, Y, Z, PHI, THETA, and R must be entered in capital
letters. X, Y, and Z are the axes. PHI is the angle between the X and Y axes.
THETA is the angle between the Y and Z axes. R is the distance from the origin.
3. Optionally, choose Dataset to define a piecewise linear expression for the
function.
4. Choose Add or press Return.
The function is then listed in the following fields:
Go Back
Contents
Name
Value
Expression
Displays the name of the function.
Displays the numeric value of the function (if applicable).
Displays the function.
5. When you finish adding functions, choose Done.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
382
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Modifying a Function
> To modify an existing function:
1. Select the function.
2. Change any variables, operators, intrinsic functions, or other factors.
3. Choose Update.
The updated function appears.
Deleting a Function
> To delete a function:
1. Select the function you wish to delete.
2. Choose Delete.
The selected function is deleted.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
383
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Vector Functions
Choose Vector Function to identify whether the direction and magnitude of vector material properties (such as magnetization) are constant or functional. Use this option to
define vector properties in which the magnitude and the direction of one or more components of the vector property:
•
•
•
Vary as a function of position
Are parametric
Depend on other properties
The Magnetization pop-up window appears when you choose Vector Fn.
> To define a vector function:
1. If the values for the x-, y-, or z-components of the vector are constants, enter the
value in the X Component, Y Component, and Z Component fields.
2. If the value of an x-, y-, or z-component is functional, choose the Function button
to the right of each field, and enter the function name in the X Component, Y
Component, or Z Component fields. If you do not specify a function or value, the
word UNDEFINED appears in the component field.
A “generic” vector is defined by its x-, y-, and z-components. The direction in which it
points depends on whether you have specified constant or functional values for the components. If they are constant, the vector points in a uniform direction. The magnetization
vector, M, below, varies in both magnitude and direction according to the relationship
Mx=X, My=Y, and Mz=Z.
You enter the x-, y-, and z-components and define whether they are functional or constant.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
384
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Radial Vector Functions
A radial vector lying within a single plane is defined to always point radially outward from a
center point. Radial vectors are defined in the general form:
M = M x ˆi + M y ˆj + M z kˆ
where for a vector lying in the yz-plane:
Mx = 0
y
M y = M -------------------------------2
2
2
x +y +z
z
M z = M -------------------------------2
2
2
x +y +z
Tangential Vector Functions
A tangential vector lying within a single plane is defined to point tangentially from a center
point. In effect, it is the tangent of a radial vector. Tangential vectors are defined in the
general form:
M = M ˆi + M ˆj + M kˆ
x
y
z
where for a vector lying in the xy-plane:
–y
M x = M -------------------------------2
2
2
x +y +z
x
M y = M -------------------------------2
2
2
x +y +z
Mz = 0
Go Back
Contents
Its orientation is defined when you assign a material to an object.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
385
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector
Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Functional and Vector Material Properties
The properties of some materials vary in magnitude according to the position inside an
object. For instance, conductivity and relative permeability could vary if there is a density
gradient across an object. Other material properties vary in direction according to the
position inside an object. For instance, the magnetization vector of some permanent magnets varies in direction at different points inside the magnet. Such material properties
must be defined as functions.
•
•
For functional properties, the system prompts you to specify the material’s orientation
to the object’s local coordinate system.
For vector properties such as magnetization and polarization, the system prompts you
to define the vector’s direction. (The fields for specifying an origin do not appear if the
vector property has a constant magnitude and direction.)
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
386
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Material Manager
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
Adding a New Material
You may add or derive a new material from any existing material in the database or create
a new material altogether. These materials may be either perfect conductors, anisotropic
materials, or nonlinear materials (whose relative permeability varies according to its associated BH-curve.)
Defining a Perfect Conductor
> To create a perfect conductor:
1. Choose Add. The new material name appears under Material Attributes.
2. Enter a new name for the material or accept the default. If you are deriving a new
material from an existing one, be sure to modify the name to reflect the change in
the original material.
3. Choose Perfect Conductor.
4. Enter the Relative Permittivity for the material.
5. Enter the Relative Permeability for the material.
6. Leave the Conductivity of the material set to INFINITY. By definition, perfect
conductors have infinite conductivity.
7. Enter the Imaginary Permeability of the material.
8. Enter the Magnetic Coercivity of the material.
9. Enter the Magnetic Retentivity of the material.
10. Enter the Magnetization of the material in amperes per meter.
11. Enter the Electric Coercivity of the material.
12. Enter the Electric Retentivity of the material.
13. Enter the Polarization of the material.
14. Choose Enter to accept the material.
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
387
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Material Manager
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
More
Go Back
Contents
Defining a New Anisotropic Material
Anisotropic materials depend on the direction of the magnetic field. In anisotropic materials, the permittivity and conductivity are tensors.
You only need to specify two of the following properties. The remaining properties can be
derived from those two. You may define the permittivity, conductivity, permeability, and
imaginary permeability of a material. For example, if you define the conductivity and the
permeability, the Material Manager derives the permittivity and the imaginary permeability of the material. To specify the material properties of an anisotropic material, the Anisotropic Material button must be active.
> To define the permittivity of a material:
1. Select Permittivity from the pull-down menu (the default).
2. Enter the values of diag[1], diag[2], and diag[3] in their respective fields. These
represent the diagonals of the axes of the material’s permittivity.
3. Enter the Polarization of the material’s permittivity.
> To define the imaginary permittivity of a material:
1. Select Imag. Permittivity from the pull-down menu (the default).
2. Enter the values of diag[1], diag[2], and diag[3] in their respective fields. These
represent the diagonals of the axes of the material’s permittivity.
> To define the electrical loss tangent of a material:
1. Select Elec. Loss Tan from the pull-down menu (the default).
2. Enter the values of diag[1], diag[2], and diag[3] in their respective fields. These
represent the diagonals of the axes of the material’s permittivity.
> To specify the conductivity of the material:
1. Choose Conductivity.
2. Enter the values of diag[1], diag[2], and diag[3] in their respective fields. These
represent the diagonals of the axes of the material’s conductivity.
> To specify the permeability of the material:
1. Choose Permeability.
2. Enter the values of diag[1], diag[2], and diag[3] in their respective fields. These
represent the diagonals of the axes of the material’s permeability.
3. Enter the Magnetization of the material’s permeability.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
388
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
> To define the magnetic loss tangent of a material:
1. Select Mag. Loss Tan from the pull-down menu (the default).
2. Enter the values of diag[1], diag[2], and diag[3] in their respective fields. These
represent the diagonals of the axes of the material’s permittivity.
> To specify the imaginary permeability:
1. Choose Imag. Permeability.
2. Enter the values of diag[1], diag[2], and diag[3] in their respective fields. These
represent the diagonals of the axes of the material’s imaginary permeability.
When you have completed defining the material properties, choose Enter to accept the
new anisotropic material or choose Revert to cancel the action.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
389
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining a Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Defining a Nonlinear Material
Nonlinear materials are materials in which their relative permeability, µ, is a function. In
these materials, the magnetic flux density varies nonlinearly with the magnetic field.
> To create a nonlinear material:
1. Choose Add. The new material name appears under Material Attributes.
2. Enter a new name for the material for accept the default. If you are deriving a new
material from an existing one, be sure to modify the name to reflect the change in
the original material.
3. Choose Perfect Conductor.
4. Enter the Relative Permittivity for the material.
5. Choose B H Curve to define the Relative Permeability for the material. See
Entering a B H Curve for further information on entering BH-curves.
6. Enter the Conductivity of the material.
7. Enter the Imaginary Permeability of the material.
8. Enter the Magnetic Coercivity of the material.
9. Enter the Magnetic Retentivity of the material.
10. Enter the Magnetization of the material in amperes per meter.
11. Enter the Electric Coercivity of the material.
12. Enter the Electric Retentivity of the material.
13. Enter the Polarization of the material.
14. Choose Enter to accept the material.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
390
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
The Material Manager
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
More
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Entering a BH-Curve
When you choose BH Curve, the following window appears.
> To enter a BH-curve:
1. Choose Add Point.
2. Enter the points on the curve. Do one (or both) of the following:
• To enter points with the mouse, double-click the left mouse button on the points in
the display area. Start at B=0, which is the value of Hc, the magnetic coercivity.
• To enter points with the keyboard, enter the H and B values of each point in the H
and B fields at the bottom of the window:
a. Double click the mouse in the H field.
b. Enter the H value of the point.
c. Press the TAB key to move to the B field.
d. Enter the B value of the point.
e. Choose Enter or press Return to accept the point.
391
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
If you enter a curve whose slope is less than that of the permeability of free space,
an error message appears.
3. When you finish entering the curve, double-click the mouse on the last point in the
curve. If you are using keyboard entry, choose Enter or press Return twice.
The system then draws the BH-curve according to the points you specified.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
392
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BHCurve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Deleting a BH-Curve
> Choose Clear All to delete a BH-curve.
Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve
> To modify the B and H values of the points on a BH-curve:
1. Choose Move Point.
2. Click the left mouse button on the new control point on the BH-curve (the squares
marking the input points).
3. Move the point to the new coordinates using the mouse, and click the left mouse
button again. (Alternatively, enter the new B and H values of the point in the B and
H fields, then choose Enter.)
4. When you are finished moving points, click the right mouse button.
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
> To add points to a BH-curve:
1. Choose Add Point. The last point in the BH-curve is automatically selected.
2. Specify the B and H values of additional points on the curve using the mouse or
the keyboard as described under Entering a BH-Curve.
3. When you finish entering the curve, double click the mouse on the last point in the
curve. If you are using keyboard entry, choose Enter or press Return twice.
The system redraws the BH-curve, adding the new points.
Importing a BH-Curve
> To read a BH-curve from a file:
1. Choose Import. A pop-up window appears.
2. Enter the directory path name of the BH-curve, and select the BH-curve file type.
3. Choose OK.
Exporting a BH-Curve
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
After you have created the BH-curve for your derived material, you can export it.
> To save a BH-curve to a file:
1. Choose Export. A pop-up window appears.
2. Enter the directory path name of the BH-curve in the File Name field.
3. Specify the BH-curve file type (.bh format or .dat format).
4. Choose OK.
393
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Viewing the BH-Curve
You can modify the view of the BH-curve in the following ways:
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Fit All
Fit Drawing
Window
Zooms in toward a section of the BH-curve.
Zooms away from the BH-curve, displaying an expanded view.
Fits the entire BH-curve in the window.
Fits the entire BH-curve and its axes in the window.
Changes the window display.
Measure
Measures the distance between two points.
Grid
Specify the grid parameters.
SnapTo Mode Sets the snaps to grids or vertex settings.
Zoom In
Choose this to zoom on a particular area of the BH curve.
> To zoom in on the BH-curve:
1. Choose Zoom In. The cursor changes to cross-hairs.
2. Click on a point that marks one corner of an area you wish to zoom in on.
3. Click on the opposite vertex of the region you wish to zoom in on. The region
expands to fill the screen.
Zoom Out
Choose this to zoom away from an area of the BH-curve.
> To zoom away from the BH-curve:
1. Choose Zoom Out.
2. Click on a point that marks one corner of an area you wish to zoom away from.
3. Click on the opposite vertex of the region you wish to zoom away from.
Fit All
Go Back
Choose this to fit the entire BH-curve in the window.
Fit Drawing
Contents
Choose this to fit the entire BH-curve and its axes in the window.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
394
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Window
The window commands allow you to measure distances between points on the BH-curve,
specify the grid lengths and parameters, and set the snap mode of the BH-curve.
Window/Measure
Use this command to measure the distance between two points on the BH-curve.
> To do this:
1. Choose Window/Measure.
2. Click the left mouse button on the point you wish to measure from in the window.
3. Click the left mouse button on the point you wish to measure to.
4. Choose OK to choose a new point.
5. Click the right mouse button to end the command.
Window/Grid
Use this command to specify the grid parameters of the BH-curve.
> To specify the grid settings:
1. Choose Window/Grid. A pop-up window appears.
2. Enter the dH value for the BH-curve.
3. Enter the dB value for the BH-curve.
4. Toggle off grid visible to hide the grid. Leave it active to keep the grid visible.
5. Choose OK to accept the settings or choose Cancel to cancel the settings.
Window/SnapTo Mode
Use this command to specify the snap type for the BH-curve.
Go Back
> To set the snaps:
1. Choose Window/SnapTo Mode.
2. Toggle off the Snap to grid setting to move the snap point off the grid points.
3. Toggle off the Snap to vertex setting to move the snap off the vertices.
4. Choose OK to accept the settings or choose Cancel to ignore the changes.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
395
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Axes
Use these fields to modify how the axes for entering and displaying BH-curves are displayed, and to select the units in which the BH-curve is entered.
Minimum
Maximum
Intercept
ampere/
meter,
oersted
tesla,
gauss
Accept
Cancel
Round Off
Enter the minimum values to be displayed on the B and H axes.
Enter the maximum B and H values to be displayed on the axes.
View-only field showing the B and H values at the point where the
BH-curve intersects the B axis. The H value represents the material’s magnetic coercivity, Hc, and the B value represents its magnetic retentivity, Br.
Lets you select the units in which H values are entered and displayed. Click the left mouse button on this field to display a menu of
units. H values may be entered in ampere/meter (the default) or
oersted.
Lets you select the units in which B values are entered and displayed. Click the left mouse button on this field to display a menu of
units. B values may be entered in tesla (the default) or gauss.
Accepts the new axes settings and units.
Cancels the new axes settings and units, reverting to the previous
settings.
Rounds off the minimum and maximum B and H values to better display the BH-curve.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
396
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Defining a Perfect Conductor
Defining a New Anisotropic
Material
Defining Nonlinear Material
Entering a BH-Curve
Deleting a BH-Curve
Modifying B and H values for
a BH-Curve
Adding Points to a BH-Curve
Importing a BH-Curve
Exporting a BH-Curve
Viewing the BH-Curve
Axes
View
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
View
Choose View to view the entire BH-curve. A graph of the BH-curve similar to the one
shown below is displayed. Three new buttons appear beneath the view window:
Show Coords Displays the B and H-coordinates of the points you click on.
Plot Set
Specifies axis scales, tick marks, labels, plot headings, minimum
and maximum B and H values to be plotted, and whether a plot legend and axes are displayed.
Graph Set
Specifies the color, line thickness, line style, name and marker type
of the BH-curve. Also specifies whether the curve is visible on the
plot. If you do not choose to show the markers or the line, the curve
is not displayed on the plot.
Note:
You cannot make changes to the BH-curve while viewing a graph of it. To edit the
BH-curve, choose Edit. This returns you to the main screen.
These commands operate the same way as the following commands in the PlotData Utility:
•
•
•
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format Axes
Plot/Format Graphs
For more information on the commands, refer to the Plot menu in the PlotData utility.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
397
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Deriving a New Material
Deriving new materials from existing materials is the method used to create a family of
materials. This is to say that you can derive a series of new materials with slightly different
qualities than the parent material.
> To derive a new material:
1. Select the base material in the materials list. This is the parent material from which
the derived material stems.
2. Choose Derive. The name field under Material Attributes shows a new,
undefined material, MaterialX.
3. Double-click on the material name and enter a new name for the derived material
or accept the default name MaterialX.
4. Choose whether the derived material is a perfect conductor, anisotropic material,
or a nonlinear material.
5. Modify any values of the material attributes that you wish to assign to the new
material.
6. Choose Enter to accept the derived material or choose Revert to revert to the
unmodified material.
The derived material appears in the materials list.
Underiving a Material
You can underive any derived material, forcing it to revert to its original properties. The
underived material takes on a vacuum as its parent material.
> To underive a material:
1. Select the material in the materials list. The material name appears under the
Material Attributes heading.
2. Choose Underive. The material resets to an underived state.
Go Back
At this point, you can delete the material with the Clear command or rederive the material
to create a new one.
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
398
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics:
Material Manager
Functional Material Properties
Options
Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material
Properties
Functions
Vector Functions
Radial Vector Functions
Tangential Vector Functions
Functional and Vector Material Properties
Adding a New Material
Deriving a New Material
Underiving a Material
Deleting a Material
Deleting Derived Materials
The Material Manager
Deleting a Material
Deleting materials may become necessary to reduce the number of unwanted or incorrectly derived materials in the materials list.
> To delete a material from the local material database:
1. Select the Local material you wish to delete.
2. Choose Material. A menu appears.
3. Choose Clear.
The material is deleted.
Deleting Derived Materials
If you delete a material, any materials that have been derived from it will be listed as
Underived in the Material Attributes box. They will, however, retain the common characteristics of the deleted material.
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
399
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
A
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Add (Constraint command)
Add (Evaluator command)
Add (Project Manager command)
aliases
accessing directories with
deleting
Align
alignment
of spline control points
of text
of vertices
anisotropic materials, creating
Ansoft
distributors
products
arcs
Arrange commands
Mirror
Move
Rotate
Attributes
AutoCAD
construction lines
curved objects
decorations
default units
hidden objects
layers
objects
open lines
self-intersecting objects
translating into other formats
translating PC files on Sun workstations
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
translation problems with
translator options
axisymmetric models, size of drawing area
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
B
C
background
definition of
reserved name
use of in Maxwell 2D Field Simulator
backup files
Berkeley SPICE
BH-curves
adding points
axes
deleting
entering and creating
exporting
importing
modifying B and H values
viewing
black and white monitors, setting screen colors
black and white printers (workstation)
Boolean commands
Intersect
Simplify
Subtract
Union
borders, of Maxwell software windows
boundary conditions, and size of drawing region
buffer, paste
copying objects and text from
copying objects and text to
buttons
command
default
on/off
with menus
calculator buttons (signal calculator)
Change Dir (Project Manager command)
Change Project Dir (Project Manager command)
Change View
circles
circles, approximated by polygons
circuit models, deselecting
Clear
Close (File command)
Closed Objects
Color Manager commands
Exit
Load
Save
color maps
creating
loading
colors
changing with .Xdefaults file
default for objects and text
from the Microsoft Windows Color Manager
in black and white screen captures
modifying
of buttons (workstation)
of cables
of circuit blocks
of connectors
of geometric objects
of Microsoft Windows elements
of Motif elements
of plot axes
of plots
of pop-up windows (workstation)
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
of progress bars
of signal plots
of subwindow elements (on the PC)
of subwindow elements (on the workstation)
of text (PC)
of text (workstation)
of translated objects
of window frames
of 2D Modeler grid
saving changes
setting for black and white monitors
system
user
user-defined
Colors (Utilities panel command)
colors, printing
background
dithering
in black and white screen captures
print options
system colors and transparent background
command line options
Maxwell Control Panel
PlotData
commands
accessing from the tool bar
accessing with buttons
accessing with icons
accessing with the keyboard
accessing with the mouse
Compress
compressing projects
Configure commands (Process Manager)
Add Host
Modify Host
Remove Host
Constraint commands
Add
Delete
Enforce
Modify
constraints
adding
deleting
enforcing
in parametric sweeps
modifying
overview
ContecSPICE
Control menu (Windows)
Control menu (Windows), accessing
Coordinate System (Window commands)
coordinate system, global
measurements
resetting local coordinate system to
coordinate system, local
rotating
shifting
coordinates, displaying
Copy (Print Screen window)
Copy (Project Manager command)
Copy (2D Modeler)
creating equations (signal calculator)
curved lines
approximating
making smoother
curved objects, translating from AutoCAD
customer support
Cut
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
D
Default (Print Manager command)
defining the polynomial interpolation (signal calculator)
Delete (Evaluator command)
Delete (Project Manager command)
deleting
aliases
functions
objects
parametric equations
points in polylines
project directories
projects
text
deleting functions
Deselect All
directories, project
copying
creating
deleting
deleting aliases
organizing
selecting
structure of
structure of for Maxwell software products
use of alias
displaying
Maxwell Control Panel
PlotData
distributors
Drawing Plane
drawing plane
drawing region
and boundary conditions
and object background
specifying size of
use of in solution
Drawing Size
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
E
Edge (Reshape command)
edges
deleting
in objects with curved lines
Edit commands (Print Screen window), Copy
Edit commands (2D Modeler)
Attributes
Clear
Copy
Cut
Deselect All
Duplicate
Paste
Select
Show All
Undo Clear
Visibility
Edit/Attributes commands
By Clicking
Recolor
Rename
Edit/Duplicate commands
Along Arc
Along Line
Mirror Duplicate
Edit/Select commands
All Items
By Area
By Name
Closed Objects
Model Objects
NonModel Objects
Open Objects
Edit/Visibility commands
By Item
Hide Selection
Entire Window (Control menu)
Equation (PlotData)
error messages
errors
licensing log
messages
Evaluator commands
Add
Delete
Done
Help
Update
Exit (PlotData)
Export (PlotData)
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
F
Fast Fourier Transforms
field of view, objects displayed within
fields
highlighted by default
numeric
text
File commands (PlotData)
File commands (Print Screen window)
Exit
Open
Print
Print Setup
Save As
File commands (Process Manager)
Exit
Import Hosts
Save Configuration
File commands (2D Modeler)
Close
Exit
Import
New
Open
Print
Print Setup
Revert
Save
Save As
file formats
AutoCAD PC version (.dxf)
Berkeley SPICE
ContecSPICE
HSPICE
PSpice
SDRC I-DEAS Universal Format
2D Modeler (.sm2)
files
color
compressing
expressions
lock.inf
maxwellrc
maxwell.ini
opening
recovering
saving circuit models
translating. See translating, files
.dat
.lock
.rgb
.sm2
.Xdefaults
files, geometry
closing
creating
importing
Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, version 4.33
(.obs files)
opening
reverting to previous version
files, printing
from the Control menu
from the Print Screen window
GIF
PaintJet printers
PaintJet XL printers
saving screen contents to (workstation)
searching for (PC)
XWD
files, projects
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
backup
copying
deleting
moving
opening
renaming
reserved names
searching for
showing size of
files, translating
AutoCAD PC version (.dxf)
AutoCAD (.dxf)
Berkeley SPICE 3E2 (.spc)
choosing the destination
choosing the source
general procedure
Maxwell 2D Field Simulator version 4.33
(.obs)
overview
2D Modeler files (.sm2)
File/Print commands
Entire Window
Rectangle
Subwindow
Fill Solids
finite element mesh
and large dimensional difference
problems in creating
Fit All
Fit All (Material Manager)
Fit Drawing
Fit Drawing (Material Manager)
Fit Selection
fonts, in PostScript screen captures
Format Axes (PlotData)
Format Graphs (PlotData)
functional and vector material properties
functional material properties
deleting functions
modifying functions
Options
radial vector functions
tangential vector functions
vector functions
functional material properties, functions
Functions
functions
defining
deleting
displaying help messages
for parametric equations
intrinsic
modifying
naming variables
numerical values
updating variables
valid constants
valid operators
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
G
H
geometric models
adding text to
as a collection of closed objects
axisymmetric
cartesian and axisymmetric
complexity and processing requirements
general strategy for creating
inverted
problems with large dimensional differences
translating
translator options
GIF files
Grab screen (Print Screen window)
Grid
grids
cartesian
modify spacing of
mouse
polar
hatches
help
active regions on graphics
button commands
document title
help window functions
hotkeys
links
menu bar
selecting text
tool bars
topics lists
using online help and documentation
help button
for creating functions
for Evaluator
for PlotData window
Help commands
About Help
Contents
Index
On Context
On Control Panel
On Module
Shortcuts
help messages and mouse button functions
Help (Evaluator command)
host IDs
displaying
error messages
hotkeys
HSPICE
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
I
J
icons
accessing to change mouse settings on PCs
and Motif windows
and the tool bar
Import (2D Modeler)
index
information messages
Insert
Intersect (Boolean command)
intersecting objects
open objects
Jobs commands (Process Manager)
Modify
Remove
Submit
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
K
L
keyboard
accessing commands with
shortcuts
keyboard entry for selecting points
keys
arrow
grid (uv)
hotkeys
Tab
LaserJet printers
dither
halftone
hardcopy size
inverting black and white images
page layout
Less Options (Print Manager command)
lines, and AutoCAD
list boxes, in Ansoft software windows
loading signal equations (signal calculator)
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
M
Make Square
Material Manager
material properties
dependent and independent
electrostatic
functional
magnetostatic
materials
adding to the materials list
anisotropic materials
deleting existing materials
deriving from existing materials
nonlinear materials
perfect conductors
underiving existing materials
Maxwell Control Panel
accessing
command line options
commands
displaying
Overview
Maxwell Control Panel commands
Ansoft
displaying the panel
Exit
Print
Translators
Maxwell Eminence
accessing
and PlotData
project directory structure
Maxwell Multi-Layer Interconnect Modeler
accessing
directory structure
Maxwell Quick 3D Parameter Extractor, accessing
Maxwell Spicelink
accessing
and PlotData
Berkeley 3E2 SPICE
Maxwell Strata, accessing
Maxwell 2D
accessing
background object
displaying inverted models
project directory structure
version 4.33 (.obs)
Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor
accessing
displaying inverted models
2D Modeler file formats
Maxwell 3D
accessing
project directory structure
maxwellrc
and the default project directory
loading expressions with
maxwell.ini
and the default project directory
loading expressions with
Measure (Model command)
menu bar
for Ansoft modules
for 2D Modeler
menus, cascading
messages
error
for mouse button functions
information
query
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
warning
Microsoft Windows
Clipboard
Color Manager
command line
functions specific to
Program Manager
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT
Mirror
Mirror Duplicate
mirroring and copying
Model commands
Defaults
Drawing Plane
Drawing Size
Measure
SnapToMode
Model Objects
Model/Defaults commands
Color
Text Size
Window Settings
modifying functions
More Options (Print Manager command)
Motif
features in the 2D Modeler
maximize button
minimize button
restore button
title bar
mouse
snap-to behavior
snap-to behavior of
mouse buttons
functions of
mouse help messages
switching functions
use of
use of mouse on menu commands
mouse coordinates, displaying
mouse help messages
Move (Arrange command)
Move (Project Manager command)
Move (Reshape/Vertex command)
mwm
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
N
O
names
assigning to 2D objects
of function variables
of geometric objects
of projects
reserved
New (File command)
New (Project Manager command)
New (Project Manager command), bypassing
New (Window command)
nonlinear materials, creating
NonModel Objects
notes
entering for a project
saving
numeric functions (signal calculator)
Object commands
Arc
Circle
Polyline
Rectangle
Spiral
Spline
Text
objects
adding points and edges
attributes of
AutoCAD
background
changing the scale
colors of translated
complex shapes
contained within other objects
copying
copying between projects
deleting
deselecting
display options
duplicating
effects of deleting edges
importing complex objects
intersecting
making larger or smaller
mirroring
modeling thin objects
moving
names of
naming
non-model
overlapping
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
placing in paste buffer
repositioning
reshaping
rotating
selecting by area
selecting by name
self-intersecting
simplifying after boolean operation
spirals
subtracting
temporary
unioning
used in final model
zero-area
Object/Arc commands
Clockwise
Counter-Clockwise
Object/Circle commands
2 Point
3 Point
Object/Spiral commands
Circular
Rectangular
Open Objects
Open (PlotData)
Open (Print Screen) window
Open (Project Manager command)
Open (2D Modeler)
opening Maxwell 2D Field Simulator version
4.33 (.obs)
opening plot files
opening plots from data files
OpenLook
P
PaintJet printers
dither
halftone
hardcopy size
inverting black and white images
page layout
threshold
transparencies
PaintJet XL printers
dither
halftone
hardcopy size
inverting black and white images
page layout
threshold
transparencies
panning, large lists and models
parametric equations
entering functions for
help messages
hiding lines
plotting
plotting format options
specifying line style
specifying line widths
Paste (2D Modeler)
perfect conductors, creating
Plot commands (PlotData)
Equation
Export .sm2
Format Axes
Format Graphs
Open
Save As
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
PlotData commands
accessing outside of the Utilities panel
File
Plot
tool bar
Tools
View
Window
PlotData File commands
Exit
Import Signals
PlotData overview
PlotData Plot commands
Close
Edit Plot
Equation
Export .sm2
Format Axes
Format Graphs
New
Open
Save
Save As
PlotData Tools commands
Calculator
Show Coordinates
PlotData View commands
Command Prompt
Fit All
Make Square
Status Bar
Tool Bar
Zoom In
Zoom Out
PlotData Window commands
Cascade
Close
Tile
PlotData (Utilities panel command)
plotting signals and radiation fields
plotting (data files)
creating
displaying help messages
displaying square plot
format of
format options
general procedure
hiding lines
sample file
specifying line style
specifying line widths
plotting (fields), spectrum on black and white
printers
plotting (parametric equations)
deleting
displaying help messages
displaying square plot
ending point
format options
general procedure
hiding lines
plotted points per graph
saving
specifying line style
specifying line widths
specifying variables
specifying variables for
starting point
superimposing
points
deleting points in polylines
entering from the keyboard
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
selecting from several subwindows
points, spline control
aligning
displaying
moving
used in reshaping objects
points, vertex
adding
aligning
displaying
moving
used in reshaping objects
Polyline
polylines
polylines, and AutoCAD
PostScript printers
background color
colors
fonts
forcing colors to display as black
hardcopy size
inverting black and white images
line thickness
number of copies
page layout
Preferences commands (Process Manager)
Calendar
Default Host
Default Path
Save Preferences
Timeout
previewing equations (signal calculator)
Print Manager commands (workstation)
Default
Exit
Load
Save
Print Screen commands (PC)
File
Grab screen
Print Setup (Print Screen window)
Print (Maxwell Control Panel command)
Print (Print Screen window)
printing
active view
projects
setup
printing, PC
adding text to a printable screen
cancelling
from the Control menu
from the Print Screen window
overview
selecting print area
printing, workstation
adding text to a printable screen
and black and white printers
and color printers
and shaded text
background
cancelling
changing the current directory
color mapping
default parameters
dithering
effect of screen colors
fewer options
general procedure
halftone
image borders
inverting images
line thickness
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
loading printing options
more options
number of copies
page layout
saving print options
saving screen contents to a file
selecting the region to print
shading
size of image
spectrum plots on black and white printers
threshold
transparencies
UNIX print commands
Process Manager
Process Manager commands
program name, displaying in message bar
Project Manager
Project Manager commands
Add (project directories)
Change Dir
Change Project Dir
Compress
Copy (Projects)
Delete (project directories)
Delete (projects)
effects of bypassing
Move (Projects)
New (Projects)
Open
Projects
Recover
Rename
Save Notes
Size
projects
compressing
copying
creating
deleting
displaying information about
entering notes for
moving
opening
opening new projects
reclassifying
recovering
renaming
reserved names
saving notes for
selecting
showing size of
Projects Overview
PSpice
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Q
R
query messages
radial vector functions
radiation fields, viewing
Reclassify
reclassifying projects
Recolor
Recover (Project Manager command)
recovering projects
Rectangle (Control menu)
Rectangle (2D Modeler)
rectangles
Rename (Project Manager command)
Rename (2D Modeler)
reserved names
Reset
Reshape commands
Edge
Scale Selection
Vertex
Reshape/Edge commands
Delete
Number of Segments
Reshape/Vertex commands
Align
Insert
Move
resizing windows
Restore (Window menu)
restoring deleted items
Revert
Rotate (Arrange command)
Rotate (Window/Coordinate System command)
rotating objects
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
S
Save As (PlotData)
Save As (2D Modeler)
Save Notes
Save (2D Modeler)
saving
circuit models
notes for projects
plots
2D LINE definitions
Scale Selection
scaling, object dimensions
Schedule
scroll bars
scrolling, large lists and models
selecting objects and text
setting printer options
signal calculator
signals, viewing current and voltage
Simplify (Boolean command)
Size (Project Manager command)
smoothing curved lines
snap-to behavior of mouse
SnapToMode
Solid Modeler format, saving 2D Modeler files in
solutions (Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor) and
drawing region
Spiral (Object command)
spirals
circular
rectangular
Spline
splines
stack commands (signal calculator)
Status Bar (PlotData)
status information
cursor position
snap-to behavior of mouse
unit of length
Subtract (Boolean command)
subtracting objects
subtracting open objects
Subwindow (Control menu)
subwindows
cascading
closing
creating
displaying different views of drawing region
grid settings
local coordinate system
modifying view of
selecting points from several
tiling
versus project windows
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
T
U
table of contents
tangential vector functions
Text
text
adding to geometric models
alignment
attributes of
changing
color of
copying
copying between projects
default
deleting
entering
for annotating screen captures
italicizing
mirroring
size of
translating into other formats
unselecting
Text Size
tool bar
for PlotData
for 2D Modeler
2D Modeler
Tools commands (PlotData)
Calculator
Show Calculator
translator options, AutoCAD
Translators
Translators (Maxwell Control Panel command)
transparencies
Undo Clear
Union (Boolean command)
unioning objects
unioning open objects
units, displaying
UNIX print commands
Update (Evaluator command)
user interface
users, displaying
Utilities panel commands
Colors
Evaluator
PlotData
2D Modeler
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
V
W
values
default
entering
vector functions
radial
tangential
vuewm
warning messages
warnings, messages not appearing
Window commands (PlotData)
Window commands (2D Modeler)
Cascade
Change View
Close
Coordinate System
Fill Solids
Grid
New
Tile
Wire Frame
window managers
for PCs
for workstations
mwm
OpenLook
problems with non-Motif-based
vuewm
Window Settings
Window (Material Manager)
windows
adjusting the view
adjusting view of
Ansoft module menu bars
expanding
iconifying
list boxes
message bar
Motif appearance
moving
pop-up
printing active
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
resizing
restoring to original size
scroll bars
tiling
title bar
Windows for Workgroups
Windows NT
Windows NT Command Prompt window
windows, project
active
cascading
creating
tiling
versus subwindows
Window/Cascade commands
All
Projects
Subwindows
Window/Change View commands
Fit All
Fit Drawing
Fit Selection
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Window/Coordinate System commands
Reset
Rotate
Shift
Window/Tile commands
All
Projects
Subwindows
X
XWD files
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
Z
Numerics
Zoom In (Material Manager)
Zoom In (Window/Change View command)
Zoom Out (Material Manager)
Zoom Out (Window/Change View command)
2 Point
2D Modeler
accessing from Utilities panel
inverted models
2D Modeler, screen layout
active windows
drawing region
menu bar
message bar
project windows
status bar
subwindows
tool bar
2D objects
circles
exporting from PlotData
model
rectangles
three-point circles
3 Point
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Maxwell Control Panel — Index
Thumbtabs:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
Go Back
Contents
Index
Maxwell Online Help System
Copyright © 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation